Entries |
Document | Title | Date |
20080200169 | METHOD OF SCANNING FOR A NETWORK USING A PREFERRED RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY - A method of scanning for a network using a preferred radio access technology is useful for improving wireless communication network efficiency and conserving battery power at network nodes. The method includes camping on the network using a current radio access technology, where the current radio access technology is assigned a priority level (step | 08-21-2008 |
20080207201 | HIERARCHICAL SERVICE LIST - The present invention related to communicating between a network and user equipment in a wireless communication system. The invention includes receiving communications on a first frequency, receiving information on the first frequency, wherein the information indicates at least one transmission frequency having no associated uplink service, and determining not to search for any transmission frequency having no associated uplink service different from the at least one transmission frequency. | 08-28-2008 |
20080227447 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING CELL SELECTION TO HOME CELL OR PRIVATE NETWORK IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for performing cell selection to a Home cell or a Private network in a mobile communication system are provided, in which a User Equipment (UE) determines a candidate cell by measuring a serving cell and neighbor cells, receives an indicator indicating a Home cell or a Private network in system information from the candidate cell, determines whether the candidate cell is included in a Home cell or Private network list set in the UE, and selects the candidate cell if the candidate cell is included in the Home cell or Private network list. | 09-18-2008 |
20080227448 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AN UPLINK PILOT USING A SCANNING INTERVAL IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for transmitting an UpLink (UL) pilot using a scanning interval in a mobile communication system are provided. The method includes receiving a scanning response message including information on a UL pilot channel allocation mode from a serving Base Station (BS), measuring each DownLink (DL) channel state using DL signals of one or more neighboring BSs and transmitting a UL pilot to each of the one or more neighboring BSs in the UL pilot channel allocation mode, during a scanning duration. Accordingly, both UL and DL Quality of Service (QoS) may be considered during a handover operation. | 09-18-2008 |
20080227449 | PICH-HS TIMING AND OPERATION - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate employing a paging indicator channel in connection with high speed channels in a wireless communications network. A paging indicator transmission can be sent on the paging channel to one or more mobile devices. The paging indicator indicates that additional information such as a full paging messages, other control plane data or other user plane data is expected to be transmitted at a specific time instant (e.g., subframe) on the associated high speed channel. A set of parameters can be transmitted on common channels that specify a set of associated subframes in a high speed channel. Mobile devices can analyze the set of parameters to determine the associated subframes and receive the subframes in accordance with a schedule. | 09-18-2008 |
20080233954 | Method And System For Processing Results Derived From Detecting Channels Suitable For FM Transmission In An Integrated FM Transmit/Receive System - A method and system is provided for enabling communication, where a FM radio system including an integrated FM radio transmitter and FM radio receiver may use an in-band FM or out of band transmitter to communicate a dynamically generated list with alternate local FM channels to an in-band or out of band receiver of another FM radio device with a FM radio receiver. The generated list of local FM channels may be ranked according to the least neighboring channel interference and may be selected for tuning the FM radio device. The FM radio system and the FM radio device may both scan to generate a substantially matched list of local FM channels. In response to detecting a new signal of a transmitted channel by the FM radio system, the FM radio device may tune to the same channel using an open loop, closed loop or semi-open loop method. | 09-25-2008 |
20080233955 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING INTER-SYSTEM SEARCHES IN IDLE MODE - Techniques for performing searches by a user equipment (UE) are described. The UE may camp on a serving cell for a first radio access technology (RAT) (e.g., GSM) and may periodically perform searches for a second RAT (e.g., WCDMA). In an aspect, the UE may vary the rate of searches for the second RAT based on received signal levels for the first and second RATs. The UE may determine a difference between the received signal levels for the two RATs, compare the difference against at least one threshold, and select a search rate associated with a range within which the difference falls as the rate of searches for the second RAT. In another aspect, the UE may control certain aspects of searches (e.g., determine whether or not to perform searches or the rate of searches) for the second RAT by considering the frequency bands for the two RATs. | 09-25-2008 |
20080242297 | METHOD FOR SEARCHING FOR NETWORK IN RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for improving the network search rate by reducing the manual network search time in a radio communication system. System information messages are periodically broadcast, and the messages include a Master Information Block (MIB) containing location area information regarding at least one Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN). The MIB of the system information message received from the network is read during a network search by a User-Equipment (UE), displaying a PLMN list, and reading a System Information Block (SIB) of a PLMN selected from the PLMN list. | 10-02-2008 |
20080274737 | METHOD FOR SCANNING NETWORK IN MOBILE STATION AND THE MOBILE STATION USING THE SAME - A network scanning method in a mobile station and the mobile station using the method are disclosed, which can efficiently scan a network intended to be selected. The method includes: requesting a network selection, and scanning frequencies in an order starting from the highest receive-level of each frequency; detecting a carrier having network information during the scanning, and acquiring the network information; and sorting carrier frequencies and non-carrier frequencies of respective networks, based on the acquired network information. The frequency scanning is performed only for carrier frequencies. Therefore, corresponding services are provided rapidly to users. | 11-06-2008 |
20080287127 | FORWARD ACCESS CHANNEL MEASUREMENT OCCASION SCHEDULING DEVICE - A wireless device ( | 11-20-2008 |
20080293410 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SENSING DISCONTIGUOUS CHANNELS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method for sensing channel availability in a wireless network includes receiving a measurement request message which includes a channel interval list. A first channel interval in the list includes information associated with a first starting channel number, a first number of channels, and first linkage information of the channel interval list. The method includes processing information associated with the message, generating a first list of contiguous channels, and performing at least first channel measurement to determine a first channel availability for each of the first list of contiguous channels. The method also includes determining whether the channel interval list further includes a second channel interval that needs to be processed based on at least first linkage information, and if needed, generating a second list of contiguous channels and performing at least second channel measurement to determine a second channel availability for each of the second list of contiguous channels. | 11-27-2008 |
20080299968 | MOBILE STATION AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SELECTION METHOD - The present invention provides a mobile station which can perform communication using a specific communication system such as HSDPA and HSUPA, with priority, and a communication system selection method thereof. The mobile station for performing communication using a specific communication system includes: a transmission/reception unit for receiving broadcast information from a plurality of communication base stations; an acquisition unit for acquiring a plurality of pieces of cell information on cells which the mobile station can camp on and on a communication systems which can be used in the cells; and a control unit for selecting one cell where the specific communication system can be used from the plurality of pieces of cell information acquired by the acquisition unit, and performing processing for the mobile station to camp on this cell. By using this mobile station, communication using a specific communication system such as HSDPA or HSUPA can be performed with priority. | 12-04-2008 |
20080305790 | Mobile Communication Terminal and Radio Communication System - A mobile communications terminal divides a plurality of multipath signals associated with radio signals transmitted from a plurality of base stations | 12-11-2008 |
20080318570 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTERFACING AMONG MOBILE TERMINAL, BASE STATION AND CORE NETWORK IN MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A method, apparatus and a computer readable record media storing instructions for executing the same method for interfacing among a hybrid type synchronous or asynchronous terminal to a core network in a next generation mobile telecommunications system. The hybrid type synchronous or asynchronous radio network determines the operating type of the core network when the core network has a connection thereto, and sends the determined core network operating type information and information related to the core network to the hybrid type synchronous or asynchronous terminal, thereby allowing the synchronous or asynchronous terminal to smoothly perform a data interfacing operation with the core network. | 12-25-2008 |
20090011761 | METHOD OF PERFORMING CELL SEARCH IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of performing cell search includes receiving a primary synchronization signal (PSS) comprising a primary synchronization code (PSC), and receiving a secondary synchronization signal (SSS) comprising a first secondary synchronization code (SSC) and a second SSC. The first SSC and the second SSC are respectively scrambled by using a first scrambling code and a second scrambling code, and the first scrambling code and the second scrambling code are associated with the PSC. Detection performance on synchronization signals can be improved, and cell search can be performed more reliably. | 01-08-2009 |
20090011762 | METHOD OF PERFORMING CELL SEARCH IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of performing cell search includes receiving a primary synchronization signal (PSS) comprising a primary synchronization code (PSC) and receiving a secondary synchronization signal (SSS) comprising a first secondary synchronization code (SSC) and a second SSC, wherein the SSS includes a first SSS and a second SSS, the first SSC and the second SSC are arranged in that order in the first SSS, and the second SSC and the first SSC are arranged in that order in the second SSS. Detection performance on synchronization signals can be improved, and cell search can be performed more reliably. | 01-08-2009 |
20090017818 | SYSTEM SEARCH METHOD AND MOBILE TERMINAL PERFORMING THE SAME - A mobile terminal and system search method for the same are provided. The present invention enables a rapid system search with minimized battery consumption after a system loss. The system search method, using a search parameter specifying a first search time S | 01-15-2009 |
20090036123 | BAND SCANNING AND CELL SELECTION METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MOBILE STATION - A band scanning and cell selection method and apparatus is provided for improving cell selection efficiency of a mobile station. A band scanning method includes scanning, when the mobile station transitions to a normal service state, a preset frequency band and attempting, when the preset frequency band is available, to connect the mobile station to a cell through the frequency band. A cell selection method of includes searching, when a public land mobile network is selected, for cells in the public land mobile network, creating a suitable cell list and an acceptable cell list with reference to the search result, and attempting, when failed to find a suitable cell or to camp on a suitable cell, to camp on one of acceptable cells listed on the acceptable cell list. | 02-05-2009 |
20090036124 | SCANNING NEIGHBORING BASE STATIONS IN WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - Scanning neighboring base stations in a wireless access system is provided. In one embodiment, a method of scanning neighboring base stations for assessing channel quality includes receiving from a serving base station information associated with at least one neighboring base station, and transmitting a scanning request message from a mobile subscriber station to the serving base station, wherein the scanning request message comprises a requested scan duration and a requested scan iteration, the requested scan iteration being associated with a requested number of iterations of the scanning of the at least one neighboring base station. The method also includes receiving a scanning response message from the serving base station, wherein the scanning response message comprises an allowed scan duration and an allowed scan iteration, the allowed scan iteration being associated with an allowed number of iterations of the scanning of the at least one neighboring base station. | 02-05-2009 |
20090042565 | CONNECTION POINT TRIGGERED SCANNING FOR POSITIONING RADIOS - A system for automatically controlling the scanning frequency of a radio based positioning application in a wireless communication device (WCD) based on the connection point information of the WCD. The connection point information may be utilized to identify if the WCD is near a positioning-enabled environment. Scanning may be activated, or the scanning frequency may be increased, when the WCD is in an environment that is served by certain connection points (e.g., connection points located in a city). On the other hand, when the WCD is in an environment that is not served by certain connection points (e.g., a rural area), scanning may be stopped or the scanning frequency may be reduced to conserve power in the mobile device. | 02-12-2009 |
20090042566 | RASTER SKIPPING IN CO-BANDED MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICES BASED ON PREVIOUS SCANS FOR ANY BAND - The present invention discloses a solution for improving scan time in a co-banded mobile communication device. The solution can maintain a set of records within a data store of a co-banded mobile communication device. The set of records can include two or more communication rasters that represent an overlap between frequency bands used by different access technologies supported by the mobile communication device. A frequency band for a first access technology can be scanned for communication rasters allocated for that access technology. For each occupied communication raster, a related record of the set of maintained records can be updated to indicate that the communication raster is occupied. A frequency band for a second access technology can then be scanned within a previously determined time threshold of the first scan. The second scanning attempt can skip those communication rasters indicated as occupied by the set of records. | 02-12-2009 |
20090042567 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING CONNECTION IDENTIFIER INFORMATION IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for transmitting Connection Identifier (CID) information by a Base Station (BS) in a communication system is provided. The method includes transmitting a first message including information indicating a Transparent Connection Identifier (TCID) range expressed by a start value and an end value of TCIDs available in the BS, and information indicating a first transparent zone in which the BS is located, assigning one of TCIDs in the TCID range to a Mobile Station(MS) when a second message including a connection setup request from the MS is received and transmitting a third message including the assigned TCID to the MS, wherein the first transparent zone is one of a plurality of transparent zones supportable by the communication system, at least one BS is located in each transparent zone, and TCIDs in the TCID range are shared by the at least one BS included in the first transparent zone. | 02-12-2009 |
20090042568 | Communication control method, transmission device and computer program - A method for controlling radio communication such as mobile phone communication is provided for preventing an endless loop of a request for retransmission that is issued by a device on a reception side to a device on a transmission side. The transmission device performs processes of counting, for each RLC-PDU, the number of times when a request for retransmission is issued by the reception device (# | 02-12-2009 |
20090054060 | MULTI-USER DETECTOR AND METHOD FOR USE IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A multi-user detector ( | 02-26-2009 |
20090054061 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF LOCATING WIRELESS CONNECTION AMONG A PLURALITY OF WIRELESS CONNECTIONS - A system and method of locating a wireless connection among a plurality of possible wireless connections. More particularly, a system and method of locating a user preferred wireless connection among a plurality of possible wireless connections. The method includes scanning for available networks and determining whether the available networks satisfy one or more user preferences. The method further includes establishing a secondary network connection with one of the available networks based on one or more user preferences being satisfied. | 02-26-2009 |
20090054062 | METHOD FOR CATEGORIZATION OF MULTIPLE PROVIDERS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SERVICE ENVIRONMENT - A communication device locates a preferable wireless service provider in a multi-service provider environment using a frequency band search schedule. Initially, the communications device registers with a less preferred service provider in a first frequency band. While remaining registered with the less preferred service provider, the device examines several frequency bands in the order specified by the frequency band search schedule. A frequency band is examined by dividing the frequency band into many sub-bands, and by locating the strongest signal above a threshold within the sub-band being examined. The examination continues until a second frequency band having a more preferred service provider is located. The communication device then registers with the more preferred service provider. The category of service provider may be identified and displayed on the communication device. | 02-26-2009 |
20090054063 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TAKING MEASUREMENTS IN UNIVERSAL MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS USER EQUIPMENT - A method and apparatus for taking measurements in a mobile telecommunications system are disclosed, the system comprising a network of a plurality of cells and at least one user equipment device. The method comprises, at the user equipment device, receiving a measurement control set-up command and, in response the user equipment device, setting up the measurements. Then it monitors for a change in state of the UE and, in response to a change in state, issuing a measurement control pause command and, in response, the user equipment device stopping taking measurements, and maintains the measurement settings initialised previously. The device then monitors for a change in state of the UE and, in response to a change in state, issuing a measurement control resume command and, in response, the user equipment device resumes taking measurements with the maintained measurement settings. | 02-26-2009 |
20090061862 | PEER TO PEER SERVICE DISCOVERY SHARING - If the mobile station ( | 03-05-2009 |
20090061863 | TERMINAL DEVICE CONTROL SERVER AND METHOD THEREFOR - An apparatus and a method for a terminal device control server. The terminal device control server collecting, storing and providing information (i.e. device intelligence) relating to a plurality of terminal devices in a mobile communication network. A policy based control mechanism can be used in conjunction with one or more authorization lists and the device intelligence to respond to requests from various elements in the network to allow or deny access to the network or to services within the network to specific terminal devices. The device intelligence can alternatively be used to improve the effectiveness of service offerings in the network by providing information associated with a specific terminal device to other elements that adapt their services offerings and interactions to the capabilities of the specific terminal devices. | 03-05-2009 |
20090061864 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND CELL SEARCHING METHOD THEREOF - A mobile communication system and cell searching method of the mobile communication network is provided for simplifying a synchronization process required for selecting a target cell. The cell searching method for a mobile communication system includes transmitting, at a base station, a first synchronization signal of a first slot of a frame of a first channel at a higher transmission power than a transmission power of a remainder of the frame of the first channel, acquiring, at a mobile station, a slot synchronization using the first synchronization signal, and acquiring, at the mobile station, a frame synchronization using a second synchronization signal of a second channel, wherein the second synchronization signal corresponds to the first synchronization signal. | 03-05-2009 |
20090061865 | Method for Fast Recovery of Normal Services - A method for fast recovery of normal services on repeatedly traversed routes is disclosed. A mobile device searches for recent cell information when the mobile device loses normal services. When the recent cell information is found, the mobile device may retrieve designated cells information associated with the recent cell information. The designated cells information identifies a set of designated cells from which the mobile device has most recently regained normal services. The mobile device then scans the set of designated cells to determine whether a designated cell is available to the mobile device and then acquires normal services from the available designated cell. | 03-05-2009 |
20090061866 | Apparatus and method for power saving in a wireless communication system - An apparatus and method for power saving in a wireless communication system are provided. The method includes performing scheduling considering a channel state of at least one MS located in a service area during an ith scheduling interval, confirming if there is an MS not to be selected at an (i+1) | 03-05-2009 |
20090061867 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING CHANNEL RE-SELECTION - A method for re-selecting control channels in a mobile station reduces the use of resources by limiting an evaluation of candidate control channels to those channels which satisfy certain criteria and are deemed to be eligible control channels. As a consequence, resources are not spent on attempting to re-select a control channel that is not compatible with the mobile station. | 03-05-2009 |
20090075651 | Enhanced Terrestrial Mobile Location - Methods and systems for determining whether a mobile radio terminal is on or out of a zone in a radio communications network. The methods and systems provide for generating a profile representative of the zone using measurements taken by the mobile radio terminal and/or the network and/or using predicted values. A comparison is then made between subsequent measurements or values and the profile to make a determination as to whether the mobile radio terminal is in or out of the zone. The methods and systems are applicable to any zone-based application including differential call charging, security applications, buddy finder services, mobile gaming and location based services in general. | 03-19-2009 |
20090075652 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND SYSTEM SCAN METHOD THEREOF - A mobile terminal and system scan method thereof is provided for effectively acquiring system information even in a weak electrical field area using Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI). A system scan method for a mobile terminal includes evaluating, when the mobile terminal is turned on, received signal strengths of all channels registered to a preferred roaming list, creating a candidate channel list listing channels, each having a received signal strength greater than a threshold value, performing a full-scan process on the channels listed in the candidate channel list, and performing, when the full-scan process fails to find a system, a power saving process, wherein the full-scan process and power saving process are performed alternately until the system is found. | 03-19-2009 |
20090075653 | Channel scanning method and apparatus for mobile node - A channel scanning method and apparatus for a wireless network is provided for improving channel scanning efficiency. A channel scanning method of the present invention includes selecting at least one of a plurality of available channels according to a predetermined channel selection formula; broadcasting a predetermined message on the at least one available channel; detecting response messages transmitted on the available channels in response to the predetermined message; and searching for access points on the basis of information extracted from the response messages. | 03-19-2009 |
20090088154 | SYSTEM SEARCH FOR FULL SERVICE WHILE ON A CELL WITH LIMITED SERVICE - Techniques for performing system searches to find a suitable cell to receive full service while camped on a cell with limited service are described. Initially, a user equipment (UE) may camp on a first cell and receive limited service. The UE may perform a system search in background to find a suitable cell to receive full service. By performing the system search in background, the UE can receive paging messages and perform cell reselection and/or other tasks while the system search is pending and may also be able to obtain limited service with little or no delay when requested by a user. The UE may suspend the system search prior to each paging occasion, receive paging messages applicable for the UE, and then resume the system search. The UE may receive a request for limited service (e.g., emergency call), suspend or abort the system search, and obtain the requested limited service. | 04-02-2009 |
20090104905 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING HOME NODE B SERVICES - A method and apparatus for supporting home Node B (HNB) services are disclosed. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) receives HNB access restriction information from an HNB and accesses the HNB if an access to the HNB is allowed based on the HNB access restriction information. The HNB access restriction information may be a closed subscriber group identity (CSG ID), a status bit indicating whether an HNB cell is available or not, an identity of WTRUs that are allowed to access the HNB, information indicating whether an access to a cell is barred or not. The WTRU may trigger measurements for cell reselection even though signal strength on a currently connected cell is above a threshold. The measurement may be triggered manually, periodically, under the instruction from the network, or based on a neighbor cell list including information about HNB cells located nearby. | 04-23-2009 |
20090111466 | WLAN scanning by prevalence of access point deployment on certain channels - A wireless local area network client device scans for wireless local area networks using a scanning scheme that takes into account the relative prevalence, in a population of access points, of access point deployment on the channels to be scanned. In one aspect, channels on which more access points in the population are deployed are scanned prior to channels on which fewer access points in the population are deployed. In another aspect, channels on which more access points in the population are deployed are scanned more often than channels on which fewer access points in the population are deployed. In yet another aspect, channels on which more access points in the population are deployed are scanned prior to and more often than channels on which fewer access points in the population are deployed. | 04-30-2009 |
20090117896 | Distinguishing Between Synchronized and Asynchronous Mobile Communications Networks - A user equipment is operated in a mobile communications system, wherein a network part of the mobile communications system is capable of operating in a synchronized mode or in an asynchronous mode. Operation includes recording timing information about a periodically occurring signal received from a neighboring cell. The recorded timing information is used in a blind detection process that ascertains whether the network part of the mobile communications system is operating in the synchronized mode or in the asynchronous mode by detecting at least whether the periodically occurring signal received from the neighboring cell occurred within a predetermined window of time of a corresponding periodically occurring signal received from a serving cell. The detected operating mode of the network part of the mobile communications system is used for controlling subsequent operation of the user equipment. | 05-07-2009 |
20090117897 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AUTOMATICALLY DETERMINING NEIGHBOR CELLS IN A WIRELESS TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods and apparatuses for automatically determining neighbor cells are disclosed. Cell information is received. The received cell information is compared with a list of old neighbor cells. When a new cell is detected, a determination is made as to whether the detected new cell covers the same geographical area as any of the old neighbor cells. When the new cell covers the same geographical area as at least one of the cells of the list, the new cell is stored as a neighbor cell in the list. Cell information is received. The received cell information is compared with a list of old neighbor cells. New neighbors are detected based on the comparison. A determination is made as to whether there are cells in a same geographic area as the new neighbors. A determination is made as to whether there are new cells in a same geographic area as the old neighbor cells. The new neighbors, the cells in the same geographic area as the new neighbors, and the new cells are stored as neighbors in the list. | 05-07-2009 |
20090131047 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REDUCING FREQUENCY SPACE FROM FREQUENCY SEARCH - A method and apparatus for reducing frequency space from code space search is disclosed in a wireless network. The method and apparatus reduces the frequency space without compromising the probability of detection, so that user equipment can expedite system acquisition and reduce power consumption. To reduce the frequency space, the described aspects note that the power spectral density of the WCDMA signal is essentially flat within the channel bandwidth. By capturing in-phase quadrature samples and doing frequency domain analysis of the signal in bandwidth around the center frequency, to the described aspects can eliminate some channels from the WCDMA code space search during frequency scan. | 05-21-2009 |
20090131048 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE TERMINAL DEVICE, METHOD OF DETECTING FREQUENCY USED IN THEM, AND PROGRAM FOR DOING THE SAME - A mobile communication system is comprised of a mobile phone device, a GSM network, and a W-CDMA network. A controller mounted in the mobile phone device updates GSM actually-used frequency data or W-CDMA actually-used frequency data both stored in a memory, in accordance with a DL frequency of a GSM cell or a W-CDMA cell detected by means of a GSM cell-searcher or a W-CDMA cell-searcher. The controller determines non-used frequencies not used in each of frequency bands, based on the actually-used frequency data, and causes the GSM cell-searcher or the W-CDMA cell-searcher to carry out cell-searching only with frequencies which may be used, except non-used frequencies. | 05-21-2009 |
20090137246 | Method and Apparatus for Neighbor List Updates - An apparatus and method for maintaining information during neighbor list updates comprising acquiring information of a first plurality of GSM neighbor cells; recording and keeping the information for a time period T; receiving a second plurality of GSM neighbor cells; comparing the second plurality of GSM neighbor cells with the first plurality of GSM cells in the record; if a GSM neighbor cell from the second plurality of GSM neighbor cells is not in the record, gathering information pertaining to the GSM neighbor cell; and if at least one GSM neighbor cell from the second plurality of GSM neighbor cells is in the record, determining if the age of the information pertaining to the at least one GSM neighbor cell is less than the time period T and if less than T, locating the at least one GSM neighbor cell. | 05-28-2009 |
20090137247 | Channel scanning method and apparatus for use in dual-mode mobile station - A channel scanning method and apparatus for use in a dual-mode mobile station are provided. A mobile communication interface is wirelessly connected to a mobile communication network. An unlicensed wireless interface is wirelessly connected to an unlicensed wireless network and based on Internet protocol. A storage stores at least one element of priority channel information and scan period information for searching for a wireless local area network access point (WLAN AP) of the unlicensed wireless network. A central processor alternately scans all channels and priority channels in order to search for the WLAN AP according to the scan period information stored in the storage. The number of channels to be scanned can be minimized by alternately scanning channels, and consumption of electricity can be minimized by reducing the number of scans during a given time in a region where the unlicensed wireless network is not configured. | 05-28-2009 |
20090137248 | METHOD OF EXECUTING SCANNING IN BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - The primitives between an upper management layer and the MAC layer within a mobile station and a base station are defined in order to specify and clarify the operations within the protocol stack layers in a broadband wireless access system to allow a mobile station to perform scanning procedures. Media Independent Handover (MIH) procedures can be achieved because the NCMS and MIH layer can communicate through use of these primitives. | 05-28-2009 |
20090143067 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND CHANNEL SCANNING METHOD THEREOF - A mobile terminal is provided that includes a wireless communication unit configured to receive channel information and scan at least one channel, a controller configured to generate a channel database using the received channel information and generate a channel list according to a result of real time channel scanning using the channel database, and an output unit configured to display the channel list according to the result of the real time channel scanning under control of the controller. | 06-04-2009 |
20090149176 | METHOD FOR SCANNING WIRELESS FREQUENCIES - A method of scanning frequencies for registration onto a wireless service provider by a wireless device is provided. The inventive method comprises predefining a priority sequence of frequencies in association with each of a plurality of locations. Itinerary information is received and a current expected location of the device in real-time based is determined based on the itinerary information. The device then scans frequencies according to any priority sequence predefined for the current expected location. | 06-11-2009 |
20090156205 | Method and Apparatus for Establishing a Wireless Network Signal Acquisition Rate - Methods and apparatuses are provided for use by, or use with or in, a portable wireless device that allow for a wireless network signal acquisition rate to based, at least in part, on movement data associated with the portable wireless device. | 06-18-2009 |
20090156206 | Frequency Band Selection Methods and Apparatus - To avoid problems caused by conventional cell search algorithms, a user equipment in a mobile communication system uses knowledge of its previous geographical position and travel times together with stored information on frequency band allocations to determine the frequency band(s) it should search when it is in an out-of-service state, which can result from loss of radio coverage or from power-off. | 06-18-2009 |
20090156207 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF TRANSMISSION OF AN ACCESS PROBE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus for transmission of an access probe in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes determining a ProbeSequenceNumber, determining an AccessSequenceID and adding it to a public data, determining ProbeNumber greater than MaxProbesPerSequence to perform the following: setting the ProbeNumber to ‘1’, incrementing the ProbeSequence Number by 1, determining an AccessCarrier by monitoring LoadControl bits on different carriers, using overhead parameters corresponding to selected Access Carrier, adding the AccessCarrier to the public data. The method further includes determining a DelayToNextProbe value, starting a timer for the DelayToNextProbe frames, determining an InitialProbePower value, transmitting a probe using AccessSequenceID, PilotPN, AccessCarrier and Power and incrementing the ProbeNumber. | 06-18-2009 |
20090163204 | Method and Apparatus for Scanning for Cells in a Wireless Communications Network - A method of creating a candidate list of available cells for access by a wireless communications device, the method comprising, for each of a plurality of supported frequencies: measuring a received signal strength, and suppressing cell detection on a frequency if: a stored result of a determination of whether a cell was previously detected on the frequency is negative; and the measured received signal strength for the frequency is below a threshold criterion. | 06-25-2009 |
20090170508 | METHOD OF SEARCHING CODE SEQUENCE IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method of searching a code sequence in a cell based mobile communication system, by which a receiving side is able to code sequence detection efficiently. In a code sequence transmitting method for an efficient code sequence search in a mobile communication system, the code sequence transmitting method includes a step of boosting at least one tone for a code sequence and a step of transmitting the code sequence having the boosted at least one tone to a receiving side. | 07-02-2009 |
20090170509 | System and Method for Modulation Scheme Changes - A system and method are disclosed that allow changes of a modulation and coding scheme (MCS) without overhead signaling. A priori, a network device and a user device know the manner in which the MCS will be changed. In one embodiment, the network device indicates the MCS to be used to decode a second portion of a message in a first portion of the message. In another embodiment, the user device blind detects the MCS used over a sub-set of MCSs. | 07-02-2009 |
20090170510 | NEIGHBOR CELL MANAGEMENT METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR A MOBILE TERMINAL - A neighbor cell management method and apparatus is provided for adjusting a number of neighbor cells to be managed adaptive to a mobility and electric field status of a mobile terminal. The neighbor cell management method determines a number of cell changes in a first interval as counted by a first timer and determines a received signal strength of a current serving cell, determines a mobility of the mobile terminal and electric field status based on the number of cell changes and received signal strength, and adjusts a number of neighbor cells listed on a neighbor cell list according to the mobility and electric field status. | 07-02-2009 |
20090176490 | Systems and Methods for Automatically Determining the Global Cell Identifier of a Neighboring Cell - The present application discloses systems and methods for automatically adding a unique identifier associated with a cell to a neighbor cell list associated with another cell. In some embodiments, the method includes: selecting a particular mobile terminal from a set of mobile terminals; instructing the particular mobile terminal to obtain and report the unique identifier; receiving from the particular mobile terminal the unique identifier; and adding the unique identifier to the neighbor cell list, wherein the step of selecting the particular mobile terminal from the set of mobile terminals comprises determining which of the mobile terminals in the set appears to have a relatively high probability of obtaining the unique identifier within a certain window of time and selecting that mobile terminal. | 07-09-2009 |
20090176491 | MESSAGE TRANSMISSION IN WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - A method for transmitting messages to alter the operating status between a mobile station and a base station in a wireless access system comprises, at the mobile station, transmitting a first message to the base station, setting a first count to a first predetermined value and enabling a first, the first message requesting a alteration in operating status between the mobile station and the base station, whereupon expiration of the first timer before receiving a second message from the base station, the count is decremented and, if the count is above a second predetermined value, the first timer is reset and the first message is retransmitted to the base station. The method also comprises, at a base station, receiving the first message, transmitting a second message to the mobile station and enabling a second timer, whereupon expiration of the second timer, the alteration in operating status is effected. | 07-09-2009 |
20090181669 | RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS - A radio base station apparatus having an improved cell search performance in a scalable bandwidth system. A base station ( | 07-16-2009 |
20090181670 | Method and Related Communications Device for Improving Discontinuous Reception Functionality - A method of improving discontinuous reception (DRX) functionality for a user equipment (UE) of a wireless communication system is disclosed, so as to allow continuous reception of following transmissions during a retransmission period. The method includes steps of monitoring a Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH) when an On Duration Timer, a DRX Inactivity Timer or a DRX Retransmission Timer is running; and starting or restating the DRX Inactivity Timer when the PDCCH indicates the UE a new transmission. | 07-16-2009 |
20090186613 | Method of performing random access procedure in wireless communication system - A method includes transmitting a random access preamble, receiving a random access response as a response of the random access preamble, wherein the random access response comprises an uplink resource assignment and a request for transmission of a Channel Quality Indicator (CQI), and transmitting the CQI in the uplink resource assignment. | 07-23-2009 |
20090191866 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SELF CONFIGURING NETWORK RELATIONS - Systems and methods that enable a network to configure its neighbor relation (e.g., automatically) by commanding each user equipment (UE) to scan its respective area for neighbor base stations on a predetermined frequency or radio access technology. Moreover, the network can compile lists (e.g., whitelists that identify base stations associated with the network, and black lists that indicate base stations associated with foreign networks) and advise the UEs accordingly (e.g., regarding possibilities for availability of base stations.) The network can therefore configure its neighbor relations automatically and with a higher precision as compared to manual configurations. | 07-30-2009 |
20090197598 | CUMULATIVE NEIGHBORING CELL LIST - A method and apparatus for reducing the number of cells that must be broadcast and the number of cells that a mobile terminal must measure when different frequencies and technologies must be listed as neighboring cells. | 08-06-2009 |
20090197599 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING/UPDATING SYSTEM INFORMATION - A method of transmitting/updating system informations is disclosed. The present invention includes transmitting channel descriptor transmission control information including an index of the system information classified into a plurality of groups to a terminal at a start timing point of an arbitrary control interval and transmitting the system information of a corresponding group to the terminal at a transmission timing point according to the index in the control interval. According to the above embodiments of the present invention, it is able to non-periodically perform scheduling on system informations classified by a base station. It is able to decrease an update time of system information as well as a time taken for network entry and initialization of terminals. And, it is able to obtain distributed effect of an initial ranging attempt in aspect of system. | 08-06-2009 |
20090197600 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MEASURING SIGNAL QUALITY IN A PORTABLE BROADCASTING NETWORK AND SYSTEM SUPPORTING THE SAME - An apparatus and method for measuring signal quality information in a mobile broadcasting network are provided, as well as a system supporting the same. A broadcast server provides a reporting condition for signal quality to a mobile terminal using a control message. The mobile terminal, when it satisfies the reporting condition, transmits a reporting message for signal quality to a management server managing signal qualities. The reporting message includes signal quality measurement results at the current location. In this way, information on the low-signal quality area is automatically collected from the mobile terminal, making it possible to rapidly and easily comprehend the sate of the mobile broadcasting network depending on the collected information. | 08-06-2009 |
20090197601 | METHOD OF UPDATING CHANNEL INFORMATION BY A MOBILE STATION THAT IS IN POWER SAVING MODE - A method of updating channel information by a mobile station (MS) that is in power saving mode is disclosed. More specifically, the method includes the MS which receives status information of a first channel descriptor and transmission frame information which includes when the first channel descriptor is to be transmitted. Furthermore, the MS compares status information of the first channel descriptor with status information of a second channel descriptor. Here, the second channel descriptor is stored in the MS. Lastly, if the compared status information are different, the MS receives the first channel descriptor according to the transmission frame information. | 08-06-2009 |
20090203376 | SUITABLE TRIGGER MECHANISM TO CONTROL NEW CELL IDENTIFICATION IN UE WHEN IN DRX MODE - A cell identification method is provided. The method includes determining a reception state in a wireless device and comparing a reception cycle to a subframe parameter in the wireless device. The method also includes identifying a subsequent wireless cell within a predetermined time of the comparison. | 08-13-2009 |
20090209253 | Method and Device for Detecting a GSM Channel of Interest - A method for detecting a GSM channel of interest, in a wireless communication device capable of supporting broadband as well as narrowband wireless systems, includes receiving ( | 08-20-2009 |
20090209254 | Radio Communication System, Radio Base Station, And Base Station Switching Method - A radio communication system, including; a first and second base station; and at least one terminal, wherein the first base station including: an advertisement message generation unit which generates an advertisement message including channel information of the second base station; a handover request message generation unit which generates a handover request message including a handover instruction to the second base station; and a transmission unit which transmits the advertisement message and the handover request message to the terminal, and the terminal including: a receive unit which receives the advertisement message and the handover request message; and a terminal side handover processing unit which detects whether a handover to the second base station instructed by the handover request message is possible, and performs handover to the second base station, using the channel information of the second base station included in the advertisement message, if the handover can be possible. | 08-20-2009 |
20090215450 | Technique for Performing a Random Access Procedure Over a Radio Interface - The invention relates to a technique of performing a random access procedure over a radio interface ( | 08-27-2009 |
20090215451 | Apparatuses and methods for transmitting and receiving control information in a wireless communication system based on Cognitive Radio (CR) - A wireless communication system based on a Cognitive Radio (CR) is provided. A method includes checking channels unused by a licensed system through a spectrum sensing; selecting one of the channels unused by the licensed system as a control channel based on a channel quality per channel; and transmitting control information to terminals within a cell over the control channel. | 08-27-2009 |
20090215452 | EFFICIENT FREQUENCY ASSIGNMENT FOR MOBILE DEVICES IN COEXISTING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Efficient frequency assignment for mobile terminals in coexisting wireless communication systems is described herein. The coexisting wireless communication systems comprise a macro communication system and a localized communication system. Two prioritized lists are defined, a first list comprising a first entry relating to the macro communication system and the second entry relating to the localized communication system, the first and second entries each listing at least one common frequency. Based on the first list, a mobile terminal uses communication protocols associated with the localized communication system. | 08-27-2009 |
20090221286 | Apparatus and method for controlling effect of interference in wireless communication system - An apparatus and a method for selecting a candidate channel to change an operating channel so as to minimize effect of interference in a wireless communication system using a Cognitive Radio (CR) function are provided. The method includes confirming an operating channel of at least one neighbor cell and candidate channel set to a third group by the neighbor cell; setting a candidate channel used as the operating channel of the neighbor cell among at least one candidate channels changeable to the operating channel, to a third group of lowest priority; setting candidate channels set to the third group of the neighbor cell among candidate channels not set to the third group, to a second group; and setting candidate channels set to neither the second group nor the third group, to a first group of highest priority. | 09-03-2009 |
20090221287 | CELL SELECTION USING ENHANCED GENERAL NEIGHBOR LIST METHODS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate providing neighbor lists to devices comprising pilot frequencies of access points in a specific geographic region. Using the neighbor list, the devices can discover the access points based on scanning the frequencies for the pilot and can determine additional communication parameters from the discovery or based on a subsequent request resulting from discovery. In this regard, access point information need not be provisioned to the devices for locating the access points, selecting/reselecting the access points, providing the access points in a list to an interface, locating the device using triangulation based on GPS position of the access points, and/or the like. | 09-03-2009 |
20090221288 | METHOD FOR IMPLEMENTING RANDOM ACCESS OF NEW ACCESS NODE AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM THEREOF - A method for implementing a random access of a new access node and a system thereof are provided, which belong to a wireless communication field, and enable the new access node within the coverage of relay stations to implement the random access. In the application, when the new access node is located within the coverage of the relay stations, each of the relay stations notifies an access request sent from the new access node to a synchronization station via a report message, and the synchronization station compares the access request forwarded by each of the relay stations and the access request received by itself from the same new access node, selects a station with the best signal quality of the received access request, and implements the access of the new access node in accordance with the types of selected station and the synchronization station itself. | 09-03-2009 |
20090233598 | RADIO COMMUNICATION BASE STATION APPARATUS, RADIO COMMUNICATION MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD IN MULTI-CARRIER COMMUNICATION - There is provided a mobile station device capable of effectively performing interference suppression symbol synthesis while suppressing the lowering of the transfer rate when using the repetition technique in multi-carrier communication. In the mobile station device ( | 09-17-2009 |
20090239532 | METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR ESTIMATING RECEIVED QUALITY OF COMMUNICATION AREA AND PROGRAM - An area to be estimated is sectioned to minute sections, the received signal qualities from a plurality of installed base stations ( | 09-24-2009 |
20090239533 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SEARCHING FOR CLOSED SUBSCRIBER GROUP CELLS - A method and apparatus for searching for closed subscriber group (CSG) cells are described. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) transmits, to a network of CSG cells, a measurement/cell-search gap request message including a cause value having at least one bit that indicates whether the request message was transmitted due to a manual cell search command or a WTRU autonomous determination. The WTRU receives a measurement/cell-search gap allocation message from the network in response to the measurement/cell-search request message. The WTRU also may determine whether it has a discontinuous reception (DRX) gap that is long enough to read a master information block (MIB) and a system information block (SIB) of a neighboring CSG cell. If the DRX gap is not long enough, the WTRU may transmit a measurement/cell-search gap request message to the network, or autonomously tune away from a cell currently serving the WTRU to read the MIB and SIB. | 09-24-2009 |
20090247156 | REFERENCE SIGNAL MANAGEMENT IN MOBILE SYSTEMS - A reference signal management (RSM) program executing on a mobile device detects multiple reference signals, allocates those reference signals into groups, and performs reference signal management functions using information conveyed in the reference signals. The RSM program detects both broadband and narrowband reference signals and maintains updated groups of reference signals that are transmitted from access points with independent configurations or different radio technologies. Battery power of the mobile device is efficiently used to manage reference signals in heterogeneous network environments by preventing unnecessary handoffs, overhead downloads, access probes and new registrations. Reference signals are managed from both synchronous and asynchronous sectors and in idle mode as well as in connected state mode. The RSM program performs functions such as managing handoffs between access points, managing an idle mode of the mobile device, managing an active group of the detected reference signals, and collecting overhead parameters for the mobile device. | 10-01-2009 |
20090247157 | FEMTO CELL SYSTEM SELECTION - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate identifying and/or selecting femto cells in a wireless communication environment. A mobile device can scan an Auxiliary Pilot Channel to detect auxiliary pilot channel information (e.g., a particular Walsh Code, . . . ) sent from a base station. Moreover, the identified auxiliary pilot channel information can be evaluated to detect a characteristic of the base station. For instance, the identified auxiliary pilot channel information can be compared with stored auxiliary pilot channel information (e.g., Walsh Code(s) included in a whitelist, blacklist, . . . ). Moreover, a Synchronization Channel can be read based upon the detected characteristic. Further, a Common Pilot Channel, for example, can be analyzed to search for pseudo-noise (PN) offset(s) reserved for femto cell base stations, and the scan of the Auxiliary Pilot Channel can be initiated in response to detecting at least one reserved PN offset. | 10-01-2009 |
20090247158 | RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD AND RADIO RECORDING MEDIUM - A radio communication method for a radio communication device having a first communication unit and a second communication unit includes determining whether a connection between the radio communication device and a local-area radio network is in a difficult state while the radio communication device is connected to the local-area radio network by the second communication unit, obtaining position information through the started first communication unit, reading out communication set information recorded with the obtained position information that records communication set information, and the position information obtained from the base station at a position connectable to the local-area radio network associated with the communication set information relating with each other, and detecting a connectable local-area radio network based on the read communication set information when the communication determination unit determines that a connection between the radio communication device and a local-area radio network is in the difficult state. | 10-01-2009 |
20090247159 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR FACILITATING EXECUTION OF AUTOMATIC NEIGHBOR RELATION FUNCTIONS - Methods and apparatuses for facilitating execution of automatic neighbor relation (ANR) functions are provided. A base station and operation and maintenance (OAM) system are disclosed. The base station receives neighbor cell detection data identifying neighbor cells detected by an access terminal. The base station also receives neighbor cell management data generated by the OAM system, which facilitates performing an ANR function. The base station then automatically updates a neighbor list according to the neighbor cell management data and the neighbor cell detection data. | 10-01-2009 |
20090253429 | SCHEDULING APPARATUS AND METHOD IN A DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEM - A scheduling method in a distributed antenna system is provided. Each of a plurality of Mobile Stations (MSs), respectively corresponding to each subchannel, are classified as a Single Transmission (ST) MS or a Cooperative Transmission (CT) MS according to a CT criterion. An MS with a maximum channel capacity is selected from among the classified MSs. Resources arc allocated to a corresponding subchannel when the selected MS is the ST MS, and resources arc allocated using a CT scheduling technique when the selected MS is the CT MS. The classifying, selecting and allocating steps are repeated until allocation of resources is completed. | 10-08-2009 |
20090253430 | Base Station Controller and Method for Restricting Access - In a base station controller for controlling the operation of a base station for executing call control which permits a connection in response to a connecting request from a radio terminal, when a stop instruction of the call control of the base station is received, the number of radio terminals which can be connected to the base station is decreased and thereafter the call control is stopped, and when the call control of the base station is restarted, the number of radio terminals which can be connected to the base station is increased. | 10-08-2009 |
20090258645 | PLMN Frequency Search Triggered by Country Code Change - A mobile UE initiates a full search of all supported frequencies upon detecting a change in the Mobile Country Code (MCC) transmitted by a PLMN. The change in MCC indicates the user had crossed a political border, and the spectrum allocated for wireless communication may be different. In one embodiment, the mobile UE stores the current MCC. Upon obtaining an updated MCC, it is compared to the stored MCC. If the updated MCC is different from the stored MCC, the full frequency search is initiated. To prevent excessive searching, with concomitant power consumption, while traveling near a border, the UE waits a predetermined duration after an MCC-initiated full scan before conducting a subsequent full scan, even if the MCC changes within that duration. | 10-15-2009 |
20090258646 | CALL SETUP PROCEDURE IN AN EVOLVED THIRD GENERATION RADIO ACCESS NETWORK - A method and system for call setup in an evolved third generation (3G) radio access network are disclosed. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) sends its identity to a core network (CN) for call setup when the WTRU is in an RRC_disconnected state. The CN verifies the identity and sends an authentication vector to the WTRU. The WTRU sends a service access request message including an authentication response to the CN via a Node-B. The Node-B performs an admission control. The CN attaches the WTRU if the authentication response is same to an expected response. The Node-B then allocates radio resources to the WTRU. The Node-Bs may be directly connected, or may be connected to a control plane server which performs admission control. When the WTRU is transitioning from an RRC_idle state to an RRC_connected state, the WTRU may or may not need to re-authenticate again. | 10-15-2009 |
20090264123 | SERVING BASE STATION SELECTION USING BACKHAUL QUALITY INFORMATION - Techniques for selecting a serving base station for a terminal by taking into consideration the backhaul quality of candidate base stations are described. In one design, a base station may determine backhaul quality information indicative of its current backhaul quality. The base station may send the backhaul quality information, e.g., in an overhead message sent over the air to terminals or in a backhaul message sent to neighbor base stations or a network controller. A server selection entity may receive backhaul quality information for at least one candidate base station for the terminal. The server selection entity may also determine at least one metric for each candidate base station. The server selection entity may then select the serving base station for the terminal based on the backhaul quality information and the at least one metric for the at least one candidate base station. | 10-22-2009 |
20090264124 | COMPUTING UNIT WITH FEMTOCELL AP FUNCTIONALITY - A computing unit includes a processing module, a baseband processing module, and a RF section. In a femtocell AP mode, the processing module performs at least a portion of a MAC function to facilitate signal conversion between radio interface (RI) signals and PHY AP signals. The baseband processing module converts signals between the PHY AP signals and AP symbol stream. The RF section converts signals between the AP symbol streams and RF AP signals. In a cellular (CELL) mode, the processing module facilitates conversions between data and PHY CELL signals. The baseband processing module converts signals between PHY CELL signals and CELL symbol streams. The RF section converts signals between CELL symbol streams and RF CELL signals. | 10-22-2009 |
20090264125 | HANDHELD COMPUTING UNIT COORDINATION OF FEMTOCELL AP FUNCTIONS - A handheld computing unit includes a processing module and a plurality of PHY units. The processing module determines whether a femtocell access point (AP) mode is active. When the femtocell AP mode is active, the processing module determines whether at least one other handheld computing unit is supporting femtocell AP operations. When another handheld computing unit is not supporting the femtocell AP operations, the processing module enables the femtocell AP operations. A PHY unit of the plurality of PHY units converts a downstream PHY signal into a downstream radio frequency (RF) signal and converts an upstream RF signal into an upstream PHY signal. | 10-22-2009 |
20090270090 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - There is provided a mobile communication device capable of performing AP search at a connection destination and connection with a terminal device with a low power consumption and in a short time. The device includes access point search means ( | 10-29-2009 |
20090270091 | SELECTIVE CHANNEL SCANNING FOR NETWORKED DEVICES - Selectively scanning available channels for a network connection. A computing device defines a preferred channel list for a network along with a scan ratio. The scan ratio relates the frequency that the preferred channels are scanned versus the frequency that all the channels are scanned. In an embodiment, the preferred channel list reflects channels on which the computing device has recently connected. Employing the scan ratio thereby balances power consumption with fast connection establishment. The scan ratio is also adjustable to affect power consumption and battery life of the computing device. | 10-29-2009 |
20090270092 | Method for Assisting a Wireless Device to Find Closed Subscriber Group Cells - A method of establishing a wireless link is provided. The method comprises a user equipment (UE) receiving a transmission from a closed subscriber group (CSG) cell. When the CSG cell is associated with a CSG identified in a user defined list of CSGs stored in the UE, the method further comprises establishing a wireless link between the UE and the CSG cell. | 10-29-2009 |
20090270093 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND METHOD FOR DISPLAYING WIRELESS DEVICES THEREOF - A mobile terminal including a wireless communication unit configured to wirelessly communicate with wireless devices to be connected with the mobile terminal, a display unit configured to display information about the wireless devices, an input unit configured to input search information including at least one of a distance range to search for the wireless devices and a type of the wireless devices, and a controller configured to control the wireless communication unit to search for the wireless devices based on the input search information and to control the display unit to display responding wireless devices that responded to the search by the wireless communication unit according to the input search information. | 10-29-2009 |
20090270094 | Radio base station, mobile station, and communication method - A radio base station improved in the efficiency of processing random accesses from mobile stations. The radio base station designates a random access signal when transmitting downlink data to a mobile station. The mobile station transmits the designated random access signal to the radio base station. The radio base station transmits, to the mobile station, timing adjustment information prepared based on the result of reception of the random access signal and allocation information about an uplink radio resource allocated to the mobile station. If there is control data to be transmitted to the radio base station, the mobile station transmits the control data by using the allocated uplink radio resource, and if there is no control data to be transmitted, the mobile station transmits a synchronization completion report prepared in reply to the timing adjustment information. | 10-29-2009 |
20090270095 | System and Methods for Generating Masking Sequences - Systems and methods for providing HS-SCCH masking and unmasking operations using user equipment identification field in generating a user equipment specific masking sequence are disclosed. The 1/2 rate convolution coding and the rate matching operations required to form the UE specific masking sequence to mask and unmask high speed shared control channel (HS-SCCH) packets are performed in a single operation. Look up tables and matrix coefficients used to provide a simple computation method to generate the needed UE specific masking sequence are provided. Apparatus and methods to use the UE specific masking sequence to unmask the HS-SCCH packets in a packet based radio frequency signaling communication system are disclosed. | 10-29-2009 |
20090270096 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETECTING CLOSED SUBSCRIBER GROUP CELLS - A method and a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU), including a universal subscriber identity module (USIM), for identifying, detecting and accessing a closed subscriber group (CSG) cell are disclosed. The WTRU receives a broadcast from a cell including a cell identifier (ID). If the cell ID is associated with a CSG cell, the WTRU determines whether the CSG ID is programmed in the USIM. The cell broadcast may include a single bit information element (IE) indicating that the cell is a CSG cell. The cell broadcast may further include a bit indicating whether the CSG cell is public or private. Different detection and access methods are also provided for detecting public and private CSG cells. Mobility detection methods for the WTRU in the CSG cell are also provided. | 10-29-2009 |
20090275329 | Servicing Cell Discovery During Out of Service - A user equipment is provided. The user equipment comprises a processor that, when the UE goes out of service area of a first cell, is configured to search for a suitable cell before the UE loses a connection to a network by checking for a suitable cell among cells proximate to the first cell, based on a timer before the UE loses the connection to the network. | 11-05-2009 |
20090275330 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM THAT SUPPORTS MULTIPLE STANDARDS, MULTIPLE PROTOCOL REVISIONS, MULTIPLE EXTENDED SERVICES AND MULTIPLE EXTENDED SERVICES DELIVERY OPTIONS AND METHOD OF OPERATION THEREFOR - A wireless communication system facilitates communication with subscribing units within a respective service area that supports at least one communication protocol revision. The system communicates with a subscribing unit operating within a respective service area to determine the communication protocol revisions supported by the subscribing unit. Subsequently, the subscribing unit and base station communicate according to a supported communication protocol revision. The base station and subscribing unit further communicate to indicate extended services supported by the subscribing unit and the methods of delivering the extended services to the subscribing unit. The extended services include caller line ID, message waiting indications and short message services among other extended services. In addition to a base station, the wireless communication system may include a mobile switching center that is in communication with the base station. The mobile switching center includes a visitor location register that records communication protocol revisions of the subscribing unit. | 11-05-2009 |
20090280805 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND METHOD OF DISPLAYING CHANNEL THEREIN - A mobile terminal including a wireless communication unit configured to scan for available frequency bands, and a controller configured to assign a frequency band identification information to each available frequency band and to assign channel identification information to each channel included in a corresponding available frequency band. | 11-12-2009 |
20090280806 | EMPLOYING DIFFERENT SIGNAL THRESHOLDS BASED ON TYPE OF INFORMATION TRANSMITTED - A method is disclosed for determining whether to transmit from a first unit to a second unit, where the transmission is one of a first type and a second type. In the method, a signal from the second unit is received at the first unit, and the strength of the signal as received at the first unit is measured. A determination is made of whether the transmission is of the first type or the second type, and a first threshold is selected if the transmission is of the first type, or else a second threshold is selected if the transmission is of the second type. The measured signal strength is then compared to the selected threshold, and the transmission proceeds only if the measured signal strength exceeds the selected threshold. | 11-12-2009 |
20090286537 | MOBILE SWITCHBOARD, MOBILE UNIT, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND POSITION- REGISTRATION EXTENDING METHOD - A mobile unit transmits a request for position registration to a network when moving from a first area to a second area. When the number of incoming calls does not exceed a threshold and the number of movements between the first area and the second area exceeds a threshold, a mobile switchboard combines the first area and the second area into an extended area, and informs the mobile unit of the extended area. | 11-19-2009 |
20090291683 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CHANNEL SCANNING THAT IMPROVES ACQUISITION PROBABILITY AND POWER CONSUMPTION - A method and apparatus for channel acquisition using a mobile station include obtaining geographic information of at least one wireless communication systems using one or more systems, respectively. The one or more channels are prioritized on a preferred roaming list based on the geographic information, and it is determined whether any of the prioritized one or more channels on the preferred roaming list are also on a most recently used (MRU) list. The mobile station attempts to acquire at least one of the prioritized one or more channels that is also on the MRU list. | 11-26-2009 |
20090298496 | Access selection in wireless networks - In a communication system including mobile terminals and different wireless networks the mobile terminals can estimate the speed with which the mobile terminals move and communicate estimated values of the speed to a selection function ( | 12-03-2009 |
20090298497 | Multiband mobile terminal and cell search method thereof - A multiband mobile terminal and cell search method is provided for reducing the camp-on delay by storing an indicator extracted from system information transmitted by the base station on which the mobile terminal has most recently camped, and scanning the frequency bands, indicated by the band indicators first. The multiband mobile terminal supporting at least two frequency bands includes a radio frequency (RF) unit that receives system information; a storage unit; and a control unit that controls mobile terminal to scan, when a camp-on event is detected, a frequency band indicated by the band indicator, camp on a base station of a network using the frequency band, and store a band indicator indicating the network. The multiband mobile terminal scans the frequency band of the network in which the mobile terminal locates, resulting in reducing the time required for camping on a cell. | 12-03-2009 |
20090298498 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING FREQUENCY RESOURCE INFORMATION IN A FREQUENCY OVERLAY SYSTEM - A system and method for transmitting and receiving frequency allocation information based on identification information in a frequency overlay system are provided. The method includes transmitting a frame of a first Frequency Allocation (FA) to Mobile Stations (MSs) by inserting control information and identification information of the MSs to which frequency resources are allocated into the first FA frame, and transmitting a second frame indicating a second FA the MSs by inserting the identification information and a resource indication of the first FA into the second FA frame. Thereby, an overhead can be reduced and a frequency resource can be used efficiently. | 12-03-2009 |
20090305698 | Downlink control information format for multiple codeword transmission - Systems and methods are disclosed that relate to a wireless communication system. Theses systems and methods include providing information from a base station to a mobile device than enables the mobile device to use at least one DCI format. In some embodiments, this information is provided by receiving data over a wireless communication channel. The transmitted data comprises identification information that identifies the format of the transmitted data being transmitted. These systems and methods may also include identifying the format of the transmitted data and processing the transmitted data using the identified format of the transmitted data. | 12-10-2009 |
20090305699 | REGISTRATION AND ACCESS CONTROL IN FEMTO CELL DEPLOYMENTS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate distributing and/or utilizing a Closed Subscriber Group (CSG) Identifier (ID) that identifies a CSG corresponding to a base station and a CSG indication that distinguishes between the base station permitting access to members of the CSG and permitting access to members and non-members of the CSG. For instance, the CSG ID can uniquely identify the CSG corresponding to the base station. A mobile device can receive the CSG ID and the CSG indication from the base station. Further, the received CSG ID can be compared to CSG IDs included in an allowed CSG list to recognize whether the mobile device is a member or a non-member of the CSG. Moreover, a preference for selecting the base station as compared to a disparate base station can be generated as a function of the received CSG ID and CSG indication. | 12-10-2009 |
20090312017 | MOBILE DEVICES WITH FEMTO CELL FUNCTIONALITY - Aspects describe communications environments in which femtocell capability is provided to devices within the communications network. A non-femto enabled device and/or a femto enabled device can communicate with a femto enabled device in the same geographical area for femto-enabled peer-to-peer communication. Two non-femto enabled devices can be provided femto functionality through utilization of a femto enabled device, which operates as a hub between the two devices. Other aspects relate to enhanced position determination, adaptive coverage enhancement, local mobile networks, open access femtocells without a backhaul, and local broadcast of media though utilization of femto enabled devices. | 12-17-2009 |
20090318142 | GROUPING OF USER TERMINAL CELL ACCESS INFORMATION IN A SYSTEM INFORMATION BLOCK - Disclosed is a method for generating and transmitting system information in a mobile radio cell. In said method, system information is grouped into several information frames, information required for a mobile user device in order to verify if said mobile user device has access to the mobile radio cell being grouped into a single information frame, and the information frames are fed to the data securing layer by the network layer and are transmitted by means of the physical layer. | 12-24-2009 |
20090318143 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND METHOD OF MANAGING CHANNEL LIST THEREIN - A mobile terminal includes a wireless communication unit configured to scan at least one frequency band and a controller, wherein the controller is configured to generate a channel list comprising broadcast channels individually having signal strength that meets a reference value, each of the broadcast channels being assigned to the scanned at least one frequency band and update the channel list based upon a repeated scan of the at least one frequency band performed by the wireless communication unit. | 12-24-2009 |
20090318144 | CELLULAR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD OF OPERATION THEREFOR - A cellular communication system comprises a first base station ( | 12-24-2009 |
20090318145 | PUSH MECHANISM FOR INFORMATION SERVICES IN IEEE 802.21 MEDIA INDEPENDENT HANDOVER - A push mechanism for IEEE 802.21 media independent handover (MIH) information services (IS) is provided to push information to MIH users. Alternatively, an indication may be provided that information is available, and a pull mechanism may then be implemented to retrieve the information. | 12-24-2009 |
20090325576 | METHOD OF LOCAL CONDITIONAL ACCESS FOR MOBILE EQUIPMENT - A method for conditional access to a digital data stream encrypted with at least one control word and broadcasted to at least one mobile device, said transmitter also transmitting a control message stream containing control words and access conditions, said mobile device being connected to a mobile communication network via a mobile access point, comprises: receiving the control message stream by the mobile device; determining a location identifier for the said mobile device by either the identifier of the mobile access point or the identifier of the broadcasting network transmitter; verifying access conditions contained in the control message, said access conditions comprising a reception condition related to a mobile access point identifier and/or an identifier of one broadcasting network transmitter; comparing the determined identifier with the identifier(s) contained in the access conditions; and authorizing or blocking the access to said data stream depending on the result of the comparison. | 12-31-2009 |
20100003977 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USE IN COOPERATIVE RELAYS USING INCREMENTAL REDUNDANCY AND DISTRIBUTED SPATIAL MULTIPLEXING - A method and apparatus are used in cooperative relays with incremental redundancy (IR) and distributed spatial multiplexing. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may listen to the base station (BS) transmission during Phase 1 of the communication, and use cooperation between a relay station (RS) and the BS for the data transmission during Phase 2 to improve performance. During Phase 2, both the BS and the RS may transmit data to the WTRU, using either distributed Space Time Block Codes/Space Frequency Block Codes (STBC/SFBC) or distributed spatial multiplexing. | 01-07-2010 |
20100009679 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SERVICE ACQUISITION IN A MULTIMODE SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for service acquisition in a multimode system are provided. The method includes attempting a first location registration to a mobile communication system having a highest priority according to a priority order and, attempting a next location registration to a mobile communication system of a next priority order from the priority order, if the first location registration is rejected for a specific cause. | 01-14-2010 |
20100009680 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SEARCHING SERVICE BAND IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - An apparatus and method for service band search in a mobile communication terminal are provided. The method includes receiving system information from a Base Station (BS), extracting information identifying a band supporting a network or a service intended for access using the received system information, and searching the identified band for a service band. | 01-14-2010 |
20100015973 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING NETWORK SCANNING USING BLACK-LIST NETWORK INFORMATION - An apparatus and method is provided for making use of black-list network information to make scanning more efficient in multi-mode mobile devices. When performing a scan for a network, if a network that is blacklisted is found, scanning is discontinued for any network that has the same radio access technology as the network that was found. Thus, excessive scanning that can be costly for the mobile device in terms of battery life and responsiveness to provide service, is avoided. | 01-21-2010 |
20100015974 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REDUCING PUSH-TO-TALK (PTT) LATENCY IN A WCDMA NETWORK - A method and apparatus for reducing latency when setting up a Push-to-Talk (PTT) session from a User Equipment (UE) in a WCDMA radio communication network. When a user opens a PTT application or accesses the contacts page, the UE obtains a radio bearer from the network. The UE may maintain the radio bearer until the session is requested by transmitting periodic Heartbeat messages to the network. The Heartbeat messages have a length sufficient to trigger the network to place the user terminal on a Dedicated Channel (DCH), and the time period between Heartbeat messages is short enough to prevent the UE from being removed from the DCH for inactivity. When the user presses the PTT button, a SIP INVITE message is immediately sent without delay. | 01-21-2010 |
20100022239 | PORTABLE TELEPHONE AND ACCESS CONTROL METHOD - A portable telephone is provided for making it possible for the portable telephone to associate terminal devices with each other for flexible access control less expensively and safely by means of the existing infrastructure and the terminal devices. The portable telephone (PT) is comprised of a short distance wireless communication unit ( | 01-28-2010 |
20100035610 | Method and Apparatus for Selecting a Best Cell During Inter-Radio Access Technology Transition - An apparatus and method for selecting a best cell during transition between two radio access technologies comprising detecting a first signal from a selected cell, determining a first signal-to-noise ratio (SNR | 02-11-2010 |
20100035611 | REFERENCE SIGNAL DESIGN FOR CELL SEARCH IN AN ORTHOGONAL WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate efficient cell acquisition in a wireless communication system. In one aspect, a reference signal for use in cell acquisition can be constructed in a bandwidth-agnostic manner such that it contains a common central portion in a predetermined frequency band that is independent of a bandwidth utilized by an associated wireless communication system. The central portion can be constructed as a two-dimensional block in time and frequency that spans a default cell search bandwidth, a predetermined bandwidth specified by synchronization codes or other signals, or another suitable bandwidth. A reference signal can then be constructed form the central portion by tiling or expanding the central portion such that it spans the entire system bandwidth. | 02-11-2010 |
20100041399 | METHOD OF PERFORMING RANGING IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - A method of performing ranging in a broadband wireless access system is disclosed. A method of performing ranging of a mobile station which is in an idle mode in a broadband wireless access system includes requesting ranging by transmitting a third ranging code to a network through a first ranging region allocated by the network to transmit a first ranging code or a second ranging code, and receiving a first ranging response message from the network, the first ranging response message including uplink transmission parameters. | 02-18-2010 |
20100041400 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOVEMENT MANAGEMENT METHOD, MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, AND BASE STATION APPARATUS - A radio communication system includes a plurality of base station apparatuses. In the radio communication system, the communication areas of the plurality of base station apparatuses are connected in a loop to form a borderline separating the inside and the outside of a management area. The radio communication system detects a mobile terminal which enters the management area by crossing the borderline on the basis of communication between the base station apparatuses and a mobile terminal. | 02-18-2010 |
20100041401 | Method for Controlling Channel Re-Selection - A mobile station including a processor and a memory storing program instructions. The instructions, when executed by the processor, cause the processor to determine if any candidate control channels of a list of candidate control channels are ineligible for selection by belonging to a private network to which the mobile station is not permitted access, analyze those candidate control channels not determined to be ineligible for selection to identify a primary candidate control channel, and attempt to select the primary candidate control channel. | 02-18-2010 |
20100048207 | MOBILE RADIO COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE, RELATED NETWORK DEVICE AND METHOD - The present invention provides for a mobile radio communications device arranged for operation within a mobile radio communications network comprising a plurality of location areas each comprising a plurality of cells, the device including means for identifying an approaching border of an area with a neighbouring area, triggering means for triggering location update signalling from the device and to reflect a change in area responsive to the identification of the said border, and the device further including delaying means for delaying transmission of a location update signalling such that, particularly if a random delay is employed, the cell traffic load can be spread out in time and its required location. | 02-25-2010 |
20100056140 | BEAMFORMING SYSTEMS AND METHOD - A downlink multi-user beamforming scheme for a network of coordinated transmission points where the beamforming weights and power allocation are determined to maximize a jointly-achievable SINR margin under per-transmitter power constraints and the constraint that each data stream is transmitted from a single transmission point. | 03-04-2010 |
20100056141 | METHOD FOR RE-ENTRY INTO A COMMUNICATION NETWORK AFTER RADIO FREQUENCY OUTAGE - A method and apparatus for that provides a re-entry procedure following a radio frequency outage in a wireless communication network is disclosed. The method includes providing ( | 03-04-2010 |
20100062764 | System and Method for Time Saving Cell Search for Mobile Devices in Single and Multiple Radio Technology Communication Systems - A cellular device has a stacked protocol, with an upper layer and a lower layer. The lower layer includes a multiple carrier detection unit, a memory and a digital processing system. The multiple carrier detection unit receives a plurality of wireless carrier signals and provides a respective plurality of output digital streams. The memory is used to store a target cell search list, and the digital processing system processes the digital streams in parallel based upon parameters within the target cell search list. The parameters may include a frequency indicator and a radio access technology (RAT) indicator. The lower layer controls the multiple carrier detection unit to detect the wireless carrier signals based upon the frequencies and RATs in the target cell search list. | 03-11-2010 |
20100062765 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SCANNING IN MULTI-CARRIER COMMUNICATON SYSTEM - There are provided a method and an apparatus for scanning in a mobile communication system supporting a multi-carrier. For this, the scanning method includes: in a mobile station supporting a multi-carrier including a primary carrier and a secondary carrier, requesting allocation of a scanning interval to a serving base station by using the primary carrier; receiving a response message for designating the scanning interval and a carrier to be used for scanning from the serving base station; and scanning neighbor base stations by using the carrier designated by the response message in the scanning interval. Transaction data is continuously transmitted and received through the remaining carriers while scanning the neighbor base stations by using the primary carrier or the secondary carrier without interruption. | 03-11-2010 |
20100069062 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION PAGING AND REGISTRATION UTILIZING MULTIPLE TYPES OF NODE IDENTIFIERS - Paging load and/or registration load in a network is reduced by using different types of identifiers to specifying which nodes page an access terminal in the network. In some aspects, the network maintains a list that specifies that certain individual nodes (e.g., cells or sectors) are to page a given access terminal and/or that one or more zones (e.g., tracking areas) are to page the access terminal. In some aspects, an access terminal in a network may be configured to provide a forward-looking paging list to the network. The list provided by an access terminal may specify different types of node identifiers (e.g., individual node identifiers, subscriber groups, etc.). The network may then use the list to determine which nodes are to page a given access terminal such that when the access terminal moves to a different node, that node may already be configured to page the access terminal. In some aspect paging load and registration load are managed in a deployment that includes different types of access points. For example, access points of a first type (e.g., macro nodes) may provide service over relatively large coverage areas and access points of a second type (e.g., femto nodes) may provide service over smaller coverage areas and/or provide restricted service. | 03-18-2010 |
20100069063 | Wireless Telecommunications Systems - A wireless telecommunications system is provided in which mobile terminals requiring high transmission power are identified as being potentially disturbing to neighbouring cells. Information relating to the identified mobile terminals is sent to the neighbouring basestation, so that resource allocation decision can be made using such information. | 03-18-2010 |
20100069064 | Uplink Access Management - The invention involves uplink access management for user terminals ( | 03-18-2010 |
20100069065 | NEIGHBOR CELL SEARCH ON A SECONDARY CARRIER - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate providing frequent secondary carrier measurement reports in multicarrier wireless communications. Secondary carrier measurement reports can be provided based on anchor carrier measurement reports. When an event or request to generate an anchor carrier measurement report is received, the anchor carrier measurement report can be generated along with a secondary carrier measurement report. In this regard, access points can receive the carrier measurement reports and determine mobility for a wireless device based on more than one carrier. | 03-18-2010 |
20100069066 | NEIGHBORING CELL SEARCH FOR MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Systems and methodologies are described that effectuate or facilitate detecting a cell (serving or neighboring cell) in multichannel wireless communication environments. In accordance with various aspects set forth herein, systems and/or methods are provided that receive signals from multiple cells and identify candidate cells based at least in part on the received signals, compare signal metrics for each of the candidate cells, select signal metrics associated with each of the candidate cells, and compare signal metrics to identify proximate base stations located within a candidate cell. | 03-18-2010 |
20100075670 | METHOD OF CONTROLLING CELL SELECTION FOR A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND RELATED DEVICE - A method of controlling CSG, known as closed subscriber group, cell selection for a wireless communication system is provided. The wireless communication system includes a network and a user equipment including a whitelist capable of providing a list of accessible CSG cells. The method includes updating the whitelist when the user equipment subscribes to a CSG cell that is not included in the whitelist or does not subscribe to a CSG cell in the whitelist. | 03-25-2010 |
20100075671 | MOBILE APPARATUS - According to an aspect of the invention, there is provided a mobile apparatus including: a first communication module configured to communicate with a first base station of a first mobile communications network through a first radio access method; a second communication module configured to communicate with a second base station of a second mobile communications network through a second radio access method, the second communication module configured to provide a circuit switching service; a memory; and a control module configured to control the memory to store information about the second mobile communications network when the first communication module carries out a waiting processing and the second communication module carries out a synchronization processing. | 03-25-2010 |
20100075672 | MULTIPLE ANTENNA WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM WHICH ADAPTIVELY DETERMINES DOWNLINK TRANSMISSION MODE - An operation method of a base station which adaptively determines a downlink transmission mode is provided. The operation method of the base station including: adaptively determining a downlink transmission mode based on at least one of a state of a channel between the base station and a terminal, and a number of receiving antennas, the number of receiving antennas being at least one and the receiving antennas being mounted on the terminal; selecting one of at least one type of feedback information which is fed back by the terminal based on the determined downlink transmission mode; and reporting type information associated with the selected type to the terminal. | 03-25-2010 |
20100081433 | NETWORK SEARCH METHOD OF USER EQUIPMENT FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A network search method of a user equipment (UE) for a wireless communication system that improves network search speed for acquiring Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN) available list available where the user equipment is located. A network search method measures powers of all the frequency bands supported by a UE in response to a network search request, generates a scan list as a result of measurement of the powers, searches networks listed in the scan list for available channels; acquires neighbor cell information from a system information message of one of the available channels. In addition, the method skips the networks indicated by the neighbor cell information in search of networks by removing the networks from the scan list. | 04-01-2010 |
20100099405 | MANAGEMENT OF NETWORK TECHNOLOGY SELECTION AND DISPLAY IN MULTI-TECHNOLOGY WIRELESS ENVIRONMENTS - System(s) and method(s) are provided to manage utilization of radio network technology and display thereof when multiple services and radio network technologies are available to a multi-technology mobile device. Management relies at least in part on a subscriber profile that comprises a network selection profile constructed through market policy, subscriber policy, and application policy for radio technology utilization. Network preference(s) profile is generated on per subscriber, or per subscriber type, basis and is conveyed to a subscriber station over the air. Initial subscriber profile can be delivered at a time of provisioning a multi-technology mobile device, and updated based at least upon subscriber demand, a schedule established by a network operator or service provider, or an event related to coverage area relocation or contracted services. Radio technology preferences and display of associated technologies available to a multi-technology mobile device can be dynamically controlled on a per-call and/or per-application basis. | 04-22-2010 |
20100099406 | Method and Apparatus for Determining the Country Where a Mobile Device Has Acquired Service - An apparatus and method for identifying a serving country using at least one system specific parameter comprising extracting the at least one system specific parameter from a forward link signal; determining whether the at least one system specific parameter maps to a unique country; and identifying the serving country for a call. | 04-22-2010 |
20100099407 | CELL ACCESS CONTROL METHOD AND USER EQUIPMENT - A cell access control method and a user terminal are provided, the method includes: obtaining, by a user equipment (UE), cell access information through a pilot channel and/or a synchronization channel; determining a current cell is a macro base station cell or an HNB cell according to the cell access information; determining, when the current cell is an HNB cell, whether the UE is allowed to access the HNB cell according to HNB information of the cell access information, if the UE is allowed to access the HNB cell, performing the access processing, if the UE is not allowed to access the HNB, abandoning the access. A UE is provided accordingly. | 04-22-2010 |
20100099408 | Method of performing cell search in wireless communication system - A method of performing cell search includes receiving a primary synchronization signal (PSS) comprising a primary synchronization code (PSC), and receiving a secondary synchronization signal (SSS) comprising a first secondary synchronization code (SSC) and a second SSC. The first SSC and the second SSC are respectively scrambled by using a first scrambling code and a second scrambling code, and the first scrambling code and the second scrambling code are associated with the PSC. Detection performance on synchronization signals can be improved, and cell search can be performed more reliably. | 04-22-2010 |
20100099409 | Method of performing cell search in wireless communucation system - A method of performing cell search includes receiving a primary synchronization signal (PSS) comprising a primary synchronization code (PSC) and receiving a secondary synchronization signal (SSS) comprising a first secondary synchronization code (SSC) and a second SSC, wherein the SSS includes a first SSS and a second SSS, the first SSC and the second SSC are arranged in that order in the first SSS, and the second SSC and the first SSC are arranged in that order in the second SSS. Detection performance on synchronization signals can be improved, and cell search can be performed more reliably. | 04-22-2010 |
20100105380 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR BROADCASTING SYSTEM INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Techniques for broadcasting system information in a wireless communication network are described. A cell may support one or more public land mobile networks (PLMNs). The cell may send a PLMN table in a first message on a broadcast channel and may send at least one index to the PLMN table in a second message on the broadcast channel. The PLMN table may include entries for different possible PLMNs or different possible combinations of PLMNs. A UE may receive the first message from a serving cell and may receive the second message from a candidate cell for cell reselection. The UE may obtain the PLMN table from the first message and may obtain at least one index to the PLMN table from the second message. The UE may determine whether the second cell is accessible by the UE based on the PLMN table and the at least one index. | 04-29-2010 |
20100105381 | RADIO COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND IN-CELL RETURN PROCESSING METHOD - To provide a radio communication terminal which can effectively acquire a communication system as an in-cell return process which scans and detects a base station enabled for communication when a transmission operation is performed even if a radio communication terminal compatible with a plurality of communication methods is out of a cell, and which can try a connection with a base station by a communication method desired by a user. A control part ( | 04-29-2010 |
20100105382 | ADDRESSING METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR USE IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In a cellular communication network having a plurality of access points serving wireless terminals, methods and apparatus for facilitating handoff of a wireless terminal from a first access point to a second access point. In various embodiments, the process includes storing in a memory device at the wireless terminal a cell identifier, wherein the cell identifier includes a special character enabling the cell identifier to identify a plurality of access points to which the wireless terminal can be handed off; and the wireless terminal using the stored address information to determine access points to which a handoff may be implemented. One or more cell identifiers stored in the memory can be used as a neighbor list, which can be used to identify handoff possibilities or topographical adjacencies. | 04-29-2010 |
20100105383 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile communications terminal divides a plurality of multipath signals associated with radio signals transmitted from a plurality of base stations using an S-CCPCH into groups by base station, i.e., by transmit source, maximum-ratio-combines a plurality of multipath signals associated with each same base station which is a transmit source into a composite signal, decodes the composite signal, and selects a composite signal having a good decoded result from among decoded composite signals. | 04-29-2010 |
20100120422 | POSITIONING SERVICE UTILIZING EXISTING RADIO BASE STATIONS - Location position information of a mobile device utilizing Wi-Fi, FM, AM, television transmissions(s), other radio transmission(s), electromagnetic, acoustic, or other signals received from base stations or access points. The position information can be provided through a Web service and/or locally on a mobile user device. The position information can be provided with a certainty and/or uncertainty probability percentage or other perceivable means for the user to determine the expected accuracy of the location information. Also provided is a means for updating base station information to include newly detected base stations through information from a plurality of user devices, wherein each user device is given a reliance factor. User devices that have a low reliance factor are disregarded and/or scrutinized to determine accuracy prior to such information being utilized to update information. Functioning of the system can be improved through analysis of usage data and/or the additions to the database. | 05-13-2010 |
20100120423 | CONTROL CHANNEL COMMUNICATIONS IN A CELLULAR COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A communications device in the form of a base station or communications node such as an eNodeB communications node selects one of a plurality of modulation and coding schemes for a control channel for a user communications device on the basis of the range which is specified by the location or channel condition within a cell of the user communications device. The selected modulation and coding scheme are identified to the user communications device separately from the control channel. In one example, the selected modulation and coding scheme is identified to the user communications device by way of a 2-bit code which may be provided within a MAC control block or appended to a MAC Data PDU. | 05-13-2010 |
20100124924 | GPS-ASSISTED CELL SELECTION FOR MOBILE DEVICES - Methods and apparatus for using a location of a mobile station (MS) and information about neighbor base stations (BSs) to assist network entry and initialization, scanning, and/or handover operations are provided. The location of the MS may be ascertained by determining the Global Positioning System (GPS) coordinates of the MS internally or by receiving the location from, e.g., a GPS device external to the MS. The information about neighbor BSs may be retrieved from a BS information database based on the location of the MS. The BS information database may reside within the MS, be broadcast periodically to the MS in an effort to update the MS's internal database, or be stored in the network operator's database. Knowledge of the MS's location and information about neighbor BSs may reduce the time spent during network entry, scanning, or handover, and thereby, power consumption; and may increase the bandwidth usage efficiency. | 05-20-2010 |
20100130198 | Remote processing of multiple acoustic signals - Systems and methods for remote digital signal processing of multiple signals are disclosed. The system generally includes a mobile communication device with a first microphone for receiving a first acoustic signal and a second microphone for receiving a second acoustic signal. The first acoustic signal and the second acoustic signal are transmitted to a processing station for processing using a wireless protocol. | 05-27-2010 |
20100130199 | HANDOVER TO AN UNLICENSED MOBILE NETWORK - A cellular radio telecommunication handover system and method for enabling the handover of a mobile telecommunications device between a licensed (cellular) network and an unlicensed mobile network comprising a plurality of low power access points having all of them the same common cell identity (GGI) is disclosed. The mobile telecommunications device establishes a handover between one access point of the licensed network and another access point of the unlicensed network by communication of handover resources therebetween. | 05-27-2010 |
20100130200 | PROCEDURE FOR TRANSFER AND HANDLING OF NETWORK-CONTROLLED FUNCTIONAL DATA BETWEEN A CLIENT AND A SERVER - The invention relates to a procedure for transmission of control data between a terminal for telecommunication via a telecommunication network and a server connected with the telecommunication network for control of a service administered by the telecommunication network, in which the telecommunication network provides a special function to a data object, whereby one data base each is assigned to the terminal and the server, in which the telecommunication network makes a special function available to a data object, whereby one data base each is assigned to the terminal and the server, and whereby the transmission occurs by a parameter value for activation, deactivation or change of the service being assigned at first to at least one control parameter assigned to the data object, and the data object together with the control parameter is stored in one of the two data bases, whereby this data base is then synchronized with the other data base. | 05-27-2010 |
20100130201 | CELL SEARCH METHOD AND APPARATUS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A cell search method and apparatus in an asynchronous wireless communication system for outputting a cell search result by comparing energy ratios of detected candidate cells with a reference threshold ratio are provided. The method includes determining energy values of correlations between different phases of signals received from neighbor cells, detecting at least one candidate cell in descending order of energy values, and outputting cell search results by determining an energy ratio of the at least one candidate cell and comparing the energy ratio with a reference threshold ratio. | 05-27-2010 |
20100130202 | METHOD AND USER EQUIPMENT FOR MEASURING CELLS AND READING CONTROL CHANNELS - A method for measuring cells includes: scanning a frequency point; judging whether the signal level of the scanned frequency point meets a pre-configured measurement condition; if the signal level of the scanned frequency point meets the pre-configured measurement condition, identifying a cell corresponding to the frequency point, and measuring the signal level of the cell. With the technical solution of the invention, the number of cells measured by the UE may be limited, which prevents the UE from measuring too many cells. | 05-27-2010 |
20100136968 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR QUICK NETWORK SEARCH IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A mobile communication device connects to a mobile network identified from various mobile networks operating in a geographical area. Signal frequencies supported by the mobile communication device are scanned to identify a set of signal frequencies associated with the mobile networks. A set of network IDs associated with the mobile networks is determined by synchronizing with each signal frequency of the set of signal frequencies. The network IDs and associated signal frequencies are stored. Thereafter, the stored signal frequencies are scanned to identify a second set of network IDs. A network ID is selected from the second set of network IDs to connect to the mobile network. | 06-03-2010 |
20100136969 | Neighbor Cell List Compilation Methods and Apparatus - A user equipment (UE) in a communication system can keep track of the cell/frequency deployment of a network operator preferred by the user, and based on the tracked information, the UE can build up its own user-specific Neighbor Cell List. When the UE is roaming, the UE does received-signal measurements according to cells and carrier frequencies identified in the broadcast Neighbor Cell Lists of the roamed-into network, but the UE also does received-signal measurements (with higher priority) according to the user-specific Neighbor Cell List that it has built up. Accordingly, a UE implementing a user-specific Neighbor Cell List analyzes its radio environment based on received signals and stores information about that environment, including user-preference information that prioritizes cells in the radio environment. The UE can then carry out cell search based on the stored environment and user-preference information. | 06-03-2010 |
20100144345 | USING CALLED PARTY MOBILE PRESENCE AND MOVEMENT IN COMMUNICATION APPLICATION - Callers are enabled to choose among available communication modes based on information about a called party's mobile status. Mobile status information including whether or not the called party is in motion, their speed if they are in motion, a direction of their movement, as well as their location, can be received from sources such as a presence server, a GPS service, and other information sources. Inferences are made based on the received information and available and/or recommended communication modes suggested to the caller. | 06-10-2010 |
20100144346 | HOME ZONE SERVICE - A system for determining a Home Zone service availability within a cell in a cellular communications network, wherein users of said cell comprise Home Zone users for whom services are provided at special Home Zone subscription rates when the user is in the cell, and non-Home Zone users. The system comprises measuring means for measuring total usage within the cell, and determining means for determining from said measurements and one or more Home Zone user usage profiles whether a further Home Zone user can be added to the cell. | 06-10-2010 |
20100144347 | WIRELESS TERMINAL DEVICE, AND CONTROL METHOD AND STORAGE MEDIUM THEREFOR - A wireless terminal device includes: a receiving section for receiving information on a distance from a range covered by a connectable access point from another wireless terminal device; a search time determination section for determining a time to start searching for the access point based on the information on the distance received by the receiving section; and a search section for sleeping until the time determined by the search time determination section, and starting to search for the connectable access point at the determined time. | 06-10-2010 |
20100144348 | Scanning And Decoding Methods And Apparatus For Mobile Communication Devices - For each broadcast control channel of a plurality of broadcast control channels associated with a plurality of wireless networks, a mobile device decodes control information on the broadcast control channel and stores this control information in its memory. The control information includes a network identification which uniquely identifies a particular wireless communication network. Such decoding is performed in between or during repeated acts of measuring signal strength levels of an RF signal on the broadcast control channel, and prior to completion of an averaging function for calculating an averaged signal strength level of the signal strength levels on the broadcast control channel. Decoding may be performed only for those broadcast control channels identified to have the most optimal signal strengths. The mobile device performs a network selection technique for selecting one of the wireless networks based on the one or more stored network identifications that were decoded and stored prior to completion of the averaging functions, which may result in more expedient network selection. | 06-10-2010 |
20100151857 | FEMTO-BASED HOME MACRO SECTOR AND ASSOCIATED SCANNING OPERATION - System(s) and method(s) are provided to determine a home macro sector linked to a femto access point and adjust inter-carrier scanning in a mobile device that operates in the home macro sector. A femto access point (AP) can determine a home macro sector through cell or sector identifier that is extracted via scan(s) of macro wireless environment of the femto AP. Femto AP can rank extracted sector identifier(s) and establish home macro sector (HMS) identifier(s), and also can generate scanning requirements for idle-mode scan(s) by mobile device(s) that operates in a HMS. Scanning requirement(s) can force periodic inter-carrier measurements of a HMS wireless environment, and establish HMS-specific radio link quality threshold(s). Wireless network can receive at least one of HMS identifier(s) and scanning requirement(s) and deliver same to mobile device(s) authorized to exploit wireless coverage through femto AP associated with the HMS ID(s) and the scanning requirement(s). | 06-17-2010 |
20100151858 | SCANNING OF WIRELESS ENVIRONMENT IN A FEMTO-BASED HOME MACRO SECTOR - System(s) and method(s) are provided to trigger inter-carrier scanning in a mobile device based at least in part on location thereof. Femto access point (AP) that can serve the mobile device can determine location through cell or sector identifier that is extracted via scan(s) of macro wireless environment of the femto AP. Femto AP can rank extracted sector identifier(s) and establish home macro sector (HMS) identifier(s), and also can generate scanning requirements for idle-mode scan(s) by a mobile device that operates in a HMS and is authorized to access wireless coverage through the femto AP. Scanning requirement(s) can force periodic inter-carrier measurements of a HMS wireless environment, and establish HMS-specific radio link quality threshold(s). Wireless network can receive at least one of HMS identifier(s) and scanning requirement(s) and deliver same to mobile device(s) authorized to exploit wireless coverage through femto AP associated with the HMS ID(s) and the scanning requirement(s). | 06-17-2010 |
20100151859 | METHOD OF SETTING UP CONNECTION IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO NETWORK CONTROLLER, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of setting up a connection in a communication system is provided, wherein the communication system includes a user equipment (UE). The present method includes following steps. When a first radio resource control (RRC) connection request message is received from the UE, whether the first RRC connection request message has been received before is determined. If the first RRC connection request message has been received, a first RRC connection setup message is sent back to the UE. If the first RRC connection request message has not been received, whether there is an accessible Femto access point (FAP) near the UE is further determined. If there is the accessible FAP near the UE, a first RRC connection reject message is sent back to the UE. If there is no accessible FAP near the UE, the first RRC connection setup message is sent back to the UE. | 06-17-2010 |
20100167727 | VOICE CHANNEL DATA CONNECTION RETRY STRATEGY - A system and method for making vehicle originated calls to a telematics service provider or other call center. The method includes identifying a call type associated with a desired wireless communication of speech or data to the call center, and then carrying out one of a number of different call connection processes depending on the call type. For voice channel cellular connections, an in-band modem cellular connection is preferably established in most instances using a connection retry strategy that includes primary, secondary, and possibly tertiary connection attempts. The system and method can be carried out in connection with various cellular system technologies, but is especially suited for use with GSM systems. | 07-01-2010 |
20100167728 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR FEMTO CELL COVERAGE MAPPING USING MACRO BASE STATION - A method and apparatus are disclosed for selecting between connection of a mobile communication device to a macro cell or connection of the mobile communication device to one of a plurality of femto cells in a network. The method includes determining a mapping of locations of the femto cells within coverage range of the macro cell, determining whether network considerations indicate the mobile communications device should be connected to the macro cell or to one of the plurality of femto cells, and enabling connection of the mobile communications device to the macro cell or to one of the plurality of femto cells based on the network considerations and the mapping of locations of the femto cells. | 07-01-2010 |
20100167729 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SCANNING NETWORK IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - An apparatus and a method for scanning a network in a mobile communication terminal are provided. The method for scanning a network in a mobile communication terminal includes to configure a PLMN list based on a Subscriber Identification Module (SIM) card, to store scanned frequency information and corresponding PLMN information into a database by a previous scanning result, to compare the database with the PLMN list and to perform a scanning corresponding to frequency bandwidths included in the database or performing a scanning entire frequency bandwidths according to a result of comparison. | 07-01-2010 |
20100167730 | CELL MANAGEMENT METHOD AND MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR THE SAME - A method of managing cells of base stations (BSs) and a mobile telecommunication system for the same, capable of allowing a user equipment (UE), which had not been permitted, to access the CSG BS if the UE meets an access condition, are disclosed. In accordance with the method and the system, an outdoor BS, manages a list of indoor BSs of a CCSG selected among indoor BSs of the CSG. The indoor BSs of the CCSG allow the UE to access the indoor BSs of the CCSG when the UE meets an access condition. The outdoor BS broadcasts a reporting criteria and reporting information, receives measurement values that meet the reporting criteria and an identity of the indoor BS as the reporting information from the UE, recognizes the environment of the UE based on the measurement value, checks the identity of the indoor base station in the list of the CCSG and allows the UE to access the indoor base station based on a check result. | 07-01-2010 |
20100167731 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SIGNAL SCANNING AND ACQUISITION FOR MULTIPLE-AIR-INTERFACE DEVICES - Methods and apparatus for signal scanning and acquisition for multiple-air-interface devices are discussed. In particular, scanning of a location for signals from one or more local service providers is carried out, wherein scanning is operable to detect signals based on at least a first air interface and a second air interface, such as CDMA and UMTS, respectively. A list of local service providers detected from the scanning is assembled to allow a user to select a connection to at a local service provider from the list. Thus, a user is afforded the ability to see all service provider signals in the location, for all bands and air-interfaces supported by the modem on a user's multiple-air-interface device. The user may therefore acquire connection more easily without having any prior knowledge about the area or its service providers, and regardless of the type of air interface originating the local signals. | 07-01-2010 |
20100178916 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR NOTIFYING AVAILABILITY OF FEMTOCELLS TO AN ELECTRONIC DEVICE - A method and system for notifying the availability of femtocells to an electronic device are provided. The method includes determining a fingerprint for each of the femtocells by a base station of a macrocell. The method also includes maintaining fingerprints of the femtocells by the base station. The method further includes notifying the availability of the femtocells to the electronic device based on corresponding fingerprints. The system includes a macrocell. The system also includes the femtocells in vicinity of the macrocell. The system further includes the electronic device that receives notification of the availability of the femtocells. Moreover, the system includes a base station in the macrocell to notify the availability of the femtocells to the electronic device. | 07-15-2010 |
20100184429 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR OBTAINING CANDIDATE INFORMATION - A method, computer readable medium and mobile device for operating using more than one Radio Access Technology (RAT) are provided. When the mobile device is operating in a serving cell of a first RAT, it obtains, through at least one of wireless access radios in the mobile device, a first set of candidate information from a message transmitted for the serving cell. It also obtains, through at least one of the wireless access radios, a second set of candidate information from a message transmitted for a neighbour cell of the serving cell. The mobile device considers the candidate information from the first set and the candidate information from the second set for reselection by the mobile device. | 07-22-2010 |
20100184430 | MOBILE WIRELESS TERMINAL APPARATUS AND BASE STATION SEARCH METHOD - A terminal control unit controls a 1× reception signal process unit, searches for a base station which supports a 1× method, and starts wait for occurrence of signal reception. Then, the terminal control unit periodically executes a nearby base station measuring process, controls the 1× reception signal process unit, and searches for a nearby base station which supports the 1× method. On the other hand, as regards a base station which supports an LTE method, an LTE reception signal process unit is activated to execute a search only in the case where a base station supporting the 1× method, which is used for signal reception wait, does not support the LTE method. | 07-22-2010 |
20100190494 | Method and apparatus for cell selection - A portable terminal is capable of selecting a cell for connecting to a communication network. The portable terminal sets a specific cell that satisfies preset conditions among surrounding cells as a management cell. The portable terminal determines whether a cell selection or cell reselection event is generated. The portable terminal performs a cell selection procedure excluding the management cell when the cell selection or cell reselection event is generated. | 07-29-2010 |
20100190495 | AUTOMATIC BASE STATION CONFIGURATION - A basestation in a cellular communications network is configured such that it has a different Location Area Identification from other local basestations in the cellular network. This has the effect that a Location Area Update procedure is performed when a mobile device wishes to camp onto that basestation. The basestation is able to configure itself automatically, to ensure that its Location Area Identification differs from other local basestations. | 07-29-2010 |
20100197301 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR NETWORK SCANNING BASED ON NEIGHBOR INFORMATION - A wireless device receives neighbor information broadcasted by a current serving network. The neighbor information includes frequency information of neighbors and overlay RAT (radio access technology). According to an embodiment of the disclosure, the wireless device avoids various frequency blocks when scanning for a RAT when it is known from the neighbor information that those frequency blocks are used for a different RAT. Those frequency blocks can either be skipped altogether or scanned only after other frequency blocks are scanned. Therefore, the amount of network scanning can be reduced. | 08-05-2010 |
20100197302 | TECHNIQUES FOR EXTRACTING A CONTROL CHANNEL FROM A RECEIVED SIGNAL IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A technique for extracting a control channel from a received signal includes storing interleaved control channel elements of the received signal in a control channel region of a memory. First addresses for first elements that are included in a first control channel are then generated using a first circuit. Finally, the respective first elements are read, using a second circuit, from the control channel region of the memory according to the generated first addresses to provide the first control channel in a deinterleaved form. | 08-05-2010 |
20100197303 | Radio Communication System, Radio Communication Terminal, Radio Base Station and Radio Communication Method - The radio commutation terminal ( | 08-05-2010 |
20100197304 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ACCESS STRATUM MANAGEMENT OF WIRELESS DEVICES - An apparatus and method for access stratum management comprising reading system information from at least one broadcast channel from a current serving cell; and determining if an available cell is suitable for a user equipment (UE) based on information included in the broadcasted system information, wherein the determining step comprises at least one of the following: comparing system release information of the user equipment (UE) from the broadcasted system information; determining if the available cell supports a specific feature which makes the available cell suitable for optimum performance of the UE; or determining if the available cell and a frequency combination are suitable for a UE type. | 08-05-2010 |
20100203885 | Method of Performing Cell Search for a Wireless Communications System - Performing cell search in a wireless communications system includes receiving a preamble signal, match filtering the preamble signal with a pseudo noise sequence to form a filtered preamble signal of a plurality of filtered preamble signals, choosing a largest filtered preamble signal from the plurality of filtered preamble signals, and determining an estimated pseudo noise sequence index and an estimated integer part frequency offset according to the largest filtered preamble signal. | 08-12-2010 |
20100203886 | TRANSMISSION CONTROL METHOD AND TRANSMISSION CONTROL DEVICE - A transmission control device determines cells, each of which has the number of reception users larger than a predetermined value, as a first group and sends data to the first group cells in the point-to-multipoint transmission mode. The transmission control device also determines cells, each of which has a few MBMS reception users and whose neighboring cell is a first group cell, as a second group and sends data to those cells in the point-to-multipoint transmission mode. The transmission control device sends data to other cells in the point-to-point transmission mode. In this way, the transmission control device selects cells to which data is sent in the point-to-multipoint transmission mode and, at the same time, allows a mobile station near the boundary of those cells to acquire a combining effect. Resource consumption amounts and improve coverage rate can be reduced when same data is sent to multiple mobile stations located in multiple cells. | 08-12-2010 |
20100203887 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COORDINATED MULTIPLE POINT TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION - A method and apparatus for cooperative multiple point transmission and reception (CoMP) are provided. The method includes: receiving channel information for a cell included in a clustering set from a user equipment; determining an active set consisting of a cell performing CoMP on the user equipment by using the channel information; and determining a cooperation period in which at least one of the clustering set and the active set is applied to the user equipment, where the clustering set denotes a set of candidate cells which can be included in the active set. | 08-12-2010 |
20100216459 | CELL SEARCH DEVICE OF CELLULAR SYSTEM USING OFDMA SCHEME AND METHOD THEREOF - A cell search device using an appropriate preamble for a downlink of a cellular system using an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing access (OFDMA) scheme and a method thereof is disclosed. The cell search device for a terminal of a cellular system using an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing access scheme includes when the terminal receives a preamble symbol from a base station, a PN code and phase delay estimating unit for generating a code with the received preamble symbol and a combination of a PN code and a Walsh code, calculating a correlation value therebetween using a differential demodulation for the codes to detect the PN code, a plurality of Walsh codes, and an error of a time delay, and estimating a component of a phase delay for the time delay; and a Walsh code estimating unit for minimizing the influence of the time error using the phase delay and the PN code information obtained by the differential demodulation of the PN code and phase delay estimating unit and estimating a Walsh code for the corresponding cell by synchronization demodulation. | 08-26-2010 |
20100216460 | METHOD AND USER EQUIPMENT WITH DUAL RF TRANSCEIVERS TO PERFORM PLMN LIST GENERATION OR PLMN SEARCH - Techniques for efficiently performing public land mobile network (PLMN) list generation or PLMN search on user equipment for use in a mobile communication system are described. The user equipment is operating in a plurality of supported modes and each supported mode includes a plurality of frequency bands. The user equipment includes an antenna, two RF transceivers and a processor. The RF transceivers are coupled to the antenna for operating in the operating frequency bands via the antenna. The processor coupled to the RF transceivers receives a request requesting PLMN list generation or PLMN search, determines whether both or either of the RF transceivers are available for handling the PLMN list generation or PLMN search, respectively directs the RF transceivers to generate a PLMN list or perform a search for at least one selected operating frequency band according to the request and a dispatch rule, and provides a corresponding execution result. | 08-26-2010 |
20100216461 | DETECTION OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICES IN SYSTEMS HAVING CELLS WITH DIFFERENT PILOT SIGNAL FREQUENCIES - An originating transceiver node sends a search message to an alternate transceiver node in response to receiving a pilot signal report message from a wireless communication device detecting a pilot signal from a detected transceiver node. The wireless communication device detects a strong pilot signal transmitted from the detected transceiver node at the same frequency used for the pilot signal transmitted by the originating transceiver node. The alternate transceiver node transmits a pilot signal at a second frequency. The pilot signal report message allows the originating transceiver node to determine at least an approximate location of the wireless communication device and to identify the alternate transceiver node as a transceiver node at least potentially able to provide wireless service to the wireless communication device. In response to the search message, the alternate transceiver node searches for uplink signals associated with a pilot signal having the first frequency. If uplink signals transmitted from the wireless communication device are detected by the alternate base station, a determination is made whether handoff to the alternate transceiver node should be performed. In some situations, the originating transceiver node may transmit a change uplink format message to the wireless communication device where the new uplink format increases the likelihood of detection of the uplink signals by the alternate transceiver node. | 08-26-2010 |
20100216462 | NETWORK NODE AND MOBILE TERMINAL - A technique is disclosed, according to which a mobile node, having a plurality of interfaces and performing communication according to flow information when an operator is performing communication based on the flow information as defined by a policy, can select an interface suitable for the flow and can perform communication. According to this technique, a mobile node (MN | 08-26-2010 |
20100216463 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO ESTIMATE RELATIVE BASE STATION AND SUBSCRIBER TERMINAL LOCATIONS AND USING IT TO INCREASE FREQUENCY REUSE - Method for estimating position information of base stations as well as terminals for three dimensional centralized real-time spectrum management to achieve high spectral efficiency. In one aspect of the invention, the method comprises i) understanding the position information of plurality of base stations, wherein the plurality of terminals and the base stations form a wireless network, ii) determining, at the central controller, position of a terminal via plurality of communication wirelessly between the base stations and a terminal and between the base station and the central controller, iii) applying network wide real time knowledge at the central controller to electronically steerable antennas to use a resource in a different direction then where it is used by other base stations to achieve frequency reuse of one. | 08-26-2010 |
20100216464 | CELL SELECTION IN MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS - Mobile user equipment for use in a cellular communications environment performs an improved cell selection on transitions out of a connected mode state. The transitions might be from one connected mode state to another or from a connected mode state to idle mode. The improvement in cell selection lies in assembling the list of candidate cells prior to cell selection. In the prior art, the list of candidate cells would usually be restricted to the serving cell or active cells supporting communication between the equipment and the network prior to transition. In embodiments of the invention, the list might comprise cells which are not the serving cell or which are outside the active set, for example a network-preferred cell or cells neighbouring the serving cell or cells of the active set. | 08-26-2010 |
20100222054 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING ACCESS AND UTILIZATION OF FEMTOCELLS VIA A NETWORK BASED SERVICE - Aspects of a method and system for controlling access and utilization of femtocells via a network based service are provided. In this regard, a femtocell management entity communicatively coupled to a network and operable to manage one or more femtocells may be accessed via an end-user communication device. In this manner, the femtocell(s) may be managed via the end-user device such as one of the cellular enabled communication devices. The femtocell management entity may enable establishing one or more SLAs between the femtocell(s) and the cellular enabled communication device(s). The SLA(s) may enable the cellular enabled communication device(s) to establish one or more cellular communication channels with the femtocell(s). The SLA(s) may determine when the cellular communication channels may be established. The SLA(s) may determine how a femtocell owner/operator may be compensated for providing cellular service. The femtocell(s) may be accessed utilizing Internet Protocol. | 09-02-2010 |
20100222055 | METHOD OF PERFORMING CELL RESELECTION PROCEDURE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of performing a cell reselection procedure in a wireless communication system includes evaluating priorities of a serving cell and neighbor cells, each of which use different frequency bands, performing inter-frequency measurement on a neighbor cell which has a higher priority than the serving cell, performing the inter-frequency measurement on a neighbor cell which has an equal or lower priority than the serving cell, when a signal characteristic of the serving cell is less than a threshold, and performing cell reselection according to the priorities. | 09-02-2010 |
20100222056 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SEARCHING FOR MODES AND FREQUENCIES - The present invention discloses a method and an apparatus for searching for modes and frequencies. The method includes: obtaining signal energy of all frequency grids within a frequency range; obtaining energy of each mode on a smallest bandwidth according to the signal energy of the grids; sorting the energy on the smallest bandwidths of all modes; and accessing a specified number of frequencies and modes of the highest energy in the sorting result. With the present invention, energy on the smallest bandwidths of all modes at a frequency band is obtained and sorted and then an access mode is determined according to the sorting result. Thus the access mode to use for a specified frequency can be quickly determined so as to improve the access success rate of a terminal in the subsequent access process. | 09-02-2010 |
20100227611 | Methods and apparatus for providing selective access to wireless network resources using detailed information - Methods and apparatus for providing enhanced access options for wireless access points (e.g., cellular femtocells). These access options in one embodiment include various grades or levels of private and public access to available femtocell services. Each service may be separately assigned a various access type, such that a femtocell may service multiple users both within the “closed” group authorized by the femtocell white list, and non-members. In one variant, a femtocell broadcasts enhanced system information to all terminals (regardless of member/non-member status) such that a non-CSG (Closed Subscriber Group) member terminal or UE is capable of obtaining partial service access within the femtocell. Broadcast multimedia or other services can be delivered to both CSG members and non-members, advantageously without having to establish a dedicated connection for the non-member users. | 09-09-2010 |
20100227612 | CELL DETECTION FOR MOBILE LOCATION WITH GROUPING DIVERSITY - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate transmitting pilot signals over resources selected based on a dynamic variable common to a wireless network. The resources can also be selected based on an identifier of a related access point to provide multiple levels of diversity in transmitting the pilot signal. Thus, a resource selected for a given access point can vary over subsequent frames and additionally vary with respect to other access points. A hash function can be utilized with the access point identifier to divide resources among access points, and using the dynamic variable, such as a frame identifier, can modify the selected resources over subsequent frames. This allows mobile devices to receive the pilot signals from access points at varying locations, for location determination in one example, with decreased interference. | 09-09-2010 |
20100227613 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM OF SELECTIVELY FEEDING BACK INFORMATION ABOUT INTERFERENCE CHANNELS FOR INTERFERENCE ALIGNMENT AND METHOD FOR OPERATING THE SYSTEM - A communication system may include a serving base station and neighboring base stations. Each of the serving base station and the neighboring base stations may have a corresponding user group. Terminals belonging to a particular user group may feed back information associated with interference channels, and reasonably generate a precoding matrix. Through this, it is possible to perform an accurate interference alignment and to enhance a throughput. In this instance, terminals belonging to the other user groups may feed back information associated with a throughput, and a corresponding base station may perform the interference alignment using a user selection resulting in decreased overhead. | 09-09-2010 |
20100234023 | ACCESS CONTROL METHOD USING FEMTO BASE STATION AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM THEREFOR - A communication system including a femto base station and a method for controlling access of a User Equipment (UE) in the communication system are provided. The method includes receiving a service request message from the UE and transmitting the service request message to a core network entity within a core network, receiving, from the core network, UE information and Local BreakOut (LBO) service information regarding the UE which is used to provide an LBO service to the UE, and providing the LBO service to the UE using the received information. Thus, a core network controls access of the UE so that the UE can directly access an Internet network through the LBO. | 09-16-2010 |
20100240364 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR BROADCASTING SYSTEM OVERHEAD MESSAGES IN WIRELESSS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A base station may generate a subpacket of system overhead messages that is designed so that a subscriber station improves a success rate of decoding the system overhead messages by accumulating multiple received subpackets. The base station may repeatedly broadcast the subpacket to subscriber stations. When a subscriber station receives a subpacket of system overhead messages, the subscriber station may combine the subpacket with previously received subpackets and attempt to decode the system overhead messages from this combination. | 09-23-2010 |
20100240365 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS WITH FEMTO NODES - Systems and methods for using a list of physical layer identifiers to efficiently read system information from a plurality of communication nodes are described herein. According to the systems and methods herein, the list of physical layer identifiers may be used to aid in the processes of manual selection of femto nodes, active handover, and/or idle cell reselection. | 09-23-2010 |
20100248717 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING A NETWORK SEARCH PROCEDURE - An approach is provided for performing a cell search procedure. System information that specifies a list of cell identifiers of a wireless network is generated for transmission to a terminal. The list of cell identifiers is used for performing a cell search procedure within the wireless network. | 09-30-2010 |
20100248718 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR IMPROVING QUALITY OF SERVICE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and a method for scanning neighbor networks in a mobile terminal are provided. In the method, the strength of a signal received from a serving station is measured. Whether to scan at least one neighbor network is determined with consideration of the strength of the signal. When it is determined to scan at least one neighbor network, the terminal switches to a power save mode, an at least one channel of the at least one neighbor network is scanned during an operation of the power save mode. | 09-30-2010 |
20100248719 | SELF-CONFIGURING MAN-MACHINE INTERFACE FOR A COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A communication device comprising a man-machine interface operable to be dynamically updated in accordance with predefined conditions, the man-machine interface being updated to reflect services offered by at least one service provider in a particular operating environment. | 09-30-2010 |
20100261472 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING CELL SEARCH PROCEDURE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for performing a cell search procedure by a user equipment in a wireless communication system includes receiving a primary synchronization signal (PSS), and obtaining a correlation value of the PSS to detect a multimedia broadcast multicast service (MBMS) indicator indicating whether a service is a dedicated MBMS. Accordingly, whether the service is the dedicated MBMS is indicated using a primary synchronization signal or a secondary synchronization signal used in an initial cell search process, and whether the service is the dedicated MBMS can be known without additional complexity. Therefore, cell search of a user equipment can be more effectively performed. | 10-14-2010 |
20100279683 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION BETWEEN A BASE STATION AND A MOBILE DEVICE - System and method for wirelessly communicating between a base station and a mobile device. The base station wirelessly sends a first one or more overhead messages to the mobile device. The first one or more overhead messages may include at least one parameter. The mobile device may wirelessly receive the first one or more overhead messages from the base station, including the at least one parameter. The base station may wirelessly send a second one or more messages to the mobile device according to a schedule based on the at least one parameter. The mobile device may wirelessly receive the second one or more messages according to the schedule based on the at least one parameter. The mobile device may schedule a sleep cycle based on the at least one parameter, which may reduce battery consumption in the mobile device. The second one or more messages may be sent less frequently than the first one or more overhead messages. | 11-04-2010 |
20100279684 | Communication Devices and Methods for Providing Services to Communication Devices in a Communication System Including a Private Cell - A method in a communication device ( | 11-04-2010 |
20100291925 | USER EQUIPMENT AND VERIFICATION METHOD - A user equipment performing a cell search and detecting cell-specific information including a cell ID. The user equipment includes a receiving unit configured to receive a synchronization channel; a cell search unit configured to extract a primary synchronization channel and a secondary synchronization channel from the received synchronization channel to perform the cell search; and a verification unit configured to verify a detection result of the cell search based on a verification start condition. | 11-18-2010 |
20100291926 | RADIO COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - A radio communication apparatus includes a radio communication unit which searches a connectable radio access network to be connected to at least one radio access network and receives broadcast information of the connected radio access network, and a control unit which connects the radio access network to the first radio access network detected by the search, checks whether or not the broadcast information includes time information, and connects the radio communication unit to a second radio access network detected by the search if the broadcast information does not include the time information. | 11-18-2010 |
20100304741 | Non-Macro Cell Search Integrated with Macro-Cellular RF Carrier Monitoring - Embodiments include access terminals, computer readable media, and wireless communication systems. These sample a wireless spectrum portion that includes macro cell carrier and at least one other target carrier where non-macro cells are deployed, using a receive chain, a signal processor, and a controller. The wireless spectrum portion is processed to resolve portions corresponding to macro cell carrier and at least one additional carrier where target non-macro cells are deployed. The processed signal is searched for at least one target non-macro cell pilot and the macro carrier portion is used for a paging monitoring operation. | 12-02-2010 |
20100304742 | METHOD, SYSTEM, MOBILE TERMINAL AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT - Systems, methods, and computer program products are provided for calculating an indicator of a quality of communication within a wireless communication access network and for estimating the available capacity of a base station within the wireless communication access network. In one exemplary embodiment, a method comprises receiving an indication, generated by a mobile terminal, of the quality of communication between the base station and the mobile terminal, and estimating the available capacity of the base station based on the received indication. | 12-02-2010 |
20100304743 | METHOD FOR MANAGING NEIGHBOR FEMTO BS LIST IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - A method for updating a neighbor list at a femto Base Station (BS) is disclosed. The method includes broadcasting a first broadcast message including information about an unavailable time interval during which scheduling is not performed for Mobile Stations (MSs), scanning at least one neighbor BS during the unavailable time interval, and updating the neighbor list according to a result of the scanning. | 12-02-2010 |
20100304744 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING SEARCHES WITH MULTIPLE RECEIVE DIVERSITY (RXD) SEARCH MODES - Techniques for performing searches by a user equipment (UE) equipped with multiple receive antennas are described. In an aspect, the UE may support multiple receive diversity (R×D) search modes. Each R×D search mode may be different from each remaining R×D search mode in how correlation is performed, how correlation results are combined, and/or how search results are reported for the multiple receive antennas. The UE may select an R×D search mode from among the multiple R×D search modes and may perform at least one step of a search in accordance with the selected R×D search mode. In another aspect, the UE may perform a search with interference cancellation to detect cell(s). The UE may determine multiple complex weights for multiple receive antennas such that signals from interfering cells can be attenuated. The UE may perform a search to detect cell(s) using the complex weights. | 12-02-2010 |
20100317342 | METHOD OF COMMUNICATION BETWEEN A SOURCE MOBILE SET WITHOUT NETWORK COVERAGE AND A TARGET SET - The invention relates to a communication procedure between a source mobile equipment ( | 12-16-2010 |
20100323693 | Reselection in a Wireless Communication System - A wireless communication device including a transceiver coupled to a controller configured to cause the transceiver to receive a downlink transmission including a reference signal from a base station while camped on the base station in idle mode, to estimate a quality metric of a hypothetical paging channel reception based on the reference signal, and to determine perform reselection evaluation of a neighboring base stations based on the estimated quality metric. | 12-23-2010 |
20100323694 | MOBILE RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - In a mobile radio communication system of the cognitive radio method, a database device has a use state table indicating a probability that each frequency band is used for each period of time and for each location. An on-vehicle terminal acquires a frequency band having the highest probability that the band is empty at the current time and the current location according to the use state table and performs a radio communication by using the frequency band. The use state table is preferably created by a statistical process using the database device which acquires the use states of frequency bands of various locations and times by using respective vehicles as probe cars. Thus, it is possible to detect the frequency of the empty state in a short time. | 12-23-2010 |
20100330988 | METHOD AND APPARATUS - A method comprising: receiving in a first mobile communication device information about at least one access network from at least one second mobile communication device; and selecting an access network for use by the first mobile communication device in dependence on said information. | 12-30-2010 |
20100330989 | TERMINAL AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING CELL SEARCHING THEREOF - A cell search method for a terminal capable of cell search control includes: receiving a message including first cell search information from a macro cell base station that manages a macro cell; updating second cell search information stored in the terminal based on the first cell search information; and searching for an accessible cell based on the updated second cell search information. | 12-30-2010 |
20110003591 | LOW DUTY MODE FOR FEMTOCELL BASE STATIONS - A low duty mode is provided for a femtocell base station operating as part of a cellular communications system. Methods and systems are described for reducing the service impact of the low-duty mode on mobile stations that are either already attached or are attempting to attach to a femtocell base station. | 01-06-2011 |
20110003592 | Control Method of Wireless Communication Terminal and Wireless Communication Terminal - A wireless communication terminal | 01-06-2011 |
20110009117 | Flexible Sharing of Measurement Gaps - The present invention relates to a method, apparatuses, a system, and a computer program product for generating measurement gaps in a data transfer between a wireless terminal device and a wireless access network. A sharing indicator is signaled from the wireless access network to the wireless terminal device, and is used at the wireless terminal device to control allocation ratios of the measurement gaps to different radio access technologies. | 01-13-2011 |
20110014910 | CHANNEL REUSE IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Disclosed are systems and methods for communicating among stations coupled to a communication medium by receiving signals from a plurality of the stations, determining signal strength values for each of the received signals based on at least a portion of the signal, and based on the signal strength values, selecting a detection threshold such that, in response to a signal having a signal strength in excess of the detection threshold, the signal is processed according to a protocol of a subset of the stations. | 01-20-2011 |
20110014911 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT FOR REPEATER/RELAY CONTROL - In a method in a controllable repeater in a telecommunication system, said system comprising a radio base station, at least said controllable repeater and a plurality of user terminals, receiving a list of associated user terminal identities for said repeater, and searching for and decoding downlink channel control messages based on said provided list. | 01-20-2011 |
20110021191 | CROSS-CARRIER CONTROL FOR LTE-ADVANCED MULTICARRIER SYSTEM - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitates identifying control information for two or more carriers in a multi-carrier system or environment. User equipment (UE) identifications (IDs) can be assigned for a user equipment, wherein each user equipment (UE) identification (ID) can correspond to a specific carrier. Upon receipt of control information related to a plurality of carriers from an anchor carrier, the user equipment (UE) identifications (IDs) can be utilized in order to identify which control information corresponds to each carrier. The user equipment (UE) identification (ID) can be, for example, a Cell Random Network Temporary Identity (C-RNTI). | 01-27-2011 |
20110034168 | CELL SEARCH METHOD FOR MULTI-MODE TELECOMMUNICATION APPARATUS, SUCH APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM FOR IMPLEMENTING THE METHOD - A cell search method for a multi-mode telecommunication apparatus is disclosed. The method comprises receiving signals present in a frequency range; transforming received signals into frequency domain; estimating power spectral density from transformed signals; estimating probability of different communication modes by correlating the estimated power spectral density with power spectral density signatures of said different communication modes; and performing cell search according to estimated most probable communication mode. Such an apparatus and a computer program for performing the method are also disclosed. | 02-10-2011 |
20110039554 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMANCE OPTIMIZATION OF HETEROGENOUS WIRELESS SYSTEM COMMUNITIES - Methods and apparatus for enhancing the operation and capacity of a wireless coexistence community having devices with multiple differing air interfaces that share physical or spectral access resources such as time, frequency, code, etc. These methods and apparatus allow the multiple devices to manage interference among one another fairly or according to one or more policy objectives, despite having different physical layer operations and implementations. In one embodiment, a mathematics-based model is utilized in accordance with device profiles to intelligently optimize the operation of one or more of the wireless devices according to a “good neighbor” paradigm. | 02-17-2011 |
20110039555 | METHOD INCLUDING A BACKGROUND SCAN FOR IDENTIFYING RADIO ACCESS POSSIBILITIES, MOBILE TERMINAL AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - While being served by a serving network, a mobile terminal performs a background scan to identify radio access possibilities in the area where mobile terminal is located. Information is stored, herein referred to as BSB information, regarding the identified radio access possibilities. When mobile terminal determines that a new serving network is needed, for instance because coverage of the serving network is lost, one or more attempts are made to connect to a new serving network using the stored BSB information. A mobile terminal and a computer program for performing such a method are also disclosed. | 02-17-2011 |
20110039556 | VEHICLE TELEMATICS UNIT BACKGROUND SCAN FOR NETWORK SELECTION IN A CELLULAR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A system and method for making vehicle originated calls to a telematics service provider or other call center. The method includes identifying a call type associated with a desired wireless communication of speech or data to the call center, and then carrying out one of a number of different call connection processes depending on the call type. For voice channel cellular connections, an in-band modem cellular connection is preferably established in most instances using a connection retry strategy that includes primary, secondary, and possibly tertiary connection attempts. Cell selection can be carried out using an acquisition task, background scan and inter-country PLMN reselection process that are used to select among available PLMNs and base stations. The system and method can be carried out in connection with various cellular system technologies, but is especially suited for use with GSM systems. | 02-17-2011 |
20110039557 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE MEASUREMENT REPORTING | 02-17-2011 |
20110039558 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF CELL RESELECTION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus of selecting a cell in a wireless communication system is provided. A user equipment receives an Intra Frequency Reselection indicator (IFRI) from a barred cell. The user equipment starts an Intra Frequency Reselection (IFR) timer when the IFRI indicates not to allow reselection of a neighboring cell in a frequency of the barred cell, and searches neighboring cells in the frequency of the barred cell while the IFR timer is running. | 02-17-2011 |
20110045829 | MOBILE RADIO TERMINAL AND BASE STATION SEARCH METHOD - A mobile radio terminal of the present invention searches for a base station by a first search method by using a frequency at which an electric field strength of a radio signal has a reference value or more, searches for the base station by a second search method by using the frequency group usable for communication with the base station belonging to the mobile communication network, searches for the base station by the first search method until a number of searches by the first base station search method corresponds to an upper limit value of a number of searches, and searches for the base station by the second search method when the base station search by the first search method does not succeed by a time when the number of searches for the base station by the first search method corresponds to the upper limit value. | 02-24-2011 |
20110065431 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OBTAINING NEIGHBOURING CELL ATTRIBUTES - A network element for providing access to a cellular communication network via a communication cell, the network element comprising signal processing logic arranged to initiate neighbour cell attribute discovery by a wireless communication unit located within the communication cell. The signal processing logic is further arranged to receive a neighbour cell attribute report from the wireless communication unit, extract neighbour cell attribute information from the received neighbour cell attribute report, and to update a neighbour cell list for the communication cell based on the extracted neighbour cell attribute information. | 03-17-2011 |
20110065432 | MOBILE STATION - A mobile station comprises an access right management section configured so as to manage the CSG-ID corresponding to a CSG cell which permits access to the mobile station, a measurement section configured so as to measure the radio quality in peripheral cells, and a display section configured so as to display at least the CSG cell corresponding to the CSG-ID managed by the access right management section for each frequency out of the peripheral cells the radio quality of which has been measured by the measurement section on a screen as an available CSG cell. | 03-17-2011 |
20110065433 | HANDOVER CONTROL METHOD, CELL RESELECTION METHOD AND MOBILE STATION - A handover control method comprises a step in which a mobile station measures radio qualities in a plurality of different frequency cells at predetermined measurement intervals and a step in which the mobile station, when determining that the radio quality in a specific frequency cell satisfies a report condition, starts up a timer for the specific frequency cell and, when the timer for the specific frequency cell has expired, transmits to a radio base station a measurement report including the radio quality in the specific frequency cell. The mobile station, even when a timer for a second frequency cell has expired, does not transmit to the radio base station a measurement report including the radio quality in the second frequency cell if a timer for a first frequency cell having a higher priority than the second frequency cell is running. | 03-17-2011 |
20110070884 | METHOD FOR MULTI-POINT COOPERATION CONSIDERING DELAY IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a method of a multi-node cooperation considering a delay in a wireless communication system. A frame format may perform scheduling so that uplink cooperation terminals having a similar delay attribute may be classified into an uplink cooperation zone, to thereby prevent interference between the uplink cooperation zone and a non-cooperation zone. An extended cyclic prefix may be applied according to a delay attribute occurring due to an application of the multi-node cooperation. A cooperation base station of an uplink and a downlink may be determined based on the extended cyclic prefix. | 03-24-2011 |
20110070885 | Cognitive Control Radio Access Information Via Database Or Cognitive Pilot Channel - In an exemplary embodiment a cognitive radio/user equipment CR/UE receives information of where at least one cognitive control radio channel resides from at least one of the following sources: a database sharing information on licensed spectrum users, and a cognitive pilot channel CPC sharing information on licensed spectrum users. The CR/UE uses the received information to access the at least one CPC. In more specific exemplary embodiments: the information of where the at least one cognitive control radio channel resides comprises the used frequency for the at least one cognitive control radio channel; in response to at least one of expiration of a periodic timer, discovery of interference from a primary user on a channel, and entering a new geographic area, the database or CPC is checked or re-checked to detect from the received information that the used frequency for the CRC channel has changed. | 03-24-2011 |
20110077003 | PROTOCOL PROCESSING METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MULTI-SIM TERMINAL - A protocol processing method and apparatus are disclosed for a multi-SIM terminal holding multiple subscriber identification cards. The method includes: determining whether all the subscriber identification cards are associated with the same base station (e.g., a Public Land Mobile Network); and conducting, when all the subscriber identification cards are associated with the same base station, frequency scanning and measurement for a selected one of the subscriber identification cards, and sharing the results of frequency scanning and measurement with all the subscriber identification cards. Hence, the multi-SIM terminal may reduce battery power consumption without repeated frequency scanning and measurement for multiple subscriber identification cards. | 03-31-2011 |
20110077004 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND NETWORK DEVICE - To improve continuity in a communication service while preventing wasteful power consumption in the mobile station, in the mobile communication method of the present invention comprises a step A of the mobile station communicating with a macro cell measuring and reporting reception quality in a neighboring cell of the macro cell, the neighboring cell being notified by a network device, and the network device detecting a home cell that does not allow access from the mobile station, and step B of the network device notifying the mobile station of the neighboring cell of the macro cell excluding the detected cell that does not allow access from the mobile station. | 03-31-2011 |
20110081908 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR REGISTRATIONS AND SERVICE ANNOUNCEMENTS IN PEER-TO-PEER NETWORKS VIA CELLULAR OVERLAYS - Certain embodiments of the present disclosure relate to a method and an apparatus for registration and service announcements in peer-to-peer wireless networks to increase capacity of such networks. The present disclosure proposes a hybrid registration mechanism allowing a peer-to-peer node to leverage an administrative architecture of a neighboring cellular system. | 04-07-2011 |
20110081909 | CELL SELECTION METHOD AND MOBILE STATION - A cell selection method includes steps of: (A) determining, at a mobile station (UE), whether or not a first CSG cell satisfies a predetermined condition, when using a first macro cell as a camped cell; and (B) changing, at the mobile station (UE), the camped cell from the first macro cell to a first CSG cell, when determined that the first CSG cell satisfies the predetermined condition. | 04-07-2011 |
20110086636 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR HOME CELLULAR NETWORKS - A method for wireless communication is provided. The method includes obtaining address information of a plurality of access points and determining physical position information of the plurality of access points based on the address information. The method also includes determining one or more zones covering the plurality of access points based on the physical position information and configuring a network self-organization scheme based on the one or more zones. | 04-14-2011 |
20110092204 | CELL SELECTION METHOD AND MOBILE STATION - A cell selection method includes steps of: (A) determining, at a mobile station (UE), whether or not a first CSG cell satisfies a predetermined condition, when using a first macro cell as a camped cell; and (B) changing, at the mobile station (UE), the camped cell from the first macro cell to a first CSG cell, when determined that the first CSG cell satisfies the predetermined condition. | 04-21-2011 |
20110098040 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION METHOD THEREOF - A wireless communication device and method includes selecting a group of neighboring base stations having a relatively stronger signal intensity among the neighboring base stations as servo base stations, and periodically detecting the signal intensities of the servo base stations and the candidate base station. Differences between the signal intensities of two selected neighboring base stations for each cycle of a continuous cycles are accumulated, where when the accumulated value exceeds a threshold value in a each cycle, the group of servo base stations are updated and weakest servo base stations with the strongest candidate base station in that cycle are replaced. | 04-28-2011 |
20110098041 | RADIO CONTROLLER, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND BASE STATION, MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A radio controller performs call connection when a connection request is sent from a UE that exists in a macrocell accommodated by a macrocell base station. Thereafter, when the radio controller receives the connection request from the UE that exists in the macrocell accommodated by the macrocell base station, the radio controller searches for a femtocell that is adjacent to or overlaps the macrocell in which the UE exists and a femto base station that accommodates the femtocell. The radio controller instructs the searched femto base station to resume. The radio controller then instructs the UE to be handed over to the femtocell. | 04-28-2011 |
20110105116 | TERMINAL FOR ENTERING COVERAGE OF SMALL BASE STATION, SMALL BASE STATION, NETWORK APPARATUS, AND METHOD - A terminal for entering a coverage of a small base station, a network apparatus, and a method for operating the same are provided. The network apparatus controls small base stations, on which the terminal is camped, to operate in an active mode in which the small base station emits radio frequency (RF) signals, and controls small base stations, accessible by the terminal but not camped on by the terminal, to operate in an inactive mode in which the small base station does not emit RF signals. | 05-05-2011 |
20110111754 | Neighbor List Broadcasting Techniques - Techniques are disclosed that involve the indication of neighbor base stations. For instance, a base station may generate and wirelessly transmit a message that indicates a plurality of neighboring base stations. This message may include an indicator having one or more wildcard values. Through the employment of such wildcard values, the indicator may provide information corresponding to the plurality of neighboring base stations. For instance, the indicator may indicate a plurality of base station identifiers (BSIDs). Alternatively, the indicator may indicate a plurality of preamble indices. As a further alternative, the indicator may indicate a plurality of carrier frequencies. Through the employment of such techniques, overhead can be saved without causing ambiguity in mobility management. | 05-12-2011 |
20110111755 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND BASE STATION THEREOF - A wireless communication system delivering neighbor information (NBR-INF) and a base station and a wireless communication device thereof are proposed. The wireless communication system includes at least a mobile station and a base station. The base station decides delivering the NBR-INF triggered by events, determines type of the NBR-INF to be delivered and determines a delivery rule of the NBR-INF to be delivered. The mobile station, wirelessly connected to the at least a base station, receives the NBR-INF delivered from the at least a base station, and decides to completely renew or partially update its own neighbor information contents. | 05-12-2011 |
20110117911 | DEVICES AND METHODS FOR WIRELESS SYSTEM ACQUISITION - Disclosed are devices, methods and computer program products for radio access network (RAN) signal acquisition. In one aspect, a mobile device scans a radio frequency spectrum for RAN signals and detects signals corresponding to a plurality of channels of a first network type having a first channel bandwidth. The mobile device then determines a power level of the detected signal on each of the plurality of channels and discards signals having substantially equal power within a first frequency range to define a remaining set of signals. The first frequency range corresponds to a second channel bandwidth of a second network type and the second channel bandwidth is greater than the first channel bandwidth. The mobile device then ranks the remaining signals based on the determined power level and selects one of the remaining signals for acquisition based on the ranking. | 05-19-2011 |
20110117912 | SYSTEM INFORMATION COLLECTION WHILE CAMPING ON A CELL - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate collecting consistent system information when entering a cell during cell selection and/or cell re-selection in a wireless communication environment. SIB(s) can be received while lacking modification period information (e.g., modification period boundary, modification period duration, . . . ). Further, the SIB(s) can be stored in memory with corresponding SFN(s) at which the SIB(s) are respectively received. Thereafter, the modification period information can be identified (e.g., from a SIB | 05-19-2011 |
20110124332 | System and method for load balancing among multiple base stations using network initiated handovers - The present invention relates to a system and method for load sharing among multiple base stations using Network Initiated Handover (NIHO). In one embodiment, the method includes computing scores for qualified pairs of candidate mobile station and target base station for potential network initiated handover (NIHO), and selecting a pair of candidate mobile station and target base station based on the computed scores to handover the candidate mobile station of the selected pair from the serving base station to the target base station of the selected pair. | 05-26-2011 |
20110124333 | FEMTOCELL CONFIGURATION USING SPECTRUM SENSING - An embodiment of the present invention provides for the ad-hoc configuration of femtocells using spectrum sensing for the selection of spectrum channels. One or more embodiments of the invention determine frequency bands that are not reserved by macrocells in a location, and perform spectrum sensing to determine communication channels in unreserved frequency bands that are being used by other femtocells in range. In this manner, femtocells can be deployed and configured in an ad-hoc manner without external coordination or control between deployed femtocells. | 05-26-2011 |
20110124334 | MOBILITY-BASED RESELECTION SCAN SCHEDULING - The disclosed subject matter relates to an architecture that can determine a scanning schedule for reselection scanning in connection with a wireless communication network or service. The architecture can monitor various indicia relating to recent movement of user equipment (UE) such as a wireless device, and, based upon such recent movement indicia, construct a mobility pattern for the UE. In addition, based upon the mobility pattern, the architecture can generate a reselection scanning schedule for the UE designed to optimize tradeoffs between battery life and network awareness. | 05-26-2011 |
20110124335 | ENHANCED PLMN LIST - The present disclosure relates to generating a candidate network credential list based on position information. In one implementation, the candidate network credential list includes public land mobile networks (PLMNs) that are available in a geographic region associated with the position information. In another implementation, the candidate network credential list may be a subset of a larger network credential list stored in a wireless device. | 05-26-2011 |
20110124336 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication system in which a network side and a mobile station apparatus communicate with each other through a base station apparatus. In the mobile station apparatus, a position information acquisition device acquires the position information regarding the mobile station apparatus. At the network side, a network side quality information receiving device receives the data in which the position information transmitted from the mobile station apparatus and quality information regarding each cell are associated with each other. A network side quality information storage device stores the data received by the network side quality information receiving device or a result after processing the data. A network side quality information transmitting device transmits the quality information regarding each cell, which corresponds to the position information regarding the mobile station apparatus, to the mobile station apparatus on the basis of the content stored in the network side quality information storage device. | 05-26-2011 |
20110124337 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EFFICIENT NETWORK SCANNING - A method and apparatus for efficient network scanning that selects candidate frequencies based upon the frequency bands that were noted as being active during a previous network scan. A mobile device performs a full network scan on power up or on radio cycle and determines the available active bands. This information is stored as active band information on the device. When the device loses coverage on a selected one of the bands, then it identifies a candidate frequency based upon the stored active band information and attempts to locate a suitable network on the candidate band. | 05-26-2011 |
20110143755 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IDENTIFYING A TELECOMMUNICATION CELL BASED ON BROADCAST CELL PARAMETERS - The present application describes a method for receiving information broadcast by a network comprising characteristics pertaining to one or more telecommunication cells in the network and determining a type of cell for at least one of the one or more telecommunication cells as a function of the information broadcast by the network instead of as a result of a broadcast by the network specifically identifying the at least one telecommunication cell as a particular type of cell. The determining of a type of cell may include distinguishing a Femto cell from a Macro cell, a Micro cell or a Pico cell. The characteristics pertaining to one or more telecommunication cells in the network may include characteristics pertaining to operation of a serving telecommunication cell and/or characteristics pertaining to operation of at least one telecommunication cell neighbouring the serving telecommunication cell. A wireless device is also disclosed for implementing the method. | 06-16-2011 |
20110151866 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR PROVIDING POWER SAVINGS ON MOBILE DEVICES - Various embodiments for providing enhanced power savings in mobile computing devices are described. In one or more embodiments, a mobile computing device may include a motion sensor to detect when the device is in motion. The mobile computing device may include a radio processor that may select from among several signal search procedures based on whether the device is in motion, and whether a signal is detectable and adequate. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 06-23-2011 |
20110151867 | MOBILE TERMINAL, MACRO BASE STATION, AND CELL SELECTION SYSTEM - A mobile terminal ( | 06-23-2011 |
20110151868 | METHOD OF SEARCHING FOR THE USER EQUIPMENTS IN THE SPECIFIC AREA AND MEANS FOR THE SAME - The present invention aims to provide a technical solution for the caller can call the user equipments in the specific area without knowing the numbers of the user equipments first. A querying device sends a first querying request message to a querying response server to query the user equipments in the specific area. The querying server sends a first querying response message comprising the relevant information of the user equipments in the specific area back to the querying device. The relevant information includes the communication identifier (such as number). The caller then can communicate with the user equipment in the specific area according to the first querying response message. The present invention enhances the existing location services and provides the reversed style location service to users or customers and helps to improve the users' experiences in communication. | 06-23-2011 |
20110165873 | COMBINED BACKGROUND AND 20/40 COEXISTENCE SCAN - A scanning module within a non-AP station receives first scan parameter values for performing a first type of scan to obtain a first type of information, and receives second scan parameter values for performing a second type of scan to obtain a second type of information. From the first and second parameter values the scanning module determines combined scan parameter values that satisfy scan requirements for both types of scans. The combined scan parameter values are used to control a sequence of combined scans. A combined scan yields both the first and second type of information. In one example, an IEEE 802.11(n) non-AP station receives 20/40 coexistence scan parameters. The 20/40 parameters and locally-generated background scan parameters are used to determine parameters for performing combined background and 20/40 scans. Reducing the number of scans using combined scans has advantages including increasing data throughput, freeing processing resources, and reducing power consumption. | 07-07-2011 |
20110165874 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK SYSTEM - A method and a communication network node for satisfying detection miss probability and false detection probability requirements in a random access channel used by mobile stations (MS) for accessing a communication network system comprising radio base stations (BS) each serving at least one cell ( | 07-07-2011 |
20110171955 | UE initiated frequency partitioning based CoMP scheme for downlink cellular communications - In the embodiments of the present invention, proposed is a method in which a CoMP enabled UE chooses the BSs to be in its cooperating set and a BS partitions its bandwidth to serve its own UEs and UEs from other cells that have requested it to be in its cooperating set. | 07-14-2011 |
20110171956 | GENERAL ACCESS NETWORK CONTROLLER BYPASS TO FACILITATE USE OF STANDARD CELLULAR HANDSETS WITH A GENERAL ACCESS NETWORK - Enabling a standard cellular handset to be used to access a core mobile network via a generic access network is disclosed. A communication between a generic access network element and the core mobile network is intercepted. A modified version of the communication is generated. The modified communication is forwarded. | 07-14-2011 |
20110183669 | Methods and Arrangments for Dynamically Adjusting the Rate of Sub Cell Searching in Coordinated Multiple Point Transmission/Reception, Comp, Cells - The present invention relates to methods and arrangements that enable a User Equipment UE to limit the number of sub cell searches needed in a wireless communication system with Coordinated Multiple Point transmission/reception (CoMP) cells, while keeping an acceptable system performance at handovers. This is achieved by a solution where the UE does sub cell search in a candidate target CoMP cell only when the candidate target CoMP cell quality performance is within a reasonable range or when the serving CoMP cell quality performance is low. | 07-28-2011 |
20110189992 | METHOD AND A DEVICE FOR ENABLING A MOBILE TERMINAL TO ACCESS TO A WIRELESS CELLULAR TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method enabling a mobile terminal to access a wireless cellular telecommunication network including plural base stations and a core network device. The mobile terminal is allowed to access the wireless cellular telecommunication network through at least one first base station and memorizes a list including information enabling the identification of signals transferred by each first base station, the mobile terminal not memorizing information enabling the identification of signals transferred by second base stations. One second base station: receives a message requesting the second base station to transfer signals that should be transferred by one first base station, transfers signals that should be transferred by the first base station, and broadcasts information enabling the identification by the mobile terminal of other signals transferred by the second base station and/or at least one other second base station. | 08-04-2011 |
20110195712 | WIRELESS NETWORK FREQUENCY SCANNING - Disclosed is a frequency scanning method that employs a number of frequency sets that may be scanned consecutively, according to a fixed delay or interval, to discover a frequency that may be used to obtain wireless communication service. In one implementation, any number of these sets may be scanned before a wireless device performs a scan of a full set of frequencies that may be available to the wireless device. | 08-11-2011 |
20110195713 | METHODS FOR SELECTING CELLS IN CELLULAR TELEPHONE SYSTEMS - User equipment such as cellular telephones and other wireless electronic devices may communicate wirelessly with 2G and 3G cells in a cellular network. The cellular network may broadcast a list of primary scrambling codes corresponding to 3G cell sites that are potentially available for wirelessly communicating with the user equipment. The user equipment may perform an evaluation of primary scrambling code pilot signal strengths for each of the primary scrambling codes in the list. The user equipment may also maintain a record whenever a more extensive full primary scrambling code scan fails. If the evaluation reveals that at least one signal strength is sufficient, the cellular telephone may establish a corresponding 3G wireless link. If the evaluation does not identify any sufficiently strong 3G cells, a full pilot signal scan may be performed, provided that no full scans have failed within a predetermined time interval before the current time. | 08-11-2011 |
20110201332 | Method and Arrangement for Processing of Neighbor Cell Information - Methods and arrangements for improving the selection of neighbor cells, on which to perform measurements in different situations. The method in a first node involves obtaining information identifying a first and a second set of neighboring cells for a respective first and second measurement category. A third set of neighboring cells is then determined based on at least parts of the obtained information related to the first and second set. Measurements are then performed in a third measurement category on at least part of the cells in the third set of neighboring cells. The methods and arrangements enable combination of information on neighbor cells, obtained in different ways for different measurement categories into a combined set of neighbor cells, which is more suitable for measurements in a certain measurement category than a set of cells previously obtained for performing measurements in said measurement category. | 08-18-2011 |
20110201333 | Method for Receiving Control Information in Wireless Communication System and Apparatus Therefor - A method of receiving a control signal by a user equipment in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The present invention includes receiving control regions including the control channel relevant to each of a plurality of component carriers via a plurality of component carriers and detecting the control channel for the user equipment by performing blind decoding by a unit of CCE (control channel element) aggregated at a preset level in a search space included in the control regions. And, start positions of the search spaces in the plurality of component carriers is in a certain relationship. Moreover, the preset level is identically set for each of the plurality of component carriers. | 08-18-2011 |
20110207455 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ESTIMATING CELLULAR TOWER LOCATION - A method and apparatus for collecting and analyzing cellular identification (ID) numbers at various geographic locations to estimate cellular tower locations. The method may include collecting cellular ID numbers obtained by collection mobile devices at a plurality of geographic locations then calculating minimum bounding circles encompassing a set of geographic location points with the same cellular identification numbers. If the cellular ID number of a set of location points indicates that the cellular tower is omni-directional, a center of the minimum bounding circle is an estimated cellular tower location. If the cellular ID number indicates that the cellular tower is multi-sector, the apparatus may calculate the estimated cellular tower location as the location at which lines that extend from the centers of a plurality of related minimum bounding circles intersect with each other to form equal angles. | 08-25-2011 |
20110207456 | Systems, Methods and Apparatus Configured to Manage Neighbor Cell Lists - According to some wireless network standards the size of a neighbor cell list is restricted to a maximum size. The limited size of a neighbor cell list may not reflect the realities of a wireless network deployment, especially for deployments including numerous femto cells clustered in close proximity. Accordingly, as the concentration of macro cells and/or femto cells in an area increases, there lies a challenge to identify and communicate neighbor lists to user devices that reflect the arrangement of a particular portion of the deployment and the needs of the user devices. Various systems, methods and apparatus described herein are configured to provide a user device or a group of user devices a neighbor cell list that includes neighbor cell identifiers chosen from a candidate list. | 08-25-2011 |
20110207457 | USER EQUIPMENT AND CELL SEARCH METHOD - User equipment for performing cell search using a synchronization channel including a primary synchronization channel and a secondary synchronization channel includes a reception unit configured to receive a signal including the synchronization channel, a symbol timing candidate detection unit configured to detect multiple synchronization signal symbol timing candidates from the synchronization channel based on a correlation value in a time domain between the signal received at the reception unit and a replica signal of the primary synchronization channel, a secondary synchronization channel correlation detection unit configured to perform correlation detection for the secondary synchronization channel based on the multiple synchronization signal symbol timing candidates detected in the symbol timing candidate detection unit and a secondary synchronization channel detection unit configured to detect the secondary synchronization channel based on a result of the correlation detection by the secondary synchronization channel correlation detection unit. | 08-25-2011 |
20110212722 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Methods and apparatuses are provided that facilitate avoiding one or more wireless communication systems based at least in part on determining a level of unreliability of a reverse link channel related to a system. This can be based at least in part on determining whether the system can be accessed over the reverse link channel. If not, the wireless communication system can be avoided to conserve power utilized to perform such access attempts. Where the unreliability is temporary, however, some access attempts can be performed for systems of higher priority than a current system during the period of avoidance of one or more higher priority systems. | 09-01-2011 |
20110223910 | EFFICIENT CHANNEL SEARCH WITH SEQUENTIAL PROBABILITY RATIO TESTING - Methods and systems for cognitive radio channel searching are shown that include determining an upper threshold and a lower threshold that will find a free channel in a minimum average searching time based on a channel occupancy probability π0 and the number of channels K, constrained by a target acceptable misdetection probability and a target acceptable false alarm probability. The K channels are searched with a signaling device using the determined upper threshold and lower threshold to find a free channel. | 09-15-2011 |
20110223911 | EFFICIENT CHANNEL SEARCH WITH ENERGY DETECTION - Methods and systems for cognitive radio channel searching are shown that include determining an energy detection threshold and a number of samples that will find a free channel in a minimum searching time, based on a number of channels K and a channel occupancy probability π0, constrained by a target acceptable misdetection probability and a target acceptable false alarm probability. The search includes an energy detection threshold and a number of samples that will find a free channel in a minimum average searching time. The K channels are searched with a signaling device using the determined energy detection threshold and the determined number of samples to find a free channel. | 09-15-2011 |
20110230187 | COOPERATIVE SCANNING-BASED CELL RESELECTION METHOD AND SYSTEM IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A cell reselection method and system based on a cooperative scanning of the mobile relay station and mobile stations is provided for facilitating cell reselection procedure in a Broadband Wireless Access (BWA) system. The cooperative scanning method for a moving wireless network including a mobile relay station and at least one mobile station according to the present invention includes transmitting, at the moving wireless network, a scanning request with cooperative scanning duration to a serving base station; assigning, when a scanning response, neighbor base stations to the mobile relay station and at least one mobile station; scanning, at the mobile relay station and the at least mobile station, the assigned neighbor base stations; and transmitting scanning results to the serving BS station. | 09-22-2011 |
20110237251 | IDLE AND PAGING SUPPORT FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS WITH PRIVATE CELLS - Systems, apparatuses, and techniques for operating a wireless communication system with public and private paging groups. Systems, apparatuses, and techniques can include operating a base station to provide wireless service to mobile stations in a macrocell, the macrocell associated with a public paging group identifier and a private paging group identifier; assigning the private paging group identifier to one or more private cells that are spatially situated in at least a portion of the macrocell, the one or more private cells are operable by one or more base stations to restrict wireless access to specific wireless devices; and using wireless device access privileges associated with the one or more private cells for one or more wireless operations associated with the mobile stations, the wireless operations including paging and location update. | 09-29-2011 |
20110237252 | METHOD FOR MANAGING NEIGHBOR BASE STATION LIST BASED ON TERMINAL LOCATION FOR EFFICIENT CELL SELECTION AND HANDOFF IN MACROCELL ENVIRONMENTS WITH FEMTOCELL - In order to manage a neighbor list of neighboring base stations based on the location of a terminal communicating with a base station of a macrocell with femtocell deployments, the base station divides the macrocell in accordance with a predetermined standard of division, and generates a mobile neighbor advertisement message so as to periodically transmit the generated message to the terminal. At this time, the terminal identifies the current location thereof in the macrocell upon receipt of the pilot signals periodically transmitted from the base station of the macrocell. The terminal obtains information regarding the location of the terminal from the information regarding the femtocells deployed within the respective divided regions and information regarding macrocells neighboring the macrocell through using the mobile neighbor advertisement message to scan base stations. | 09-29-2011 |
20110250884 | METHOD AND A DEVICE FOR ENABLING A MOBILE TERMINAL TO ACCESS TO A WIRELESS CELLULAR TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK - The present invention concerns a method for enabling a mobile terminal to access to a wireless cellular telecommunication network. The method comprises the steps of: —detecting the reception of a message transferred by the mobile terminal to a base station ( | 10-13-2011 |
20110256867 | Method, User Equipment, and System for Network Selection - A method, user equipment (UE) and system relates to communications technologies, and in particular, to a network selection technology for a UE on a mobile communication network. The method includes obtaining a public land mobile network and closed subscriber group identity (PLMN/CSG ID) combination parameter of a network that covers a current location; querying an allowed CSG list according to the PLMN/CSG ID combination parameter; and selecting a network according to a query result. | 10-20-2011 |
20110263250 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING DYNAMIC INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS INFORMATION CHANNEL - Methods and apparatus for transmission of selected segments of information (such as system context information). In one embodiment, a cognitive pilot channel base station (CPC-BS) is disclosed that enables the distribution of context information to various user equipment and mobile devices in an efficient manner. The exemplary CPC-BS is also optionally capable of distributing sensing tasks to external entities, and compiling the data results from these distributed tasks for use in performing future CPC transmissions based e.g., on the operational mode of the system. On-demand provisioning of context information over both broadcast and peer-to-peer communications with served users is also disclosed. In addition to the distribution of context information via the use of a single CPC-BS, master-slave relationships between multiple CPC-BSs are also described, which permit for a distributed architecture in providing context information to served users. | 10-27-2011 |
20110263251 | SCANNING METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR WIRELESS NETWORKS - Scanning methods and systems for wireless networks are provided. In response to an operation, at least a waiting time corresponding to a wireless network scanning procedure is changed from a default time length to a predefined time length, and the wireless network scanning procedure is accordingly performed. When the wireless network scanning procedure is terminated, the waiting time is changed from the predefined time length back to the default time length. If a specific wireless access point detected in a second scanning operation is not detected in a first scanning operation, which is performed subsequent to the second scanning operation, an alive count corresponding to the specific wireless access point is subtracted by a predefined value. If the alive count does not equal to a specific value, the specific wireless access point and at least one wireless access point detected in the first scanning operation are displayed. | 10-27-2011 |
20110263252 | Apparatus and Method for Searching for and Reporting Public Land Mobile Networks "PLMNs" in a Mobile Telecommunications System - A method and apparatus for searching for and reporting Public Land Mobile Networks “PLMNs” in a mobile telecommunications system, the method comprising, at a mobile device: initiating a scan to find Public Land Mobile Networks; when a cell of a PLMN is detected on a frequency, then reading system information to determine one or more PLMN identities of the detected cell; determining whether the detected cell operates in a frequency band supported by the mobile device; when it is determined that the detected cell does not operate in a band supported by the device, omitting adding the associated one or more PLMN identities from a first of PLMNs,and otherwise adding the one or more PLMN identities to the list of PLMNs; and reporting the list of PLMNs. | 10-27-2011 |
20110263253 | CELLULAR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM WITH MOBILE CELLULAR DEVICE BATTERY SAVING FEATURES BASED UPON QUALITY OF SERVICE AND ACCESS DENIAL AND RELATED METHODS - A cellular communications system may include at least one base station selectively denying attempts to establish wireless communications links therewith, and wirelessly transmitting denial messages for denied attempts. The system may further include at least one mobile cellular communications device including a wireless transceiver and a controller cooperating therewith for attempting to establish a wireless communications link with the at least one base station having a quality of service (QoS) level associated therewith. If a denial message is received, the controller continues to attempt to establish the wireless communications link at a first attempt rate. Yet, if the wireless communications link cannot be established with the desired QoS level, and if no denial message is received, then the controller continues to attempt to establish the wireless communications link at a second attempt rate different than the first attempt rate. | 10-27-2011 |
20110269458 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SEARCHING ACCESSIBLE WIRELESS NETWORK IN SOFTWARE DEFINED RADIO TERMINAL - Provided is an apparatus for searching accessible wireless networks in a software-defined radio (SDR) terminal, a method thereof, and a computer-readable recording medium for storing a program executing the method. The apparatus includes: a hardware platform; a network search executable code storing means for storing a network search executable code having at least one of mode search executable codes; a search shape information storing unit for storing search shape information necessary for network search; a network search control means for arranging each of the mode search executable codes from the network search executable code storing means at the hardware platform by using the search shape information from the search shape information storing means and searching a network according to a search mode by executing the arranged mode search executable codes; and a network search result storing means for storing network search results from the network search control means. | 11-03-2011 |
20110269459 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING CELL FOR EXECUTING COMP IN MULTI-CELL ENVIRONMENT - The present invention provides a method which determines an adjacent cell to carry out a coordinate multipoint transmission (CoMP) operation instead of performing the CoMP operation for all adjacent cells, in cases where precoding matrix indexes (PMI) of adjacent cells are limited to prevent interferences by adjacent cells in a multi-cell environment, thereby effectively reducing inter-cell interferences without causing an overhead. | 11-03-2011 |
20110275370 | Handling Synchronization in an Uncoordinated Deployment - The present invention relates to methods, apparatuses, a system, and a computer program product for synchronizing to an uncoordinated access network. A new access device added to the access network is temporarily set into an over-the-air discover state and identification signals are broadcast from the new access device. Operating access devices are set into an discovery state in response to a detection of the identification signal, wherein their inter access device over-the-air transmission is stopped during the discovery state and an identity of the new access device is searched. | 11-10-2011 |
20110294503 | Method and Controller for Redirection of Active Users From an Umbrella Cell to Capacity Cells - A radio network controller of a wireless telecommunications network having an umbrella cell base station for an umbrella cell and capacity cell base stations for capacity cells within the umbrella cell includes a network interface from which a message is sent to the umbrella base station of the umbrella cell to search for capacity cells within the umbrella cell to redirect traffic of an AT from the umbrella cell to at least one of the capacity cells, and at which eligible capacity cells to which traffic of the AT can be redirected is received. The controller includes a processing unit which selects target capacity cells from the eligible capacity cells to which traffic of the AT will be redirected. A method for a radio network controller of a wireless telecommunications network having an umbrella cell base station for an umbrella cell and capacity cell base stations for capacity cells within the umbrella cell. | 12-01-2011 |
20110294504 | Radio communication device, radio communication method, and storage medium - A radio communication device includes a profile management unit configured to manage radio station profiles including identification information of radio stations and type information indicating whether the respective radio stations support voice communications; a receiving unit configured to receive a signal including the identification information from one of the radio stations; a first scanning unit configured to perform a scanning process on the radio stations supporting the voice communications to find a radio station to be connected; a second scanning unit configured to perform a scanning process on the radio stations not supporting the voice communications to find a radio station to be connected; and a scanning management unit configured to cause one or both of the first scanning unit and the second scanning unit to perform the scanning process according to the type information of the one of the radio stations that corresponds to the identification information in the received signal. | 12-01-2011 |
20110306340 | Cell Search and Measurement in Heterogeneous Networks - An extended cell search procedure enables more inclusive measurement reports by mobile terminals operating in a heterogeneous network. The mobile terminal may be configured to conduct an extended cell search to enable better detection of signals transmitted from weaker cells. For mobile terminal with extended cell search capabilities, the network sends an extended cell search message to the mobile terminal when there is a need for an extended cell search. In response to the extended cell search message, the mobile terminal uses an extended cell search procedure rather than the normal cell search procedure (as specified in Rel-8 of the LTE standard) when performing cell searches. | 12-15-2011 |
20110306341 | Technique for Determining a Cell-Identity - A technique for cell-identity detection is provided. In one method embodiment, at least one cell-identity in a cellular telecommunication network is determined. The method comprises the steps of receiving a synchronization signal, calculating first correlations and second correlations as well as determining the at least one cell-identity. The received synchronization signal includes a first partial signal and a second partial signal. The first correlations are calculated between the first partial signal and first reference signals, each of which indicates one or more first cell-identities. The second correlations are calculated between the second partial signal and second reference signals, each of which indicates one or more cell-identities out of the first cell-identities. The second reference signals are selected depending on the first correlations. The cell-identity is determined based on the second correlations. The complexity for cell-identity detection is reduced by the technique. | 12-15-2011 |
20110306342 | CELLULAR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PROVIDING MOBILE CELLULAR DEVICE BATTERY SAVING FEATURES WHILE ACCOMMODATING USER ACCESS REQUESTS AND RELATED METHODS - A cellular communications system may include at least one base station and at least one mobile cellular communications device. More particularly, the at least one mobile cellular communications device may include a controller, at least one user input device connected to the controller, and a wireless transceiver cooperating with the controller for attempting to establish a wireless communications link with at least one base station, and if the wireless communications link cannot be established, then continuing to attempt to establish the wireless communications link at a first attempt rate. Moreover, if a user provides a request to access the at least one base station via the at least one user input device, then the controller may continue to attempt to establish the wireless communications link based upon a second attempt rate greater than the first attempt rate. | 12-15-2011 |
20110312323 | METHOD OF LOCATING A RADIOCOMMUNICATION DEVICE, CORRESPONDING COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT, STORAGE MEANS AND RADIOCOMMUNICATION MODULE - A method is provided for locating a radiocommunication device in a radiocommunication network comprising a plurality of distinct geographical cells. The device comprises a radiocommunication module allowing reception of radiocommunication carriers. Each carrier is associated with a cell of the network and is defined by a frequency and a cell identifier. The module performs the following steps: obtaining initialization information comprising a predetermined list of N | 12-22-2011 |
20110319076 | EXPANDED CELL SEARCH AND SELECTION IN A MOBILE WIRELESS DEVICE - A method and apparatus for expanded cell search and selection in a mobile wireless device. The mobile device locates cells in a first of neighbor cells and in a second list of stored cells and evaluates located cells using suitability criteria. When locating a suitable first cell that uses a first radio access technology (RAT) in the first list, the first cell is selected. When locating a second suitable cell that uses a second RAT in the first list and not locating a suitable cell that uses the first RAT in the second list, the second cell is selected. When locating a third suitable cell that uses the second RAT in the first list and locating a fourth suitable cell that uses the first RAT in the second list, the fourth cell is selected when more suitable than the third cell. | 12-29-2011 |
20110319077 | METHOD FOR ADAPTIVE SCANNING IN A WIRELESS NETWORK AND A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method for scanning in a wireless network | 12-29-2011 |
20120009923 | FALLBACK OPERATION FOR CROSS-CARRIER SIGNALING IN MULTI-CARRIER OPERATION - Techniques for supporting fallback operation in a multi-carrier communication system are described. In one aspect, a UE may determine at least one first downlink control information (DCI) format to monitor on a first carrier. The UE may monitor for the first DCI format(s) on the first carrier to detect DCI sent to the UE. The UE may receive a reconfiguration message related to communication on a plurality of carriers by the UE with cross-carrier signaling, and may determine at least one second DCI format to monitor on the first carrier based on the reconfiguration message. The UE may monitor for the first DCI format(s) and the second DCI format(s) on the first carrier after receiving the reconfiguration message. | 01-12-2012 |
20120009924 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND METHOD FOR DISPLAYING WIRELESS DEVICES THEREOF - A mobile terminal including a wireless communication unit configured to wirelessly communicate with wireless devices to be connected with the mobile terminal, a display unit configured to display information about the wireless devices, an input unit configured to input search information including at least one of a distance range to search for the wireless devices and a type of the wireless devices, and a controller configured to control the wireless communication unit to search for the wireless devices based on the input search information and to control the display unit to display responding wireless devices that responded to the search by the wireless communication unit according to the input search information. | 01-12-2012 |
20120015649 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO SUPPORT BASE STATION DETECTION AND SELECTION IN MULTI-TIER WIRELESS NETWORKS - A subscriber station can efficiently determine an accessible base station by scanning a subset of base stations based on an optimized list received from a serving base station. The subscriber station includes a white list that contains information regarding a number of closed subscriber group (CSG) base stations to which the subscriber station is subscribed. The subscriber station can transmit a request message that includes one or more of: indication of whether the detected identifier of the femto base station is in the whitelist or not; and its location information. In response, the base station can send a message that includes the nearby femtocells and whether the femtocell is accessible or inaccessible to the subscriber station. The femto base station can be designed to be in transmission off mode when none of its subscribers is in its coverage. The serving base station can select a set of the accessible femtocells to the subscriber station, and request the selected femtocells to monitor an uplink signaling of the subscriber station so that the femtocell can be awaken when the femtocell is in transmission off mode or be aware that the subscriber station is in proximity, if the uplink signaling is detected. | 01-19-2012 |
20120015650 | FALLBACK BETWEEN RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGIES - A method for assigning a location area to a mobile device for use in circuit switched fallback from a first radio access network to a second radio access network. Two counters are implemented at the eNode B—a first counter to count the numbers of times a mobile reports a given last-used location area code and a second counter for counting the numbers of certain unique combinations of location area code and further identifying data. Whenever the eNode B receives a signal incorporating a location area code, checking the respective first counter for that code and conditionally incrementing the first counter such that if the first counter is below a predefined threshold the first counter is incremented. If the first counter is equal to the threshold, obtaining further identifying data in addition to the location area code and incrementing the corresponding second counter. | 01-19-2012 |
20120015651 | Efficient Searching for Communications Networks - Systems and methods are provided for adaptive control of scanning by a communications device, such as a mobile handset, for an available communication network based on a status of the communications device, user behavior, and signal status. A new time interval used for scanning for communications networks and access points is calculated responsive to a detected change in condition. | 01-19-2012 |
20120015652 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING CHANGES IN A CSG SUBSCRIPTION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided are a method and an apparatus for processing changes in a closed subscriber group (CSG) subscription in a wireless communication system. A non-access stratum (NAS) of a user equipment receives, from a network, an NAS message indicating that the CSG service to a CSG cell has expired. The NAS notifies the expiration of the CSG service to access stratum (AS), and the AS transmits the expiration of the CSG service to the CSG cell. | 01-19-2012 |
20120021742 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION OF SMALL BASE STATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method select a segment for providing identification information of a small base station (BS) in a wireless communication system. A signal quality of each of a plurality of segments is determined. When at least one segment is not used by a macro BS, a segment of the worst signal quality is selected among the at least one segment that is not used by a macro BS. And the identification information is transmitted using the selected segment. The selected segment represents a resource for transmitting the identification information. | 01-26-2012 |
20120028639 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING CELL SELECTION TO HOME CELL OR PRIVATE NETWORK IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for performing cell selection to a Home cell or a Private network in a mobile communication system are provided, in which a User Equipment (UE) determines a candidate cell by measuring a serving cell and neighbor cells, receives an indicator indicating a Home cell or a Private network in system information from the candidate cell, determines whether the candidate cell is included in a Home cell or Private network list set in the UE, and selects the candidate cell if the candidate cell is included in the Home cell or Private network list. | 02-02-2012 |
20120034917 | Method Of Frequency Search - In a User Equipment, frequency search is performed using the physical location (e.g. GPS position) and using information about the allocation of frequency bands and the radio access technologies used in these bands in different regions or countries. Hereby, frequency searching can be reduced to those bands and to the corresponding radio access technologies which are used in a current physical location. In order to ensure that UE is configured with the latest and most relevant regional frequency information, regional frequency information is transmitted to the UE over the air interface. In addition, information related to user's travel itinerary and user's travel history can be taken into account. By only frequency searching relevant frequency bands for the radio access technologies used in these bands battery power consumption can be reduced and frequency search speed can be improved. | 02-09-2012 |
20120040668 | SYSTEM AND METHOD TO OBTAIN SIGNAL ACQUISITION ASSISTANCE DATA - Signal acquisition assistance data is obtained for receiving devices such as wireless position assisted location devices seeking signals from any source, such as satellite vehicles and base stations. The data may be obtained from previously acquired data, based upon evaluation of changes in parameters such as time and location that may jeopardize validity. In some cases the data may be adjusted for the changes in parameters. Refined data may be calculated by a receiver using partial measurements of signal sets, particularly if the acquisition assistance data provided by a remote entity includes more distinct parameters than have typically been provided. New data need not be obtained until the validity of previous data expires due to limitations upon temporal extrapolation using Doppler coefficients, unless mobile station movement that cannot be compensated is detected, and jeopardizes validity of the previous data. | 02-16-2012 |
20120046032 | Arrangement and Method for Identifying PUCCH Format 3 Resources - The disclosure relates to a user equipment for a wireless communications system, and to a related method for identifying a resource to use for a transmission of control information on a physical uplink control channel, PUCCH, format 3. The method comprises receiving ( | 02-23-2012 |
20120058761 | METHOD FOR SYNCHRONIZING A MOBILE STATION TO A BASE STATION - The invention relates to a method for synchronizing a mobile station to a base station, comprising in the base station a act of generating an information about a frequency of a channel which is used to transmit data about the identity of the base station and a act of transmitting the information from the base station to the mobile station. | 03-08-2012 |
20120058762 | NETWORK SELECTION IN GAN ENVIRONMENT - In one embodiment, a scheme is provided for network discovery and selection by a user equipment (UE) device that is operable in wide area cellular network (WACN) bands as well as in wireless access network bands. In particular, the UE device is operable to select a WACN that is accessible via a wireless generic access network (GAN) in addition to being accessible via the cellular network band. | 03-08-2012 |
20120058763 | USER EQUIPMENT AND ACCESS METHOD THEREOF - In the field of wireless network communications, in order to solve a problem in the prior art that a user equipment (UE) cannot be handed over in time between a mobile access point (AP) and a fixed access point, a UE and an access method thereof are provided. The method includes the following steps. A relative speed between a UE and each access point is calculated. The access point is selected to establish a communication connection if the relative speed between the UE and the access point is smaller than a threshold speed. Therefore, a beneficial effect that the UE can be handed over in time between the mobile access point and the fixed access point is achieved. | 03-08-2012 |
20120064889 | Method of Handling Manual Closed Subscriber Group Selection and Related Communication Device - A method of handling manual closed subscriber group (CSG) selection for a mobile device in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises storing a public land mobile network (PLMN) basis setting for indicating the mobile device to display all available CSG identities or only CSG identities present in an operator controlled list of allowed CSG identities, in a Subscriber Identity Module (SIM), an Universal Subscriber Identity Module (USIM) or a memory of the mobile device; and displaying CSG identities according to the PLMN basis setting during the manual CSG selection. | 03-15-2012 |
20120064890 | INTEGRATED TERMINAL USING SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATING METHOD THEREOF - Provided is a method for efficiently performing a communication operation using supplementary information. A communication method in an integrated terminal which communicates through communication modems corresponding to base stations of various communication systems includes reading a communication network information file which is updated and is included in the integrated terminal and performing the communication operation based on the read communication network information file. | 03-15-2012 |
20120071160 | REFINING FEMTOCELL COVERAGE INFORMATION WITH BEACON TRANSMITTERS - Systems, methods, devices, and computer program products are described for refinement of femtocell coverage area information in a wireless communication system, particularly in context of a femto-proxy architecture. Zones may be defined within a femtocell coverage area using beacon sources, and a zone map of zone signatures may be defined for each zone of the femtocell coverage area, according to macro signatures detected in those zones. The zone map can be used, by access terminals, the femto-proxy system, and/or the macro network, to provide functionality, including reduced power level femtocell discovery and association, enhanced network planning, improved femtocell troubleshooting, etc. | 03-22-2012 |
20120071161 | BAND MASKING OF SELF ORGANIZING CELLULAR NETWORKS - This invention addresses a method of whereby a cellular base station can scan the radio band to identify radio channels that are not in use, then claim those un-used radio channels for use to transmit and receive radio signals. A plurality of such radio base station could then comprise a cellular radio network, which channel planning and frequency re-use has become autonomous and self organizing. The present disclosure aims to further expand the utility and function of such self organizing cellular networks by including a user interface to the base station by which the operator can define the radio spectrum boundaries that the base station is authorized to operate within and to further set operational rules for the use of sub-sections of that defined spectral boundary. | 03-22-2012 |
20120071162 | ENTERPRISE LOCATION DISCOVERY IN DUAL-MODE PHONES - As dual-mode phones move within a wireless network, they track which cell tower they are associated with, reporting this information to a mobility controller. The mobility controller builds a list of cell tower identifiers which are associated with the wireless coverage, and makes this list available to subscribing dual-mode phones. Subscribing dual-mode phones can use this list to scan for network availability when they are associated with a cell tower which is on the list. | 03-22-2012 |
20120077491 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SCANNING AMONGST TWO-WAY RADIOS - A method and apparatus for scanning amongst two-way radios is disclosed. The method includes applying a scan probability index (SPI) to each member of a scan list, the SPI indicating a likelihood of channel activity. The SPI is dynamically updated by a variety of processes. Members are loaded from the scan list, and the SPI of the loaded member is compared to a threshold. Members are skipped or checked for activity based on the SPI passing or failing the threshold. Members having a sufficient SPI will proceed to have detected channel activity decoded. The method and apparatus may utilize both normal scan members and vote scan member frequencies. | 03-29-2012 |
20120077492 | METHOD FOR CATEGORIZATION OF MULTIPLE PROVIDERS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SERVICE ENVIRONMENT - A communication device locates a preferable wireless service provider in a multi-service provider environment using a frequency band search schedule. Initially, the communications device registers with a less preferred service provider in a first frequency band. While remaining registered with the less preferred service provider, the device examines several frequency bands in the order specified by the frequency band search schedule. A frequency band is examined by dividing the frequency band into many sub-bands, and by locating the strongest signal above a threshold within the sub-band being examined. The examination continues until a second frequency band having a more preferred service provider is located. The communication device then registers with the more preferred service provider. The category of service provider may be identified and displayed on the communication device. | 03-29-2012 |
20120083268 | Method of Enhancing Public Land Mobile Network Search and Related Communication Device - A method of enhancing public land mobile network (PLMN) search for a mobile device in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises deriving a mobile country code (MCC) for identifying a visited country when the mobile device is switched on, powered up, into flight mode off, or coming back from no service area, and performing the PLMN search excluding for at least a PLMN, whose MCC is not the same as the derived MCC, according to a PLMN search list stored in the mobile device. | 04-05-2012 |
20120083269 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - Provided is a radio communication system which enables optimal cell switching. A broker femtocell base station is installed in an entrance of the buildings, and sub-femtocell base stations are installed in the buildings. An adjacent cell list and broker femtocell priority selection setting information are set as system information notified from a macro cell, the adjacent cell list including a broker PSC of the broker femtocell base station and PSCs of adjacent macro cells, the broker femtocell priority selection setting information being the information for preferentially selecting the broker femtocell base station. An adjacent cell list and sub-femtocell priority selection setting information are set as system information of the broker femtocell, the adjacent cell list including a PSC of a macro cell, and a sub PSC, of an adjacent femtocell, the sub-femtocell priority selection setting information being the information for preferentially selecting the sub-femtocell base station. | 04-05-2012 |
20120088503 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING NETWORK SCANNING USING BLACK-LIST NETWORK INFORMATION - An apparatus and method is provided for making use of black-list network information to make scanning more efficient in multi-mode mobile devices. When performing a scan for a network, if a network that is blacklisted is found, scanning is discontinued for any network that has the same radio access technology as the network that was found. Thus, excessive scanning that can be costly for the mobile device in terms of battery life and responsiveness to provide service, is avoided. | 04-12-2012 |
20120088504 | CALL CONTROL SYSTEM AND CALL CONTROL METHOD - A call control system performs call control for a terminal which accesses different radio access network systems. A communication exchange processing apparatus includes: a device storing maximum bandwidth for specified calls processed in the radio access network system; a device measuring present bandwidth for specified calls presently processed in the radio access network system; a device computing a ratio of the present bandwidth to the maximum bandwidth for specified calls; and a device sending specified call band ratio information indicating the ratio of present bandwidth to maximum bandwidth for specified calls to a radio network control apparatus in the radio access network system and connected to the present communication exchange processing apparatus. The radio network control apparatus provided in the radio access network system includes a device sending the specified call band ratio information to a terminal which is connected to the present radio network control apparatus by radio communication. | 04-12-2012 |
20120088505 | BASE STATION CONTROLLER AND MOBILE TERMINAL - An HeNB-GW ( | 04-12-2012 |
20120094660 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING ENHANCED INTERFERENCE MANAGEMENT AT RESTRICTED ACCESS POINTS - Methods and apparatuses are provided that facilitate providing access point measurements to restricted access points. Restricted access points can lessen restrictions to allow devices to register with the restricted access point for providing measurements thereto. Additionally or alternatively, access point measurements can be provided to a minimization of drive tests (MDT) server for providing to the restricted access points. Thus, restricted access points can obtain the access point measurements for performing enhanced interference management or other functionality based at least in part on the measurements. | 04-19-2012 |
20120094661 | Controlling Energy Consumption of a Wireless Network Node - An arrangement for controlling energy consumption of a network node associated with a cell includes a terminal activity monitor ( | 04-19-2012 |
20120094662 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING MOBILE STATION'S SCANNING OPERATION AND BASE STATION PERFORMING THE SAME - A Base Station (BS) and method of the BS for controlling a scanning process of a mobile station are provided The method of the base station for controlling a scanning process of a mobile station includes receiving, at the base station, a scan request issued in association with the mobile station, determining whether the mobile station has a scan in progress by referencing a scan record table, transmitting a scan response to the mobile station, and recording a scanning status of the mobile station in the scan record table. The method and base station for controlling the scanning process of a mobile station is advantageous to avoid the collision of scanning processes. | 04-19-2012 |
20120094663 | PROXIMITY DETECTION FOR FEMTOCELLS USING OUT-OF-BAND LINKS - Systems, methods, devices, and computer program products are described for supporting macrocell-to-femtocell hand-ins of active macrocell communications for a mobile device. A mobile device may perform an out-of-band (OOB) search for the femtocell, the OOB search triggered by a proximity detection configuration command from the macrocell. The mobile device may wirelessly communicate with a located femtocell via an OOB link, and receive femtocell information from the femtocell via the OOB link. The mobile device may transmit the received femtocell information to the macrocell. The macrocell may generate instruction for a mobile device search based on the femtocell information. The macrocell may transmit such instructions to the mobile device for an in-band search for the femtocell. | 04-19-2012 |
20120094664 | METHOD OF SCANNING NEIGHBOR BASE STATION IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a broadband wireless access system, and more particularly, to a method for a mobile station to efficiently scan a neighbor base station and apparatus therefor. According to one embodiment of the present invention, in a broadband wireless access system, a method of performing a scan, which is performed by a mobile station to scan a neighbor base station, includes the steps of receiving a scan response (AAI_SCN-RSP) message including a first interval information indicating an interval for the mobile station to receive a preamble of the neighbor base station from a serving base station and receiving the preamble from the neighbor base station in the first interval. Preferably, the first interval is set by a subframe unit. | 04-19-2012 |
20120108236 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ASSIGNING A CELL TO A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND CORRESPONDING APPARATUS - A method and device for assigning a cell to a wireless communication apparatus, and corresponding apparatus is provided. The method for assigning a cell to a wireless communication apparatus is performed when the wireless communication device leaves a standby mode so as to send a request for access to a desired service belonging to a class of services. The method may include elaborating, for each cell and for each class of service supported by the cell, an index relating to the loading rate of the class of services within the cell. The communication apparatus may then receive the loading rate indices of the cells liable to be assigned to the communication apparatus. The communication device then may select, from among the cells liable to be assigned to the communication apparatus, the cell to which the communication apparatus is assigned, at least, as a function of the loading rate indices. | 05-03-2012 |
20120115467 | METHOD FOR MANAGING THE OPERATION OF A RADIO ACCESS POINT OF AN ACCESS NETWORK INFRASTRUCTURE OF A RADIO COMMUNICATION NETWORK - In a radio communication network access network infrastructure, comprising first and second access points into the access network infrastructure which are both capable of communicating over a radio interface with a user equipment, wherein the radio coverage of the first access point is at least partially included in the radio coverage of the second access point, and wherein the first access point is capable of operating in an operating mode wherein it does not transmit a pilot signal, the first access point synchronizes itself with the second access point during reception, and switches to the operating mode wherein it does not transmit a pilot signal. | 05-10-2012 |
20120115468 | TECHNIQUE FOR ANCHOR CARRIER SELECTION IN A TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present disclosure relates to a technique for avoiding, forestalling, or reducing re-establishment procedures in a telecommunications system having multiple carriers. A method aspect of this technique includes monitoring a signal quality of an anchor component carrier associated with a serving cell of a mobile terminal and used by the mobile terminal. If the signal quality of the anchor component carrier violates a first signal quality condition, then a parameter (of, e.g., a downlink signal) of at least one candidate component carrier associated with the serving cell and distinct from the anchor component carrier is measured and the signal quality of the at least one candidate component carrier is determined based on the measured parameter. If the determined signal quality fulfils a second signal quality condition, then reselection to the at least one candidate component carrier is initiated such that the candidate component carrier becomes the anchor component carrier associated with the serving cell and used by the mobile terminal. | 05-10-2012 |
20120115469 | Method for UE pattern indication and measurement for interference coordination - A method of inter-cell interference coordination is provided for UE measurements and network access procedure. In a first embodiment, a UE in idle mode performs measurements on received radio signals applying a simplified radio resource restriction for interference coordination. The UE determines the restricted radio resource without receiving explicit measurement configuration. In a second embodiment, during various phases of a network access procedure, the UE indicates its interference status and/or additional interference information to its serving base station to enhance interference coordination. In a third embodiment, the UE in connected mode performs measurements on both interference-protected transmission resources and non-interference-protected transmission resources. The UE measurement results are used for scheduling, radio link monitoring, and/or mobility management to increase radio spectrum efficiency and to improve user experience. | 05-10-2012 |
20120115470 | SELECTING FROM AMONG PLURAL CHANNEL ESTIMATION TECHNIQUES - A wireless receiver receives reference signals over a wireless link. The wireless receiver calculates a selection indication based on the received reference signals, and the wireless receiver selects from among plural channel estimation techniques based on the selection indication, where the selected channel estimation technique is usable to perform channel estimation of the wireless link. | 05-10-2012 |
20120122452 | MOTION-BASED KINETIC FINGERPRINT RADIO SELECTION - Systems and techniques for motion adaptive wireless user equipment (UE) in a wireless network are disclosed. These techniques can leverage kinetic information to select a preferred radio (or radio technology) or adapt a reselection scanning interval. This can serve to improve the performance of a UE by reducing the amount of power expended in maintaining an adequate level of connectedness to the wireless network components in the face of UE movement. In a further aspect, kinetic power generators can be employed as a source of UE transit data. Kinetic fingerprints can be compared to UE transit data, e.g., that acquired from a kinetic generator of the UE, to facilitate selection of preferred radios and reselection intervals. In this aspect, radio selection schema and reselection scanning schema can effectively be selected with little to no drain on a UE power source. | 05-17-2012 |
20120122453 | CELL SEARCHER OF MOBILE TERMINAL AND NEIGHBOR CELL SEARCHING METHOD THEREOF - Provided are a cell searcher for handover of a mobile terminal and a neighbor cell searching method thereof. The neighbor cell searching method includes: after searching a home cell, determining whether a Primary Synchronization Signal (PSS) code of the home cell is identical to that of a neighbor cell; when the PPS code of the home cell is identical to that of the neighbor cell, cancelling a PSS symbol of the home cell from a received signal in a time domain; and searching a neighbor cell from the received signal cancelled the PSS symbol of the home cell. | 05-17-2012 |
20120129521 | Association Level Indication to Neighboring Base Stations - It is described a method of sending an association level indication to neighboring base stations by a serving base station to indicate to the neighbor base station to report a particular ranging parameter set corresponding to the association level indication for a user equipment requesting scanning of neighbor base stations. According to an embodiment, the ranging parameters of the ranging parameter set are provided to the user equipment in single message or are provided in two or more messages, e.g. in the case of network assisted association reporting. | 05-24-2012 |
20120129522 | METHOD OF COMMUNICATING DATA BASED ON AN UNLICENSED BAND IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for communicating data based on an unlicensed band in a wireless communication system comprising a first type network entity and a second type network entity which is different. The first type network entity comprises a cellular base station and the second type network entity comprises a Femto-cell base station. In the method, a cellular base station identifies at least one Femto-cell base station incurring interference and instructs the identified base station to operate on an unlicensed band. The technical features can be used to improve the performance of the wireless network, and/or to reduce the effect of interference. | 05-24-2012 |
20120129523 | METHOD OF DETERMINING AN ACCESS MODE OF CELL IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system and UE providing wireless communication services, and a method of determining the operation mode of a base station, that is, the connection mode (access mode) of a cell, based on which UE's connection is allowed by a base station in an evolved Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) that has evolved from a Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) or a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, and it may be an object of the present invention to provide a process of determining the connection mode of a cell by checking the existence of a subscriber group identity if it is determined that the connection mode of a cell is not allowed for one or more UEs belonging to a particular subscriber group. | 05-24-2012 |
20120135729 | Apparatus and Method for Competitor Network Monitoring - A method and an apparatus for competitor network monitoring, which enables mobile operators to learn about other networks' RF performance, including signal strength, interference, etc. This method changes the normal mobile phone behaviors to utilize its spectrum scan capability to scan competitor networks' RF situation at the mobile phones' idle time slots, i.e. those time slots it does not need to listen to its own network. Associated these collected competitor networks' RF performance data with the location where these data are collected by the means the implementers preferred and gathered the associated competitor network data and correspondent location information at the server, mobile operators can utilize these gathered competitor networks data and compare with their own network to learn about where they have better or worse performance as indication for their own network improvement tasks. | 05-31-2012 |
20120135730 | CELL RE-SELECTION IN A CELLULAR TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - According to an aspect of the present invention, there is provided a method in a wireless cellular telecommunications device camped on a serving cell, the device storing a parameter obtained from a first cell. The method comprising: measuring an attribute of a signal received from a candidate cell; and, evaluating the candidate cell for re-selection. If a carrier frequency of the candidate cell matches a carrier frequency of the first cell, the evaluation of the candidate cell for re-selection is based on at least the measured attribute and the stored parameter, else the evaluation of the candidate cell for re-selection is performed without using the stored parameter. A device and computer readable medium are also provided. | 05-31-2012 |
20120135731 | CELL RE-SELECTION IN A CELLULAR TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A wireless cellular telecommunications device stores a first parameter obtained from system information of a first cell and measures an attribute of a signal received from a candidate cell, determines if the candidate cell is a closed subscriber group cell, and evaluates the candidate cell for re-selection. If the candidate cell is determined to be a closed subscriber group cell, the evaluation of the candidate cell for re-selection is based on at least the measured attribute irrespective of the first stored parameter, that first stored parameter indicating a minimum value for the measured attribute. | 05-31-2012 |
20120135732 | CELL RE-SELECTION IN A CELLULAR TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - According to an aspect of the present disclosure, there may be provided a method in a wireless cellular telecommunications device camped on a serving cell, the device storing a parameter obtained by decoding system information of a first cell. The method comprises: measuring an attribute of a signal received from a candidate cell; and, evaluating the candidate cell for re-selection based on the measured attribute according to a priority-based re-selection algorithm irrespective of the stored parameter. The parameter indicates a minimum required received signal code power. A device and computer readable medium are also provided. | 05-31-2012 |
20120142345 | COOPERATIVE COMMUNICATION METHODS AND A DEVICE FOR A TARGET TERMINAL AND A COOPERATIVE TERMINAL - Provided is a cooperative communication technology of a target terminal and a cooperative terminal. In an environment in which interference exists between cells, cooperation between terminals may be performed in order to improve quality of signals that are received from a base station. | 06-07-2012 |
20120157095 | CLOSED SUBSCRIBER GROUP (CSG) HANDLING FOR SUPPORTING NETWORK SHARING OF HOME BASE STATIONS - A system and method for enhanced support for handling of Closed Subscriber Groups (CSGs) and sharing of Radio Access Network (RAN) for home base stations and other small cells. An enhanced System Information (SI) structure indicates multiple CSG IDs and CSG Indications, thereby making it possible to support different CSG IDs and CSG Indications for every Public Land Mobile Network Identity (PLMN-ID) and also to support a PLMN-ID with multiple associated CSG IDs and CSG Indications. The enhanced SI makes it possible to have different CSG IDs for different operators, to have multiple CSG IDs for one operator (i.e., a single PLMN), and to selectively use the CSG concept for some PLMNs (as given by their respective CSG Indications), but not for all. A network of base stations (e.g., a RAN) thus can be effectively shared by multiple operators, leading to better cellular coverage, peak rates, and capacity. | 06-21-2012 |
20120157096 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SEARCHING FEMTOCELL ACCESS POINTS - A method of searching a femtocell access point includes: transmitting configuration/measurement information an operating frequency and a transmission power strength from multiple femtocell access points located within the macro cell to an OSM)/CPC server; and receiving, at the OSM/CPC server, the configuration/measurement information from the femtocell access points, and generating a femtocell access point list usable in a mobile terminal to provide the generated femtocell access point list to the mobile terminal. The method further includes selecting, at the mobile terminal, one femtocell access point from the femtocell access point list provided from the OSM/CPC server and accessing the selected femtocell access point. | 06-21-2012 |
20120172038 | METHOD FOR CONFIGURATION CELL BY MULTI MODE TERMINAL AND METHOD FOR OPTIMIZATION CELL BY MULTI MODE TERMINAL - A method of configuring a cell of a terminal includes: transmitting, by the terminal, when the terminal searches for an idle band, a downlink frame; performing a network entry procedure with other terminals at 1 hop from the terminal; and optimizing, by the terminal, transmission power. | 07-05-2012 |
20120178444 | COMMUNICATION METHOD, ACCESS NETWORK DEVICE, AND COMMUNICATION DEVICE USING THE SAME AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication method, an access network device and a communication device using the same method, and a communication system are proposed. According to an embodiment, the communication method can include following step. An access network device determines whether there is any femto cell within the coverage area thereof. when there is at least one femto cell within the coverage area thereof, the access network device obtains femto cell information of the at least one femto cell; and delivers the femto cell information to at least one terminal device within the coverage area thereof, where the femto cell information includes an indication of the at least one femto cell, at least one femto cell identifier and at least one carrier frequency of the at least one femto cell. | 07-12-2012 |
20120178445 | Discontinuous Reception for Multi-Component Carrier System - A method includes operating a user equipment to initiate monitoring of a control channel associated with a particular component carrier for determining if the user equipment is scheduled by the control channel associated with the particular component carrier. In response to determining that the user equipment is not scheduled, autonomously terminating the monitoring of the control channel associated with the particular component carrier. A further method includes establishing a set of rules defining how and when a user equipment autonomously deactivates use of component carriers transmitted by a network access node. The network access node assumes, in response to the network access node not scheduling the user equipment in a control channel of a particular component carrier for some period, that the user equipment has autonomously deactivated monitoring of the control channel of the particular component carrier Various apparatus and computer programs are also disclosed that operate in accordance with the methods. | 07-12-2012 |
20120178446 | SCANNING NEIGHBORING BASE STATIONS IN WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - A method of scanning neighboring base stations for measuring channel quality in a wireless communication system includes receiving information associated with at least one neighboring base station; transmitting a scanning request message including parameters related to a requested scan duration, a requested interleaving interval and a requested scan iteration; and receiving a scanning response message in response to the scanning request message, the scanning response message including parameters related to an allowed scan duration, an allowed interleaving interval, a scan report mode, and an allowed scan iteration, wherein the scan report mode, which indicates a channel quality measurement reporting method, is set to ‘00’ when the scan report mode indicates no report, set to ‘01’ when the scan report mode indicates a periodic report, and set to ‘10’ when the scan report mode indicates a event-triggered report. | 07-12-2012 |
20120184272 | CELLULAR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PROVIDING MOBILE CELLULAR DEVICE BATTERY SAVING FEATURES WHILE ACCOMMODATING USER ACCESS REQUESTS AND RELATED METHODS - A cellular communications system may include at least one base station and at least one mobile cellular communications device. More particularly, the at least one mobile cellular communications device may include a controller, at least one user input device connected to the controller, and a wireless transceiver cooperating with the controller for attempting to establish a wireless communications link with at least one base station, and if the wireless communications link cannot be established, then continuing to attempt to establish the wireless communications link at a first attempt rate. Moreover, if a user provides a request to access the at least one base station via the at least one user input device, then the controller may continue to attempt to establish the wireless communications link based upon a second attempt rate greater than the first attempt rate. | 07-19-2012 |
20120190361 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SEARCHING AND SELECTING A PUBLIC LAND MOBILE NETWORK IN A MULTIPLE RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY ENVIRONMENT - A method and device for manual searching and selecting a Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN) in one or more Radio Access Technologies (RATs) is provided, and includes receiving a request from a user of the UE to manually search for a desired PLMN, and performing a manual search for the desired PLMN in one or more RATs supported by the UE based on the request, detecting one or more PLMNs available associated with the one or more RATs during the ongoing manual search, and displaying a list of PLMNs including the one or more available PLMNs associated with the one or more RATs on a display of the UE when the manual search is being performed, where the displayed PLMNs includes the desired PLMN. | 07-26-2012 |
20120196593 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING A CHANNEL STATE WHEN RECEIVING SYSTEM INFORMATION ON A NEIGHBORING CELL IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method for receiving system information on a neighboring cell by means of a terminal in a wireless communication system, the method comprising the steps of receiving a system information read command for a neighboring cell from a serving cell over a certain period of time; ending communication with the serving cell, and reading system information from the adjacent cell; and relaying the system information to the serving cell after the certain period of time elapses, wherein a reference signal from the adjacent cell is received over the certain period of time to measure a channel state value. If the channel state value is reduced to a preset value or less, a further step may comprise ending the reading of the system information. | 08-02-2012 |
20120202489 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ESTABLISHING CELL RESELECTION LIST - The embodiments of the present invention disclose a method for establishing a cell reselection list is provided. A network and a terminal establish frequency indexes for the cell reselection list, so that when a network side delivers an RAT and frequency priority information, the priority information may be delivered according to frequency indexes in a frequency list, thus implementing cell reselection that is based on the priority for the terminal. | 08-09-2012 |
20120202490 | Method and Apparatus for Determining a Time Interval at an Access Node for Radio Measurements - A method includes determining at least one time interval for an access node of a group of neighboring access nodes. The at least one time interval is one in which said access node has substantially no transmission and one or more other access nodes of said group transmit. The method further includes performing, by said access node, radio measurements in said at least one determined time interval of said one or more other access nodes of said group which transmit and configuring radio resources in dependence on said radio measurements. | 08-09-2012 |
20120208534 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF DECREASING TIME TO BEGIN ACQUISITION OF CELLULAR NETWORKS AFTER POWER UP - In the system-selection solution used in wireless devices, system selection files may be read from a Universal Integrated Circuit Card (UICC) and converted into a priority list. The priority list may specify the relative priority of 3GPP and 3GPP2 systems and govern system selection by a device. Traditionally, generation of the priority list may be performed at every power up of the device. However, the reading of the system selection files from the UICC and generation of the priority list may take a period of time which may affect the performance of the device. For certain aspects of the present disclosure, the priority list may be generated after power up only when system selection files change. Therefore, the time for acquiring a wireless network upon the power up of a device may be reduced, particularly when system selection files remain the same as before. | 08-16-2012 |
20120208535 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTELLIGENTLY REPORTING NEIGHBOR INFORMATION TO FACILITATE AUTOMATIC NEIGHBOR RELATIONS - A method, apparatus and computer program product are provided for supplying information regarding a neighbor cell following cell reselection in a manner that reduces the signaling load on the network and conserves battery consumption by a mobile terminal. In this regard, the method, apparatus and computer program product do not blindly provide information regarding a neighbor cell that the current cell has already collected, but, instead, first determines if the neighbor information regarding a prior cell is different than and therefore will add to the information regarding neighbor cells that is already maintained by the current cell. Only after making such a determination may a mobile terminal signal the current cell as to the availability of neighbor information regarding a prior cell. | 08-16-2012 |
20120208536 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING CELL RESELECTION IN PORTABLE TERMINAL - An apparatus and method for ascertaining a movement pattern of a user who moves on a fixed path, predicting a destination cell on the movement of the user, and preventing a cell reselection process to an unnecessary intermediate cell. The apparatus includes a pattern management unit configured to analyze movement of a user and ascertain a movement pattern of the user. The apparatus also includes a memory configured to store the movement pattern of the user, which is ascertained by the pattern management unit. The apparatus also includes a controller configured to ascertain information about a destination cell and information about an intermediate cell through which the user passes before moving to the destination cell using the movement pattern of the user and a current movement path of the portable terminal. The apparatus also includes a cell reselection unit for performing a cell reselection process to the destination cell. | 08-16-2012 |
20120214483 | LONG TERM EVOLUTION TO UNIVERSAL MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM FEMTO MOBILITY - A system and methodology that resolves complex mobility handling issues in Long Term evolution (LTE) networks, overlaid with Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) macro and UMTS femtocells that share a common UMTS Absolute Radio Frequency Number (UARFCN), is provided. Moreover, an LTE user equipment (UE) includes a femto identification component that differentiates between the UMTS macro and UMTS femtocells by employing Location Area Code (LAC) data. In an aspect, the femto identification component ensures that the LTE UE connects to the UMTS femtocell as soon as the LTE UE enters the UMTS femtocell coverage area, even when the LTE radio frequency (RF) signal is deemed sufficient for communication. Further, the femto identification component ensures that the LTE UE stays connected to the LTE network, as long as possible, while outside of the UMTS femtocell coverage area. | 08-23-2012 |
20120214484 | Method and Apparatus for Scanning Sectors in Order of Distance from Mobile Station - A mobile station will sort wireless coverage sectors in order of distance of the sectors from the mobile station, and the mobile station will then scan for pilot signals from the sectors in the sorted order. The invention can be applied advantageously to provide an order of scanning remaining set sectors in a mobile station operating according to a code division multiple access protocol. | 08-23-2012 |
20120220294 | SYSTEM AND METHOD TO OBTAIN SIGNAL ACQUISITION ASSISTANCE DATA - Signal acquisition assistance data is obtained for receiving devices such as wireless position assisted location devices seeking signals from any source, such as satellite vehicles and base stations. The data may be obtained from previously acquired data, based upon evaluation of changes in parameters such as time and location that may jeopardize validity. In some cases the data may be adjusted for the changes in parameters. Refined data may be calculated by a receiver using partial measurements of signal sets, particularly if the acquisition assistance data provided by a remote entity includes more distinct parameters than have typically been provided. New data need not be obtained until the validity of previous data expires due to limitations upon temporal extrapolation using Doppler coefficients, unless mobile station movement that cannot be compensated is detected, and jeopardizes validity of the previous data. | 08-30-2012 |
20120220295 | METHODS FOR GENERATING RADIO FREQUENCY MAPS OF NETWORKS - At least one example embodiment discloses a method of generating a radio frequency (RF) map of a network. The method includes obtaining, by a controller, received signal strengths of at least one user equipment (UE) in a first technology network, determining, by the controller, a back projection of a second technology network based on the received signal strengths, and generating, by the controller, an RF map of the second technology network based on the determining. The back projection represents an attenuation function of a coverage area of the second technology network and the RF map illustrates the attenuation function of the coverage area of second technology network. | 08-30-2012 |
20120225649 | SYSTEM FOR BETTER SERVICE RESELECTION WHEN ON OTHER THAN THE MOST PREFERRED SYSTEM - System for better service reselection when on other than the Most Preferred system. In various aspects, methods and corresponding apparatus are provided for a service reselection system that operates on a device to provide better service reselection during idle mode, origination mode and active traffic mode. A method includes detecting entry into slotted mode operation on a Less Preferred system, waiting for page monitoring to complete at selected slot cycle wakeup times, performing a service reselection scan at the selected slot cycle wakeup times to find More Preferred systems, wherein the service reselection scan is performed after the page monitoring has completed, and limiting a time duration of the service reselection scan so as to avoid interference with the page monitoring to be performed at slot cycle wakeup times that follow the selected slot cycle wakeup times. | 09-06-2012 |
20120225650 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING RELAY STATION MODE OF MOBILE STATION IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for a Mobile Station (MS) to control a Relay Station (RS) mode of the MS in a communication system are provided. The method includes sensing a link loss with a serving Base Station (BS), searching for a neighbor BS for network reentry, transmitting to the neighbor BS an Identifier (ID) of the serving BS and an indication indicating network reentry from coverage loss caused by movement out of a service area of the serving BS are, and operating in the RS mode, upon receipt of an indication commanding switch to the RS mode from the neighbor BS, wherein the RS mode is a mode in which the MS operates as an RS. | 09-06-2012 |
20120231790 | Cell Search Procedure for Heterogeneous Networks - In a heterogeneous network, low power cells are detected by correlating a first and second signal originating from an unknown cell, such as synchronization signals, e.g., SSS received in a first and second time period (e.g., subframes 0 and 5 of a frame with corresponding sets of possible SSS signals. The cell identities for the candidate cells can be used to determine corresponding reference symbol sequences for the candidate cells. The final determination of the cell identity is then made by correlating a third signal originating from the unknown cell, such as a reference signal received in a third time period (e.g., an almost blank subframe or a broadcast subframe) with the set of reference signals for the candidate cells. The correct cell identity is determined to be the cell identity yielding the greatest correlation with its corresponding reference signal. | 09-13-2012 |
20120231791 | NETWORK LISTENING METHOD OF A MOBILE PHONE - A network listening method of a mobile phone is provided. The mobile phone includes a code division multiple access (CDMA) chip and two user identity module (UIM) cards. The network listening method executes a first network listening method to listen to a communication network, if a listening frequency of the first UIM card equals a listening frequency of the second UIM card and the listening channel of first UIM card equals the listening channel of the second UIM card. The network listening method further executes a second network listening method to listen to the communication network, if the listening frequency of the first UIM card does not equal the listening frequency of the second UIM card and/or the listening channel of first UIM card does not equal the listening channel of second UIM card. | 09-13-2012 |
20120238267 | MULTIPLE STAGE HYBRID SPECTRUM SENSING METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR COGNITIVE RADIO - Systems and methods for detecting unused channels in a cognitive radio system are described. In one method, data is communicated on a particular channel for a secondary receiver. In addition, a set of channels is iteratively scanned by collecting samples for each channel and for each iteration of the scanning. Here, iterations of the scanning progressively removes channels from the set of channels based on the collected samples and updates states of the channels in the set based on the collected samples to obtain a set of candidate channels. In response to detecting a pre-determined condition, communications on the particular channel are precluded and at least one of the candidate channels is evaluated by collecting additional samples on each of the channels. Further, at least one of the candidate channels is selected based on the evaluation for utilization by the one or more secondary receivers for data communication. | 09-20-2012 |
20120244860 | SELECTIVE CONTROL OF A WIRELESS SERVICE ASSOCIATED WITH A MOBILE DEVICE - A mobile communication system includes a network listener base station associated with a vehicle configured to scan an environment within the mobile communication system and a second base station associated with the vehicle. The second base station includes an antenna associated therewith to generate a signal that is stronger than a wireless signal of a cell site associated with a wireless service to a mobile device within the vehicle. The mobile communication system also includes a base station controller to identify the mobile device when the mobile device is within the controlled area, to determine that the mobile device is within the controlled area, and to gain control of an access of wireless communication associated with the mobile device when the mobile device is within the controlled area through the generation of the stronger signal of the second antenna. | 09-27-2012 |
20120252446 | Fast Radio Access Technology Detection for Cell Search - Methods and apparatus are provided for detecting the radio access technology (RAT) employed in a received signal prior to performing a cell search. The RAT detection method may be used to identify the most likely RAT employed for each candidate frequency identified in an initial frequency scan. Once the most likely RAT is identified, the mobile communication device can then attempt synchronization according to the procedures for the most likely RAT. Identifying the RAT prior to the cell search reduces the number of synchronization attempts and, consequently, the time needed to perform the cell search. | 10-04-2012 |
20120252447 | System and Method for Transmitting and Receiving Control Channels - A method for transmitting resource allocation information to a wireless node in a communications system includes selecting a search space from one of a first search space and a second search space, the first search space associated with a first set of control channel parameters and the second search space associated with a second set of control channel parameters. The method also includes modulating the first control information, and mapping the modulated first control information onto the selected search space in a first subframe, where at least one of modulating the first control information and mapping the modulated first control information is according to a selected set of control channel parameters associated with the selected search space. The method further includes transmitting the first subframe to the wireless node, and transmitting a first parameter indicator identifying the selected set of control channel parameters to the wireless node. | 10-04-2012 |
20120258711 | FEMTO-BTS RF ACCESS MECHANISM - Femto cells that extend mobile network coverage into customer premises operate in a frequency band typically assigned to a macro network. To facilitate system discovery and registrations of mobile stations with femto cells, a carrier designates one the channels within the band as a primary channel for its femto cells. For example, neighbor list messages transmitted by macro network base stations can provide frequency and PN code information directing mobile stations to search the primary channel for a PN code of the femto cells. The mobile station preferred roaming list (PRL) may identify femto cells by SID/NID. The SID is that of the carrier's macro network, whereas the NID may be a NID of the macro network or one specifically assigned to femto cell operations. The PRL uses frequency acquisition information for the femto cells that is the same as or similar to that for one of the macro networks. | 10-11-2012 |
20120264425 | SELECTIVE BAND-SCANNING BY A MULTI-SIM USER EQUIPMENT (UE) IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - In an embodiment, a wireless communications device (WCD) is provisioned with a plurality of subscriber identity modules (SIMs). The WCD determines a first set of bands (BAND | 10-18-2012 |
20120264426 | Methods And Apparatus For Use In Efficiently Scanning for Wireless Networks Based On Mobile Device Velocity - Techniques for efficient scanning for WLANs based on mobile device velocity are described. In one illustrative example, a mobile device identifies whether its velocity is less than or greater than a threshold value. While it is identified that the velocity of the mobile device is less than the threshold value, the mobile device scans to search for one or more WLANs identified in a first subset of WLAN profiles (e.g. “stationary” WLANs). While it is identified that the velocity of the mobile device is greater than the threshold value, the mobile device scans to search for the one or more WLANs identified in a second subset of WLAN profiles (e.g. “mobile” WLANs). Advantageously, a suitable WLAN may be more efficiently identified with use of a technique which reduces power consumption of the mobile device. | 10-18-2012 |
20120270543 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A radio communication system has a random access channel for the transmission of data ( | 10-25-2012 |
20120270544 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONSTRUCTING A CARRIER TO INTERFERENCE MATRIX BASED ON SUBSCRIBER CALLS - A conventional wireless device constantly measures the signal strength of its server base station and the strength of signals from surrounding base stations for handoff purposes. The wireless device transmits this information to its serving base station, which discards the information a short time afterward, following handoff. The present system and method store the formerly discarded information in one of several existing network elements or in a separate computer system. This information is used to generate a carrier to interference ratio, which indicates the level of interference between station pairs, and to also generate a carrier to interference matrix, including identifying potential interference for each station pair. The frequency of occurrences during predetermined desired periods of time and the volume of traffic affected by each level of interference may also be calculated. This provides comprehensive, continuous, real-time information for wireless frequency planning. | 10-25-2012 |
20120282925 | ENABLING ENHANCED PAGING OF STATIONARY TERMINAL DEVICES IN A CELLULAR MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORK - To distinguish between stationary and free-to-move terminal devices in a mobile communication network in order to reduce paging interference, a stationary terminal device chooses a surrounding radio cell as a home cell, which remains associated to the stationary terminal device, as long as the home cell fulfils a suitable-cell-requirement. Therefore, the communication network can be operated such that a paging request is only distributed through one base station/NodeB, if that paging request is to be forwarded to a stationary terminal device being associated to a home cell. According to another aspect of the present invention, stationary terminal devices are grouped in separate paging group that is stored in an operation unit of the mobile communication network. If a paging request is to be distributed, it is firstly checked, whether the paging request is to be forwarded to one of the terminal devices of the separate paging group. | 11-08-2012 |
20120282926 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS FOR COMMUNICATING WITH A MOBILE STATION - A wireless communication apparatus for communicating with a mobile station in a cell covered by at least one Radio Access Technology (RAT) and frequency, wherein the cell including a plurality of meshes, and a mobile station having various RAT capabilities and supporting several frequencies, wherein the wireless communication apparatus characterized by transmitting a first beacon having first information related to all RAT's and frequencies which the mobile station can use in the cell and, transmitting a second beacon having second information which shows availability in one of a plurality of meshes for each RAT and frequency included in the first beacon. | 11-08-2012 |
20120289226 | CELLULAR ACCESS POINT FOR SEARCH AND RESCUE - The cellular access point for search and rescue is a cellular basestation and associated control computer providing functions for the location of cellular handsets in collapsed structures and to provide a means for rescue team members to communicate with trapped accident victims. | 11-15-2012 |
20120295616 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING CELL SELECTION TO HOME CELL OR PRIVATE NETWORK IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for performing cell selection to a Home cell or a Private network in a mobile communication system are provided, in which a User Equipment (UE) determines a candidate cell by measuring a serving cell and neighbor cells, receives an indicator indicating a Home cell or a Private network in system information from the candidate cell, determines whether the candidate cell is included in a Home cell or Private network list set in the UE, and selects the candidate cell if the candidate cell is included in the Home cell or Private network list. | 11-22-2012 |
20120302235 | SELF CONFIGURING AND OPTIMISATION OF CELL NEIGHBOURS IN WIRELESS TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS - The present invention relates to a cellular communications network and in particular to the problem of identifying cells for neighbour lists, or handover candidates when the cells are identified by a limited number of non-unique identities. The present invention includes a method for a radio base station, wherein the base station receives reports from one ore more terminals in neighbour cells quality and non-unique identities. The match is sought in a neighbour cell list non-unique identity with a unique cell identity. If the match cannot be made without ambiguity, the base station orders the terminal to detect the unique cell identity. If the reason for the ambiguity is the particular cell is not included in the neighbour cell it is included when its unique identity has been established. The uniquely identified cell is used if a handover is decided. | 11-29-2012 |
20120315900 | Method and apparatus for switching between different network standards - The disclosure provides a method for switching between different network standards, which includes the following steps performed by a terminal: when switch is to be performed, sorting in a history record target cells corresponding to a source cell which the terminal is leaving, to form a search list, choosing the target cell from the search list and accessing the target cell. The disclosure further provides an apparatus for switching between different network standards. By means of the method and the apparatus of the disclosure, the rate of the switching between the different network standards is increased, the user experience is improved and the power consumption of the terminal is reduced. | 12-13-2012 |
20130005335 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICES AND LOCATION REGISTRATION METHODS - A mobile communication device with a wireless module and a controller module is provided. The wireless module performs wireless transceiving to and from a first service network. The controller module transmits a location update request message to a first cellular station of the first service network via the wireless module, and receives a location update rejection message, which comprises a rejection cause indicating a network related failure, from the first cellular station via the wireless module. Also, the controller module transmits another location update request message to a second cellular station of the first service network via the wireless module in response to the location update rejection message. Particularly, the first cellular station and the second cellular station belong to a first location area and a second location area, respectively. | 01-03-2013 |
20130012202 | DISCONTINUOUS TRANSMISSION SCHEME - A base station transmits signals on a frequency (f | 01-10-2013 |
20130012203 | METHOD FOR DEFINING PDCCH SEARCH SPACE IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING CARRIER AGGREGATION - The invention relates to a method for operating a secondary station to search for PDCCH in search spaces on a plurality of component carriers, wherein the component carriers comprise an anchor carrier and a plurality of other carriers and the search spaces change in a preconfigured way with the time. | 01-10-2013 |
20130017828 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR FREQUENCY SCAN USING AN ADAPTIVE MEASUREMENT INTERVALAANM WENG; JIANFENGAACI KANATAAACO CAAAGP WENG; JIANFENG KANATA CAAANM DUGGAN; JASON ROBERTAACI OTTAWAAACO CAAAGP DUGGAN; JASON ROBERT OTTAWA CAAANM CREASY; TIMOTHY JAMESAACI OTTAWAAACO CAAAGP CREASY; TIMOTHY JAMES OTTAWA CA - Aspects of the present application include using adaptive measurement intervals to improve RSSI scan accuracy. A method may involve determining a first power value in respect of a first measurement time interval, determining whether or not the first power value meets at least one criterion, when the first power value does not meet the at least one criterion, determining at least one additional power value, selecting at least one power value from a set of power values that have been determined, the set including the first power value and the at least one additional power value, and determining the power value for use in cell selection or cell re-selection based on the selected at least one power value. The methods may be applied to any cell selection or re-selection scheme for which an adaptive measurement interval may be beneficial. | 01-17-2013 |
20130029662 | Mobile Communication System Cell Selection in the Presence of Unacceptable Cells - A user equipment (UE) cell search involves tuning a demodulation frequency of the UE based on signals received from a first encountered cell and using a non-initial cell search procedure to continue searching for a cell that is qualified for camping on, wherein the non-initial cell search procedure relies on the demodulation frequency being within limits of accuracy that enable successful reception and decoding of received information. Prior to finding a qualified cell, information enabling a first discovered unqualified cell to again be found is saved. After a period of time during which the non-initial cell search procedure has been performed and before the UE's demodulation frequency is beyond acceptable limits of accuracy, the saved information is used to again tune the demodulation frequency based on reading signals from the first discovered unqualified cell. The UE then continues to perform the non-initial cell search procedure. | 01-31-2013 |
20130029663 | DEVICES AND METHODS FOR WIRELESS SYSTEM ACQUISITION - Disclosed are devices, methods and computer program products for radio access network (RAN) signal acquisition. In one aspect, a mobile device scans a radio frequency spectrum for RAN signals and detects signals corresponding to a plurality of channels of a first network type having a first channel bandwidth. The mobile device then determines a power level of the detected signal on each of the plurality of channels and discards signals having substantially equal power within a first frequency range to define a remaining set of signals. The first frequency range corresponds to a second channel bandwidth of a second network type and the second channel bandwidth is greater than the first channel bandwidth. The mobile device then ranks the remaining signals based on the determined power level and selects one of the remaining signals for acquisition based on the ranking. | 01-31-2013 |
20130040640 | Method for Small Cell Discovery in Heterogeneous Network - Methods for small cell discovery in heterogeneous networks are proposed for efficient cell search and better power saving. In one novel aspect, a user equipment (UE) measures small cells only when the UE enters into the vicinity of the small cells. For example, the UE detects the proximity of small cells and reports proximity indication information to the network. Based on the vicinity indication, the network provides suitable measurement configuration for small cells. In a second novel aspect, the UE performs guided search for small cell discovery. In a third novel aspect, the UE increases search rate for small cells when it is in the vicinity of small cells, and decreases search rate for small cells when it is not in the vicinity of small cells. The detection may be based on location information provided by the network or based on vicinity detection information autonomously stored by the UE. | 02-14-2013 |
20130040641 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DETECTING A TARGET CELL IN A CELLULAR NETWORK - A method for detecting a target cell by a mobile device, the method comprising storing traversed paths of the mobile device, the stored traversed paths each comprising information to identify cells in a sequence of cells traversed by the mobile device referenced to the target cell, compiling information identifying cells traversed by the device in real time to produce current path information, comparing the current path information to the stored traversed paths and inferring from the comparison a relative proximity of the mobile device to the target cell and adapting a search for the target cell based on the relative proximity. | 02-14-2013 |
20130053030 | RADIO TERMINAL AND BASE STATION NOTIFICATION METHOD - In a radio terminal, while put in a waiting state in a second base station which covers a communication dead zone of a first base station, a search unit regularly searches for the first base station capable of communication. A notifying unit notifies a user of search results of the search unit in the case where the first base station is found by the search unit. | 02-28-2013 |
20130059579 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - The present invention allows a mobile terminal which recognizes a UMTS cell as a serving cell to display that the mobile terminal is in the coverage of an LTE cell near the serving cell on a standby screen without performing any cell search of the LTE cell. In an overlapping area between the UMTS cell and the LTE cell, the mobile terminal of the present invention recognizes the UMTS cell as a serving cell which the mobile terminal camps on or is connected to, is provided with an estimation section that estimates that the mobile terminal is in the coverage of LTE cell, when received broadcast information includes an LTE cell detection identifier, and a display section that displays that the mobile terminal is in the coverage of LTE cell, when the estimation section estimates that the mobile terminal is in the coverage of LTE cell. | 03-07-2013 |
20130059580 | MOBILE STATION AND METHOD - There are included an information collecting unit that collects, for each of public land mobile network, public land mobile network selecting information to be used for selecting a public land mobile network to be preferentially selected, and a storing unit that stores, for each of the public land mobile networks, the public land mobile network selecting information collected by the information collecting unit. | 03-07-2013 |
20130059581 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IDENTIFYING CLOSED SUBSCRIBER GROUP CELLS - A method, apparatus and computer program product are provided for identifying a closed subscriber group (CSG) cell to a macrocell in an efficient manner such that the identification of the CSG cell requires less signalling between the mobile terminal and the macrocell, thereby either reducing the overall signalling or providing increased capacity for additional measurement reporting by the mobile terminal. Additionally, a method, apparatus and computer program product are provided in which the CSG cell is identified in a more efficient manner in a cell change order, thereby similarly reduce the signalling requirements between a macrocell and a CSG cell. | 03-07-2013 |
20130065584 | LOW ENERGY BEACON ENCODING - Techniques and tools are described for transmitting beacon messages using a wireless communication protocol, such as the Bluetooth Low Energy protocol. In some examples, beacon messages can be generated in a compact format and included in an AdvData portion of a payload of a protocol data unit of a Bluetooth Low Energy advertising channel packet. A beacon message can be transmitted from a stationary beacon generation device and broadcast to an area within a transmission range of the beacon generation device, and mobile computing devices, such as mobile phones, can receive the beacon message and perform one or more actions in response to information contained in the beacon message, all while conserving energy used by the beacon generation device and the mobile computing device. | 03-14-2013 |
20130072187 | DUAL MODE COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE AND METHOD OF IMPROVING DATA RATE THEREOF - There are provided a dual mode communications device and a method of improving a data rate thereof. The dual mode communications device according to the embodiment of the present invention may include a selection unit | 03-21-2013 |
20130079002 | EXCHANGE OF ACCESS CONTROL LISTS TO MANAGE FEMTO CELL COVERAGE - System(s) and method(s) provide access management to femto cell service through access control list(s) (e.g., white list(s), or black list(s)). White list(s) includes a set of subscriber station(s) identifier numbers, codes, or tokens, and also can include additional fields for femto cell access management based on desired complexity. White list(s) can have associated white list profile(s) therewith to establish logic of femto coverage access based on the white list(s). Access lists exchange among subscribers that posses provisioned femto access points and elect to share access lists also is provided. Transference of access list(s) among subscribers is secured and based at least in part on subscriber privacy policy. Subscribers can be prompted to opt in access list sharing, or to update privacy policies to allow reciprocate sharing and update privacy settings. Based at least in part on association criteria, component identifies femto access points for a subscriber to access lists with. | 03-28-2013 |
20130084856 | Device Mobility Based Scanning Period Control - A user equipment UE selects between a first scanning mode and a second scanning mode using at least inputs of signal quality of a link with an access node and at least one of UE speed and network type of the access node. It then determines a scanning rate using the selected scanning mode and the UE speed, and detects and measures inter-frequency neighbor cells according to the determined scanning rate. In one example both modes the increase scanning rate for increased UE speeds, except that for the first mode speeds above V | 04-04-2013 |
20130084857 | Method and System for Selecting Candidate Neighboring Cells - Disclosed is a method and system for selecting a candidate neighbor cell in the present invention. The method includes: determining a candidate cell set of a serving cell; acquiring a base station closest to the serving cell from the candidate cell set, and adding all the cells under the base station into a neighbor cell set; deleting a cell sheltered by the base station and cells included in the neighbor cell set from the candidate cell set; judging whether the candidate cell set is empty; if not, then returning to the step of acquiring a base station closest to the serving cell; and if yes, then taking cells in the neighbor cell set as a first layer of neighbor cells of the serving cell. By way of the present invention, the efficiency and accuracy of neighbor cell planning can be improved, thereby saving neighbor cell resources and improving the self adaptability of the candidate neighbor cell. | 04-04-2013 |
20130084858 | EXPANDED CELL SEARCH AND SELECTION IN A MOBILE WIRELESS DEVICE - A method and apparatus for expanded cell search and selection in a mobile wireless device. The mobile device locates cells in a first of neighbor cells and in a second list of stored cells and evaluates located cells using suitability criteria. When locating a suitable first cell that uses a first radio access technology (RAT) in the first list, the first cell is selected. When locating a second suitable cell that uses a second RAT in the first list and not locating a suitable cell that uses the first RAT in the second list, the second cell is selected. When locating a third suitable cell that uses the second RAT in the first list and locating a fourth suitable cell that uses the first RAT in the second list, the fourth cell is selected when more suitable than the third cell. | 04-04-2013 |
20130090115 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR INTELLIGENT INITIATION OF CONNECTIONS WITHIN A NETWORK - Methods and apparatus enabling connection and/or re-connection to an access point of a network based on both reception characteristics and also the access point's likelihood to successfully connect (or re-connect). In one such embodiment, an exemplary Long Term Evolution (LTE) user equipment (UE) stores a “blacklist” of LTE enhanced NodeBs (eNBs) that have previously unexpectedly disconnected the UE. The UE will avoid the blacklisted eNBs and will attempt to connect to other eNBs. By avoiding eNBs which have previously been unable to service the UE and instead focusing on other eNBs that may have lower reception quality but likely better suited to service the UE, the UE can avoid prolonged out-of-service (OOS) periods. | 04-11-2013 |
20130090116 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER OR INITIAL ACCESSING - A method for performing handover or initial accessing by a terminal includes: receiving a message including one or more of information regarding a smart meter and information regarding neighbor base stations (BSs) connected to the smart meter, the smart meter having a function for managing power, determining at least one of the neighbor BSs connected to the smart meter as a BS to be accessed; transmitting an access request message for accessing the determined BS to the smart meter, and accessing the determined BS if a response message is received from the smart meter. | 04-11-2013 |
20130090117 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OPTIMIZED REACQUISITION OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS - Motion status states reported by an advanced motion detection process or other means of obtaining a movement state of Stationary or Non-Stationary from filtered accelerometer data are utilized to reacquire service during Out of Service scenarios. Both movement states operate in three power phases: aggressive scanning or normal power mode, slow scanning or moderate power mode, and deep sleep or power saving mode. The scanning rate, power mode, scanning period and/or channel list depend upon the movement state and power phase. Motion information obtained from an advanced motion detection process provides substantial improvements in service reacquisition performance and power consumption in stationary Out of Service scenarios. When compared to traditional service reacquisition scanning routines, the reductions in average current can be achieved of: at a 5-minute OOS mark, ˜45% reduction, at a 15-minute OOS mark, ˜60% reduction and at a 6-hour OOS mark, ˜50% reduction. | 04-11-2013 |
20130095829 | IDLE MODE OPERATION IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - An idle mode UE can RACH to a cell different from the cell paging the UE. The UE can be allocated additional time to respond to all cells in the neighborhood to identify the cell in which to RACH. Interference cancellation can occur at different rates based on whether the UE is in connected mode or idle mode. The time to respond to the page can be a function of a paging cycle. Additionally, a variable bias may promote early handoff to lower power cells and late handoff to high power cells. | 04-18-2013 |
20130102307 | RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE TERMINAL DEVICE, AND CELL SELECTING METHOD - To provide a cell selecting method in which an optimal cell can be selected in the case of relay transmission. The cell selecting method includes: in a radio base station apparatus, determining a specified sub-frame including data for measuring reception quality in a mobile terminal device; and in a mobile terminal device, measuring first reception quality using a reference signal of the specified sub-frame transmitted from the radio base station apparatus and second reception quality using a reference signal of the specified sub-frame transmitted from the radio base station apparatus through a radio relay station apparatus, and transmitting the first reception quality and the second reception quality to the radio base station apparatus; and in the radio base station apparatus, selecting a cell to which the mobile terminal device is connected using the first reception quality and the second reception quality, and transmitting information on the selected cell to the mobile terminal device. | 04-25-2013 |
20130109379 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SCANNING BASE STATIONS | 05-02-2013 |
20130109380 | METHODS OF SELECTING TARGET CELLS USING NEIGHBOR CELL INFORMATION AND RELATED NETWORK CONTROLLERS | 05-02-2013 |
20130115943 | LOCATION-BASED MICROCELL SEARCH - A network device may store information identifying a coverage area associated with each of one or more cells that are associated with the network device. The network device may receive information identifying a geographic location of a user device. The network device may compare the geographic location of the user device to one or more of the stored coverage areas. The network device may also determine, based on the comparing, that the user device is within a particular coverage area of a particular cell, of the one or more cells. The network device may further send, to the user device, and based on determining that the user device is located within the particular coverage area of the particular cell, an instruction for the user device to connect to the particular cell, where the user device is to attempt to connect to the particular cell in response to the instruction. | 05-09-2013 |
20130115944 | EFFICIENT FEMTO DISCOVERY PROTOCOL USING MACRO SYNCHRONIZATION - A method, a computer program product, and an apparatus are provided in which the apparatus (e.g., a femto cell) receives timing information from a second apparatus (e.g., a macro cell). The apparatus receives a signal from a third apparatus (e.g., a UE) based on the received timing information. The apparatus transmits a broadcast signal based on the received signal. A method, a computer program product, and an apparatus are provided in which the apparatus (e.g., a UE) receives timing information from a second apparatus (e.g., macro cell). The apparatus transmits a signal to a third apparatus (e.g., a femto cell) based on the received timing information. The apparatus receives a broadcast signal from the third apparatus in response to the signal. | 05-09-2013 |
20130115945 | SERVICE-ASSISTED NETWORK ACCESS POINT SELECTION - Embodiments enable prioritization and selection of network access points (NAP) by a computing device using NAP attribute values. The computing device obtains the attribute values based on a location of the computing device and/or proximate NAPs detected by the computing device. The obtained attribute values are compared to a state of the computing device (e.g., sensor values), user preferences, or other criteria to select at least one of the NAPs for connection with the computing device. In some embodiments, a user of the computing device is presented with a list of Wi-Fi access points ranked according to relevance to the computing device and/or user. | 05-09-2013 |
20130115946 | TRANSMISSION OF CHANNEL QUALITY INDICATIONS - Indications of desired radio communications downlink characteristics are transmitted via a radio communications uplink from a user equipment to a node of a cellular wireless network, the indications each relating to one or more components of a radio communications link from the node to the user equipment. The indications are transmitted successively at different cycles, and at each different cycle a first parameter is determined, indicating a more preferred number of components and a second parameter is determined, indicating a less preferred number of components. First additional parameters are calculated and transmitted relating to the desired radio communications link quality corresponding to the first parameter and second additional parameters are calculated and transmitted relating to the desired radio communications link quality on the basis of the second parameter. The first and second parameters are each parameters which are variable between different cycles. | 05-09-2013 |
20130122901 | Wireless Communication Systems and Methods - Embodiments of the invention provide methods, devices and computer programs arranged to control access to a cell in a communication network. One embodiment comprises an apparatus comprising a processing system arranged to cause the apparatus to: receive a plurality of Closed Subscriber Group identifiers (CSG IDs) assigned to the cell; select and transmit a first CSG ID from the plurality of CSG IDs on the basis of a first load condition on the cell; and select and transmit a second, different, CSG ID from the plurality of CSG IDs on the basis of a second, different, load condition on the cell. | 05-16-2013 |
20130122902 | USER DEVICE RADIO ACTIVITY OPTIMIZATION IN DEAD ZONES - A user device may determine whether the user device is located within a dead zone; periodically search, using a first process, for a cellular tower of a cellular network when the user device is not located within the dead zone; and periodically search, using a second process, for a cellular tower of the cellular network when the user device is located within the dead zone. The second process may consume less power of the user device than the first process. | 05-16-2013 |
20130122903 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION FOR A DEVICE - A method and apparatus for wireless communication device is disclosed, including approaches to handling Active Set Update messages. | 05-16-2013 |
20130122904 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING DATA IN WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM SUPPORTING MULTI-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY - The present invention relates to a method by which a terminal transmits/receives data to/from a first base station (BS) supporting a first radio access technology (RAT) and a second BS supporting a second RAT in a wireless access system supporting multi-RAT, the method comprising the steps of: executing an initial network entry to the first BS; a step for executing a multi-RAT capability negotiation with the first BS to exchange information needed to access the second BS; executing a scanning on at least one second BS included in the coverage of the first BS, on the basis of the information received from the first BS through the multi-RAT capability negotiation process; executing an access to a second BS of the at least one second BS; and simultaneously transmitting/receiving data with the first BS and the second BS accessed through the access process. | 05-16-2013 |
20130130680 | LOCATION BASED NETWORK ACCESS POINT SCANNING - A system and method include determining location information identifying a location of a portable information handling device, sorting a list of network profiles based on the location information, and scanning the list of sorted network profiles to identify an access point for connecting the portable information handling device to a network. | 05-23-2013 |
20130130681 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING DATA IN WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM SUPPORTING MULTI-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY - The present invention relates to a method by which a terminal transmits/receives data to/from a first base station supporting a first radio access technology and a second base station supporting a second radio access technology in a wireless access system supporting multi-radio access technology (multi-RAT), the method comprising the steps of: executing an initial network entry to the first base station; executing a multi-RAT capability negotiation with the first base station to exchange information needed to access the second base station; a step for executing a scanning on at least one second base station included in the coverage of the first base station, on the basis of the information received from the first base station through the multi-RAT capability negotiation step; executing an access to one second base station of said at least one second base station; and simultaneously transmitting/receiving data to/from the first base station and the second base station accessed through the access step, wherein the step of executing a scanning comprises a step of receiving from the first base station a multi-RAT scan command message for commanding the scanning of said at least one second base station, and a step of executing a scanning of said at least one second base station. | 05-23-2013 |
20130130682 | CELL SELECTION - A first base station for use in a communications network, the first base station having a first cell operating range, comprising: means for obtaining data relating to at least one characteristic of a signal transmitted by a second base station having a second cell operating range which is different from and overlaps with the first cell operating range of the first base station; means for determining a cell selection bias value for the first or second base station using the obtained data; and means for transmitting the determined cell selection bias value to a user device within the first cell operating range of the first base station. | 05-23-2013 |
20130137427 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPROVED BASE STATION CELL SYNCHRONIZATION IN LTE DOWNLINK - Methods and apparatus for enhancing a search performance for timing includes a mobile station that detects a plurality of signals, each from one of a plurality of cells, wherein one of the plurality of cells is identified by the mobile station as a strong cell and the remaining cells are identified by the mobile station as weak cells. A first matched filter is applied to a signal from the strong cell to detect first parameters associated with the strong cell. A second matched filter is applied to at least one signal from one or more of the weak cells resulting in at least one second matched filter output. Interference is removed from the at least one second matched filter output to detect one or more second parameters associated with one of the weak cells and to establish a timing of one of the weak cells. | 05-30-2013 |
20130137428 | MOTION-BASED KINETIC FINGERPRINT RADIO SELECTION - Motion adaptive wireless user equipment (UE) in a wireless network are provided. Kinetic information is leveraged to select a preferred radio (or radio technology) or adapt a reselection scanning interval. This can serve to improve the performance of a UE by reducing the amount of power expended in maintaining an adequate level of connectedness to the wireless network components in the face of UE movement. In a further aspect, kinetic power generators can be employed as a source of UE transit data. Kinetic fingerprints can be compared to UE transit data, e.g., that acquired from a kinetic generator of the UE, to facilitate selection of preferred radios and reselection intervals. In this aspect, radio selection schema and reselection scanning schema can effectively be selected with little to no drain on a UE power source. | 05-30-2013 |
20130137429 | ACCESS CONTROL FAILURE HANDLING FOR HENB INBOUND MOBILITY - When MME receives Handover required from source eNB/HeNB which contains CSG ID, it verifies whether the CSG subscription data it stores is fresh or expired. If it is expired, or if MME does not have any association data for UE, MME retrieves the latest CSG subscription data from HSS. MME rewrites its stored CSG subscription data with the one retrieved from HSS, if they are different. MME performs access control for the UE according to the CSG ID received from Handover required message and its CSG subscription data. When the access control is failed, a new message List Update Indication is proposed to be sent from source eNB/HeNB to UE. In order to indicate what caused the failure, an appropriate cause in the message is proposed. Upon receiving the message, UE updates its stored CSG whitelist, such that the CSG subscription data in UE and MME are synchronized. | 05-30-2013 |
20130143553 | FEMTOCELL USE FOR RADIO FREQUENCY NETWORK SWEEPS - Systems and methods that utilize femtocell access points (FAP) to perform radio frequency (RF) network sweeps are provided. In one embodiment, a method includes: predicting an availability of an access point (AP) to perform an RF network sweep; and determining that the access point is available to perform the RF network sweep based, at least, on a prediction that a mobile device on a white list for the access point is not likely to access the access point during a time interval associated with performing the RF network sweep. In another embodiment, a method includes: comparing a network quality characteristic for a wireless channel associated with a FAP with a network quality characteristic for a wired network communicatively coupled to the FAP. The network quality characteristics can be the same. The method can then include employing the comparison to determine to which network an impairment is attributable. | 06-06-2013 |
20130143554 | Two-Step Searcher for Cell Discovery - Disclosed are various embodiments involving a two-step searcher for cell discovery. Multiple scrambling codes associated with multiple neighboring cells are obtained. Slot timing is obtained for a received signal based at least in part on a detection of primary synchronization peak energy in the received signal. One of the scrambling codes for decoding the received signal is identified based at least in part on testing multiple scrambling code hypotheses in parallel during an accumulation time period of the received signal in response to obtaining the slot timing. | 06-06-2013 |
20130143555 | MANAGING ACCESS TERMINAL HANDOVER IN VIEW OF ACCESS POINT PHYSICAL LAYER IDENTIFIER CONFUSION - Confusion associated with a physical layer identifier is detected and action taken to address this confusion. In some aspects, confusion detection involves determining whether signals such as beacons or pilots that are associated with the same physical layer identifier are also associated with different timing (e.g., different observed time difference (OTD) values). In some aspects, confusion detection involves determining whether an inordinate number of handover failures is associated with a particular physical layer identifier. In some aspects, the action taken upon detecting physical layer identifier confusion involves ensuring that an access terminal is not handed over to an access point that uses that physical layer identifier. In some aspects, the action taken upon detecting physical layer identifier confusion involves resolving the confusion. | 06-06-2013 |
20130143556 | Technique for Cell Signature Determination - A technique for cell signature determination in a cellular communication network is provided. A method implementation of this technique comprises the steps of providing a set of hypothesis signals, each hypothesis signal including a signature hypothesis, receiving a composite signal including a first signal portion carrying a first signature from a first cell and a second signal portion carrying a second signature from a second cell, wherein the first signal portion and the second signal portion overlap at least partially in time, and obtaining a correlation result by correlating the composite signal with each hypothesis signal. After the first signature has been determined, a set of phantom signatures associated with the first signature is provided. The phantom signatures represent artifacts from the first signal portion in the correlation result. Finally, the second signature is determined based on the correlation result taking into account the set of phantom signatures associated with the first signature. | 06-06-2013 |
20130143557 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND RADIO BASE STATION - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes: the steps of: acquiring, at a mobile station UE connected in a cell # | 06-06-2013 |
20130143558 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR MANAGING ADJACENT RELATION AMONG CELLS - A method for managing adjacent relation among cells is disclosed in the disclosure. The method includes: obtaining adjacent cell configuration information of a current cell in real time; a Network Management System (NMS), an Element Management System (EMS) and a Network Element (NE), in turn, analyzing and processing the adjacent cell configuration information and adjusting an adjacent relation list of the cell, according to a hierarchical control strategy table preconfigured or in default configuration, wherein the hierarchical control strategy table is used to specify adjacent relation list configuration ability of the NMS, the EMS and the NE. A device for managing adjacent relation among cells is also disclosed in the disclosure, the adjacent cell configuration information of the cell can be detected and obtained automatically, automatic management of the adjacent relation for an area managed by the NE, the adjacent relation for an area managed by the EMS, and the adjacent relation for the crossing EMS area is implemented, and the hierarchical processing method is adopted, thus the costs of information interaction and transmission are least, the processing bottleneck can be effectively avoided, the processing capability of the whole network can be adequately discovered especially when the payload of the network is rather heavy, the processing efficiency is also improved, and the real-time performance is best. | 06-06-2013 |
20130150032 | Controlled Idle Mode Behavior in User Equipment Supporting Multiple Radio Access Techniques - User equipment includes techniques that may improve operation by selectively controlling access to particular radio access technologies (RATs) for the user equipment while it is operating in certain modes, such as idle mode. Once the user equipment is in a connected mode, and operating with significant uplink and\or downlink traffic activity, inter-RAT procedures can provide the benefits of access to multiple RATs. This technique is useful in many different environments, such as an environment that is predominantly 2G or 3G with 4G hot spot coverage. This technique may also be useful for providing enhanced operations in 2G/3G capable dual SIM user equipment running in a camped mode or other modes. The technique is not limited to 2G/3G/4G or any other particular standards, but may apply to any standards in a sequence of evolving or incrementally improving standards. | 06-13-2013 |
20130150033 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING NETWORK ACCESS TO ELECTRONIC DEVICES - Systems and methods of providing network access information from one or more servers to a wireless device. The wireless device acquires information from the servers about available networks at a current location of the wireless device. The network information is based on a plurality of device parameters, network parameters and regulatory requirements that govern the operation of the wireless device. In addition, the wireless device may assess the acquired information for suitability for communications to be carried out by the wireless device. | 06-13-2013 |
20130150034 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, MOBILE STATION AND BASE STATION, AND CONTROL METHOD AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM THEREFOR - A wireless communication system according to the present invention is a wireless communication system including a mobile station and a base station that wirelessly communicates with the mobile station. The wireless communication system includes area determination means that determines, based on position information of the mobile station, which of a plurality of areas the mobile station is positioned, in which the plurality of areas are obtained by dividing a cell managed by the base station, and neighbour cell information notification means that notifies the mobile station of neighbour cell information associated with the area where the mobile station is positioned. This configuration enables cell search for the neighbour cell at the mobile station in a smaller area than a cell corresponding to the position of the mobile station. | 06-13-2013 |
20130157656 | Device-To-Device Discovery and Operation - The specification and drawings present a method, apparatus and software related product (e.g., a computer readable memory) for improving device discovery and D2D operation, e.g., in LTE wireless systems, by using control signaling provided by a wireless network (e.g., by an eNB). The discovery channel/channels which conveys discovery signal/signals are configured by a network (e.g., by the eNB) and are mapped to control channel/channels (e.g., one-to-one). After sending/receiving the discovery signal/signals, the D2D devices are monitoring control channel/channels to get current information for establishing the D2D communication among these D2D devices, the current information may include a resource allocation for the D2D communication and a device list of candidates for establishing the D2D communication. | 06-20-2013 |
20130157657 | FEMTOCELL DISCOVERY AND ASSOCIATION IN CELLULAR NETWORKS - Embodiments of a method and apparatus for discovery and association, by a mobile station, of a femto base station from a plurality of base stations. The mobile station may select a base station for consideration for association by decoding a physical layer identifier to determine that the base station is a macro base station and select a different base station based on other considerations. Other embodiments may be described and claimed. | 06-20-2013 |
20130165113 | Intelligent Paging-Channel Scanning Based on Location Relative to Zone of Last Registration - Exemplary methods and systems are disclosed herein that may, among other benefits, help a mobile station to conserve power by intelligently determining how often to scan for incoming pages. An exemplary method may be carried out by a mobile station that has most-recently registered with a radio access network in a zone of last registration, and involves the mobile station (a) determining a location of the mobile station in relation to the zone of last registration, (b) using the location of the mobile station in relation to the zone of last registration as a basis for determining a scan period to wait between scans of the paging channel; and (c) periodically scanning the paging channel according to the determined scan period. Furthermore, an exemplary method may be carried out in order to conserve battery power when a mobile station determines that its battery power is low. | 06-27-2013 |
20130165114 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING DATA IN WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM SUPPORTING MULTI-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY - The present invention relates to a method by which a terminal transmits/receives data to/from a first base station supporting a first wireless access technology and a second base station supporting a second wireless access technology in a wireless access system supporting multi-radio access technology (multi-RAT), the method comprising: a step for executing an initial network entry process with the first base station; a step for executing a multi-RAT capability negotiation process with the first base station to exchange information needed to access the second base station; a step for executing a scanning process on at least one second base station included in the coverage of the first base station, based on the information received from the first base station through the multi-RAT capability negotiation process; a step for executing an access process with one of the second base stations from said at least one second base station; and a step for simultaneously transmitting/receiving data with the first base station and the second base station accessed through the access process, wherein the step for executing the access process includes: a step for receiving a second system access command message that commands access to the one of the second base stations from the first base station; and a step for accessing the one of the second base stations based on the second system access command message received. | 06-27-2013 |
20130165115 | EFFICIENT HANDOVER/SCANNING TRIGGER METHOD IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM SUPPORTING A MULTICARRIER - The present invention relates to a broadband wireless access system, and more particularly, to a method of preventing a terminal from performing an unnecessary operation in a multicarrier environment, and a device for performing the method. An operating method of a terminal operating as a carrier aggregation mode in a broadband wireless access system supporting a multi carrier according to an embodiment of the present invention includes: obtaining system information on a neighbor base station and trigger function information applied to a carrier aggregation mode through a first broadcast message broadcasted from a serving base station; scanning a channel state for at least one carrier of a neighbor base station supporting a multicarrier by using the obtained system information; and transmitting a second message to the serving base station if the scanning result satisfies a condition based on the trigger function information. | 06-27-2013 |
20130183965 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF OPTIMIZING USER EQUIPMENT CAMPING PROCEDURES IN CIRCUIT-SWITCHED FALLBACK - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide a method for wireless communications. The method generally includes accessing, at a user equipment (UE) capable of communicating via first and second radio access technologies (RATs), a list of base stations of the first RAT, the list comprising information indicating which base stations of the first RAT support a call setup procedure for a call on at least one of the first RAT or a second RAT, and during network acquisition operations, giving preference to one or more base stations of the first RAT that, according to the list, support the call setup procedure. | 07-18-2013 |
20130183966 | System and Method for Network Discovery - A method for establishing a network connection includes determining a list of access networks detectable by a user equipment, and reducing the list of access networks to a list of preferred networks in accordance with supplemental information associated with the user equipment. The method also includes selecting a first candidate network from the list of preferred networks, and attempting to connect to the first candidate network. | 07-18-2013 |
20130189976 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING SOUNDING REFERENCE SIGNAL RESOURCE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for managing Sounding Reference Signal (SRS) resources in a wireless communication system are provided. A method of a base station for managing SRS resources includes receiving an allocation of SRS resources from a system controller, allocating SRS resources to connected terminals that are connected to the BS, determining a number of residual SRS resources varying according to the number of connected terminals, and transmitting one of an additional SRS resource allocation request and an allocated SRS resource return request to the system controller according to the number of residual SRS resources. | 07-25-2013 |
20130189977 | INDOOR COMPETITIVE SURVEY OF WIRELESS NETWORKS - Network operation data within a confined indoor wireless environment can be determined and utilized for generation of competitive intelligence and strategic network planning. Scanner component(s) survey and compare signals transported in a set of electromagnetic frequency bands, and in accordance with a set of radio technologies associated with competing networks. Collected data can be aggregated and delivered to femto gateway node(s), which can supply the data to an analysis component that generates network operations NetOp intelligence. A report component can manage received and aggregated network operation data and convey a portion thereof to planning tool(s) that can produce competitive intelligence and develop strategic network planning. Planning tool(s) can request specific network operation data or NetOp intelligence. Aggregated network operation data can be employed to identify service provider indoor coverage strengths or weaknesses relative to competitors to focus sales activities related to network services, and network improvement efforts. | 07-25-2013 |
20130189978 | METHOD OF RECEIVING PLMN INFORMATION AT A TERMINAL IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION, AND APPARATUS FOR SAME - Disclosed is a method of receiving PLMN (Public Land Mobile Network) information at a terminal in a wireless communication. In particular, the method of the present invention comprises the steps of receiving system information including a PLMN list and a prohibition indicator for limiting access to at least one PLMN of the PLMN list and performing access limitation to the specific network during a specific time. | 07-25-2013 |
20130196658 | VERIFICATION OF COMPATIBILITY AMONG TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK FEATURES - A method and apparatus for assessing the compatibility of a selected network feature with the network features of an existing telecommunications network | 08-01-2013 |
20130196659 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR POWER SAVING IN DISCONTINUOUS RECEPTION - ADAPTIVE NEIGHBOR CELL SEARCH DURATION - Methods and apparatus for adaptively adjusting temporal parameters (e.g., neighbor cell search durations). In one embodiment, neighbor cell search durations during discontinuous reception are based on a physical channel metric indicating signal strength and quality (e.g. Reference Signal Received Power (RSRP), Received Signal Strength Indication (RSSI), Reference Signal Receive Quality (RSRQ), etc.) of a cell. In a second embodiment, neighbor cell search durations are based on a multitude of physical layer metrics from one or more cells. In one variant, the multitude of physical layer metrics may include signal strength and quality metrics from the serving base station as well as signal strength and quality indicators from neighbor cells derived from the cells respective synchronization sequences. | 08-01-2013 |
20130196660 | METHOD FOR HANDOVER OF MOBILE TERMINAL - Disclosed herein is a method for handover of a mobile terminal. In the method, a group of mobile terminals for handover is formed by grouping a plurality of mobile terminals. A first terminal of the group scans a target base station. One or more other terminals of the group perform handover to the target base station using the scan information of the first terminal. | 08-01-2013 |
20130196661 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING DATA TRANSRECEIVING PATH IN RADIO ACCESS SYSTEM SUPPORTING MULTI-RAT - A method for transreceiving data disclosed in the present invention is a method for a terminal transreceiving between a first base station supporting a first radio access technology (RAT) and a second base station supporting a second RAT in a radio access system supporting Multi-RAT, and comprises the following steps: receiving access information for the second base station from the first base station; accessing the second base station based on access information of the second base station; transmitting to the first base station command information including an address on the second RAT, which is used for accessing the second base station; and transreceiving data having a first flow ID from the first base station through the first RAT, and transreceiving data having a second flow ID from the second base station through the second RAT. | 08-01-2013 |
20130203410 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR CREATING AND MAINTAINING A DATABASE OF COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method for creating and maintaining a database of communication systems by a wireless communication device is described. The method includes detecting one or more other communication systems while connected to a first communication system. The method also includes populating a database with system information corresponding to the first communication system and the one or more other communication systems. The database includes a mapping between the first communication system and the one or more other communication systems. The method additionally includes determining a second communication system to search for based on the database and a connection to the first communication system. | 08-08-2013 |
20130210428 | METHOD FOR OPTIMIZED HIGH PRIORITY PLMN SEARCH AND NORMAL SERVICE SCAN IN LIMITED SERVICE - Methods and apparatus are provided for selecting a serving cell in a communication network for reducing power consumption in a UE, is provided. Network topology information is determined by obtaining cell rank information for the UE, extracting a mobility state of the UE, and applying a double moving average principle to the cell rank information of the UE. The network topology information is employed to determine a change in network topology. Radio Frequency (RF) scans are optimized based on the network topology. | 08-15-2013 |
20130210429 | MOBILE DEVICE, NETWORK APPARATUS, RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND CELL-INFORMATION REPORTING METHOD - Even when small cells formed by the Home Node B and the Home eNode B are concentrated, the Automatic Neighbor Relation (ANR) function is effectively performed. A mobile device | 08-15-2013 |
20130217384 | CURRENT DRAIN IMPROVEMENTS IN TELEMATICS DEVICES USING ADJACENT CELL SIGNAL MEASUREMENT REDUCTION - The current drawn by a wireless communications device that is configured to periodically scan control channels can be reduced by reducing the number of control channels to be scanned. The relative strengths of a serving cell control channel and the relative strengths of neighboring cell control channels are determined and the scanning of neighboring cell control channels is discontinued if the communications device is not moving and the signal strength of the serving cell is above a threshold value selected to provide a signal level at which data on a control channel can be reliably recovered. | 08-22-2013 |
20130217385 | PROXIMITY INDICATION USING OUT-OF-BAND LINKS - Management of user equipment (UE) proximity indications to femto access points is provided using out-of-band (OOB) signals. To obtain OOB identification information on the femto access point, the UE determines the OOB identification information when in proximity to cells neighboring the femto access point. This OOB information is stored in a search information database (SID) of the UE and related to in-band information on the femto access point. To later determine proximity to the femto access point, in response to detecting its presence within a fingerprint area around the femto access point, a search for the femto access point is triggered using the OOB radio resources and OOB identification information associated with the femto access point in the SID. When the UE detects the femto access point using the OOB radio resources, the UE transmits a proximity indication to its serving base station over the in-band radio link. | 08-22-2013 |
20130217386 | PARALLEL MULTI-RAT PLMN SEARCH - A method includes, in a mobile communication terminal, receiving signals in a frequency band. One or more lists of entries are generated based on the received signals, each entry specifying a respective frequency channel suspected of containing a carrier of a respective Radio Access Technology (RAT). At least some of the entries are scanned in accordance with a scanning order that alternates from a first RAT to a second RAT before scanning all the entries of the first RAT. For each scanned entry, detection is made whether the respective frequency channel actually contains the carrier of the respective RAT. The detection of the carriers in the frequency band is output. | 08-22-2013 |
20130225165 | OUT-OF-BAND SCANNING FOR FEMTO ACCESS POINT DETECTION - Scanning for femto access points includes scanning out-of-band (OOB) channels to discover OOB signals associated with the femto access point. When a femto access point is first discovered, a first type of scan is performed of each of the OOB channels. The user equipment (UE) determines whether any received responses originate from femto OOB access points and, if so, updates a search database of the UE. During subsequent visits to the area of the femto OOB access points, when the UE detects entry to a fingerprint area of the femto OOB access point, a second type of scan is performed, in which each of the OOB channels with femto OOB access points identified in the search database are scanned. If responses are detected to this second type of scan, a proximity indication is transmitted using in-band signals to a serving macro access point. | 08-29-2013 |
20130231108 | Method and Apparatus for Operating Within White Space Band Using Message Indicating Whether Available Channel Information is Valid in Wireless System - A method and apparatus for operating within a white space band using a message indicating whether an available channel information is valid in the wireless system are disclosed. In a method for a first station (STA) to operate as an unlicensed device which is permitted to operate on an available channel within a White Space (WS) band of a wireless system, comprises: receiving a message indicating whether an available channel information of the first STA is valid from a second STA, wherein the available channel is a channel not used by a licensed device, wherein the message includes a Map ID of a current valid available channel information; and determining whether an existing available channel information of the first STA is valid by comparing a Map ID of the existing available channel information of the first STA with the Map ID included in the received message. | 09-05-2013 |
20130231109 | Method of Handling System Information Reception and Related Communication Device - A method of handling system information reception for a mobile device having a plurality of connections to a plurality of cells in a wireless communication system comprising a network, the method comprises receiving a radio resource control (RRC) message indicating that one of the plurality of cells is a serving cell from the network, determining the cell indicated by the RRC message as the serving cell of the mobile device, and applying system information of the serving cell. | 09-05-2013 |
20130231110 | EFFICIENT RESELECTIONS IN THE PRESENCE OF CLOSED SUBSCRIBER GROUP CELLS - A method in a mobile station for avoiding interference to restricted access cells, including detecting presence of a restricted access cell, determining that a measured path-loss is larger than a path-loss threshold, determining that the mobile station is not allowed to access the restricted access cell, and barring a carrier frequency on which the restricted access cell is deployed when the measured path-loss is larger than the path-loss threshold and when the mobile station is not allowed access to the restricted access cell. | 09-05-2013 |
20130231111 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND NETWORK SELECTION METHOD - A mobile terminal including: a storage unit configured to store a table of networks that a user desires to select; a selection unit configured, when a network included in the table is found from networks detected by cell search, to select the network that is detected by cell search and that is included in the table; and a processing unit configured to select a cell of the network selected by the selection unit, and performs position registration. | 09-05-2013 |
20130237216 | SCANNING RESPONSES IN WIRELESS NETWORK - This document discloses a solution for transmitting scanning response messages in an orderly manner in a wireless network. An access node determines a transmission order for a plurality of access nodes responding to a scanning request message provided by a scanning/requesting device. Then, the access node determines its own transmission turn within the transmission order and transmits a scanning response message with reduced channel contention. Another aspect relates to the scanning device arranged to receive the scanning response messages where the scanning device monitors the transmission order of the scanning response messages. | 09-12-2013 |
20130237217 | Technique For Cell Signature Determination - A technique for cell signature determination in a cellular communication network is described. A method implementation of this technique comprises the steps of providing a set of cell signature hypotheses (d(n)), each cell signature hypothesis including a first partial hypothesis (d(2n)) and a second partial hypothesis (d(2n+1)), receiving a signal (X(n)) carrying a cell signature, the signal (X(n)) including a first partial signal (X(2n)) and a second partial signal (X(2n+1)), correlating the first partial signal (X(2n)) with each first partial hypothesis (d(2n)) to determine a first correlation result for each cell signature hypothesis, correlating the second partial signal (X(2n+1)) with each second partial hypothesis (d(2n+1)) to determine a second correlation result for each cell signature hypothesis, and determining the cell signature based on the correlation results including discarding a given cell signature hypothesis based on an analysis of a first magnitude of the first correlation result associated with the given cell signature hypothesis and a second magnitude of the second correlation result associated with the given cell signature hypothesis. | 09-12-2013 |
20130237218 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR CELL SCANNING IN SYSTEM WITH LARGE NUMBER OF ANTENNAS - A mobile station is configured to scan cells in a wireless network. The mobile station includes at least one antenna configured to transmit and receive wireless signals. The mobile station also includes a processor coupled to the at least one antenna, the processor configured to scan for one or more neighboring base station cells in a same frequency band as a serving base station cell using one or more receive beams. The one or more receive beams used for scanning are different than receive beams used for data communication with the serving base station cell. | 09-12-2013 |
20130237219 | FREQUENCY ADJUSTMENT METHOD - A frequency adjustment method is provided for adjusting a frequency of a reference oscillating signal from an initial oscillation frequency to an adjusted oscillation frequency. The frequency adjustment method includes steps of: dividing a frequency scan section into M scan frequencies; down-converting a signal according to the M scan frequencies to obtain M down-converted signals; performing a correlation calculation operation on the M down-converted signals, respectively, to obtain M correlation results; grouping the M scan frequencies into N frequency groups each containing P selected frequencies, with the P selected frequencies corresponding to P consecutive scan frequencies; performing a group calculation on the N frequency groups, respectively, to obtain N group calculation results; and selecting a target frequency group from the N frequency groups according to the N group calculations results, and obtaining the adjusted oscillation frequency from the target frequency group. | 09-12-2013 |
20130237220 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR NETWORK CONNECTION IN PORTABLE TERMINAL - An apparatus and a method of connecting a portable terminal to a network, by which a specific network can be connected to through selection of a user, are provided. The apparatus includes a display unit for informing of a state of non-connection to a specific network and for displaying a menu item for connecting to the specific network, and a controller for controlling the portable terminal so as to search for and to connect to the specific network through selection of the menu item for connecting to the specific network when the portable terminal is not connected to the specific network. | 09-12-2013 |
20130237221 | Establishing and Maintenance of a Neighbour Relationship Between Access Nodes in a Wireless Communications Network - A method of establishing a relationship between access nodes in a wireless communications network is provided. An access node is registered with the network. Information about each access node registered with the network is then stored at a control node. A list is then compiled at the control node, which includes each access node registered with the network and the list indicates which access node is a neighbour of another access node. This neighbour list is sent from the control node to each access node in the network. When an access node detects other access nodes, this is reported to the control node, which updates the neighbour list to the access nodes. | 09-12-2013 |
20130237222 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL DEVICE AND METHOD OF RECONNECTING WITH CELL - A communication terminal device capable of increasing the success rate of reconnection while suppressing signal volume. A communication terminal ( | 09-12-2013 |
20130244647 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF MEASURING AND RESELECTING CELLS - Methods and apparatus of monitoring cells in a wireless communication system may include determining existence of a condition for performing a cell search on a frequency. In addition, the methods and apparatus may include calculating an undetected energy-related value for a hypothetical undetected cell based on a measured energy-related value of each detected cell on the frequency in response to determining the condition for performing the cell search. The methods and apparatus may further include determining whether to perform the cell search based on the undetected energy-related value and a reselection criteria. | 09-19-2013 |
20130252606 | Radio Link Monitoring in a Wireless Communication Device For an Enhanced Control Channel | 09-26-2013 |
20130252607 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DYNAMIC PILOT ACQUISITION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An access terminal configured for use in a wireless communication system utilizing discontinuous reception (DRx). To reduce power consumption, a pilot acquisition timeline may be reduced when channel conditions are favorable; and to improve call quality, the pilot acquisition timeline may be increased when channel conditions are poor. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also claimed and described. | 09-26-2013 |
20130252608 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA IN RADIO ACCESS SYSTEM THAT SUPPORTS MULTI-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY - In a radio access system for supporting multi-radio access technology (RAT), the present invention provides a method for allowing a terminal to transmit and receive data with a first base station for supporting a first RAT and a second base station for supporting a second RAT, and the method comprises the steps of: receiving, from said first base station, a first message which indicates scanning execution for said second base station; allowing said first message to include control information which is necessary for the scanning execution of said second base station, and executing the scanning for said second base station on the basis of said control information; and transmitting, to said first base station, a multi-RAT scan report message which contains the result of the scanning execution for said second base station. | 09-26-2013 |
20130260751 | BASE STATION SCANNING USING MULTIPLE RECEIVE PATHS - A communication device ( | 10-03-2013 |
20130260752 | SYSTEM AND METHODS FOR DYNAMICALLY CONFIGURIG CELL SEARCH WINDOW FOR PILOT ACQUISITION - Systems, methods, and computer program products for dynamically selecting cell search parameters by a mobile device are discussed. In one aspect, a mobile device first acquires a first radio access network (RAN) cell using a first search window associated with the first RAN cell, and then determines to acquire a second RAN cell operating at least in part in the same region as the first RAN cell. The mobile device then selects a second search window for acquiring the second RAN cell. Particularly, mobile device determines if a pilot spacing parameter for the second RAN cell is known. If the pilot spacing parameter is known, the mobile device computes the second search window as a function of the pilot spacing parameter. If the pilot spacing parameter is unknown, the mobile device selects a default value for the second search window. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also claimed and described. | 10-03-2013 |
20130260753 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND CONTROL METHOD THEREOF - A communication apparatus (receiving apparatus) configured to receive a communication parameter selects, when an access point itself is active as a providing apparatus or the communication apparatus detects an access point (active access point) that is communicatable with an active providing apparatus, the access point as the access point to be connected using wireless connection. If the communication apparatus does not detect an active access point, the communication apparatus selects an access point (setup-completed access point) which is configured with a communication parameter that is different from the one that is set at the time of initialization, as the access point to be connected using wireless connection. | 10-03-2013 |
20130273912 | Correlation Based Cell Search and Measurement for LTE and LTE-A - Some aspects of the present disclosure relate to a method for accurately detecting and measuring signals received from multiple cells surrounding a user equipment (UE) during a cell search. The method is performed by receiving a composite signal comprising an aggregate of transmissions (e.g., synchronization signals) from a plurality of base stations at a UE. A correlation-based metric describing a cell is generated by performing a cross-correlation of a transmission (e.g., synchronization signal, reference signal, etc.) from the cell with the received composite signal. The correlation-based metric of weaker cells may be modified to generate an equivalent ideal metric, also proportional to the search criteria, in which the impact of interfering signals is suppressed. By suppressing the impact of the interfering signals, the equivalent ideal metric can be used to identify a weaker target signal in light of the eclipsing, stronger signals. | 10-17-2013 |
20130273913 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR EFFICIENT WIRELESS SYSTEM SCANNING - A method for scanning for wireless systems is described. The method includes camping on a first system of a first system type. The method also includes maintaining a second system type not available list. The method additionally includes maintaining a second system type available list. The method further includes detecting a scan trigger. The method also includes determining whether the first system is in the second system type not available list. The method additionally includes scanning for second system type systems based on a timer. | 10-17-2013 |
20130281088 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DISPERSING USERS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for user distribution in a wireless communication system is provided by generating a screen for showing information regarding a lower-traffic region and displaying the screen by using a display element, wherein the generated screen includes at least one of an advertisement of a shop in the lower-traffic region, an indicator for indicating a per-cell traffic usage amount corresponding to a usage level, and a notice for recommending a medium change. | 10-24-2013 |
20130281089 | INTERFERENCE MANAGEMENT AND NETWORK PERFORMANCE OPTIMIZATION IN SMALL CELLS - A method of configuring small cell base stations in a cellular network is disclosed. A constraint on a performance-related metric associated with at least a portion of the cellular network is received. In some embodiments, the constraint on the performance-related metric comprises a constraint on a performance-related metric associated with one or more macrocells. Measurement data from one or more small cell base stations is received via a control interface. One or more optimized values of one or more parameters associated with one or more small cell base stations are searched. The searching is based at least in part on the received measurement data and subject to the constraint on the performance-related metric associated with the at least a portion of the cellular network. The one or more optimized values of the one or more parameters to the associated small cell base stations are transmitted. | 10-24-2013 |
20130281090 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An object of the present invention is to provide a communication system capable of preventing a base station device from being occupied by specific communication terminal devices and preventing a situation in which the base station device cannot accommodate other communication terminal devices. In the present invention, in Step ST | 10-24-2013 |
20130288672 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CELL INFORMATION INDICATION IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Generally, this disclosure provides apparatus and methods for improved indication of cell information in a wireless network. The cell information may include an evolved Node B (eNB) carrier type. The UE device may include a receiver circuit configured to receive a Radio Resource Control (RRC) message from an evolved Node B (eNB) of a serving cell, the RRC message comprising carrier information associated with the serving cell eNB; a processing circuit configured to extract, from the serving cell eNB carrier information: a carrier type, synchronization information and Radio Resource Management (RRM) measurement information; a synchronization circuit configured to synchronize the UE to the serving cell eNB based on the synchronization information associated with the serving cell eNB carrier information; and a signal measurement circuit configured to perform RRM signal measurements on the serving cell eNB based on the RRM measurement information associated with the serving cell eNB carrier information. | 10-31-2013 |
20130288673 | COLLABORATIVE SCHEME FOR SELECTION OF OPTIMAL ACCESSES AND SEAMLESS TRANSITION BETWEEN ACCESSES - Devices and methods are disclosed for selecting an optimal access network in a wireless communications environment, such as when offloading mobile data traffic. In various embodiments disclosed herein, a contributing device comprises processing logic configured to generate set of communication environment identification data corresponding to the location of the communication device, to generate a set of observed AN availability and communication performance data corresponding to the location of the communication device and, and to transmit the set of communication environment identification data and the set of observed communication performance data to a server. In some embodiments, the contributing device is location-aware and in some embodiments, the contributing device is location-unaware. | 10-31-2013 |
20130288674 | SYSTEM FOR WIRELESS CONNECTIVITY CONTINUITY AND QUALITY - Configurations are described for maintaining a continuity and quality of wireless signal connection between a mobile device and systems accessible through the internet. In particular, configurations are disclosed to address the challenge of a mobile device that moves through a physical environment wherein the best wireless connectivity performance is achieved by switching between available connection sources and constantly evaluating a primary connection with other available connections that may be switched in to become a new primary connection. The mobile device may be self-propelled or carried by some other mobilizing means. | 10-31-2013 |
20130288675 | SYSTEM FOR WIRELESS CONNECTIVITY CONTINUITY AND QUALITY - Configurations are described for maintaining a continuity and quality of wireless signal connection between a mobile device and systems accessible through the internet. In particular, configurations are disclosed to address the challenge of a mobile device that moves through a physical environment wherein the best wireless connectivity performance is achieved by switching between available connection sources and constantly evaluating a primary connection with other available connections that may be switched in to become a new primary connection. The mobile device may be self-propelled or carried by some other mobilizing means. | 10-31-2013 |
20130288676 | CONTROLLED ACCESS TO A WIRELESS NETWORK - Various arrangements for permitting a wireless device occasional access to a wireless network are described. Some arrangements for assigning a single MSISDN to multiple wireless devices are described. In such arrangements, the wireless devices may be associated with different visitor location registers. In some arrangements, a wireless device-initiated bearer service is initiated based on input from a remote system. In some arrangements, a wireless device is authenticated based on whether data needs to be sent to and/or received from the wireless device. | 10-31-2013 |
20130288677 | CAMPING IN AN EXCLUSIVE CELL - In a mobile communications system exclusive location areas comprising exclusive cells are defined in order to separate cells from the mobile stations not belonging to the user group allowed to camp in the cell and still to allow emergency calls for all mobile stations in these cells. During location update it is checked whether the cell belongs to an exclusive location area ( | 10-31-2013 |
20130295925 | Carrier Detection and Parallel GSM Cell Search in Multimode Terminals - A wireless communication apparatus is arranged to detect, among a plurality of modulated carrier signals of different frequencies, at least one of the modulated carrier signals modulated with a tone burst. A receiver provides a composite signal comprising the plurality of modulated carrier signals received simultaneously. An ADC generates samples of the composite signal, and the samples of the composite signal are divided into a plurality of blocks. The samples of each block are transformed into frequency domain components, and the frequency domain components of each block are divided into a plurality of groups, each group corresponding to a range of frequencies occupied by a different one of the modulated carrier signals. Tone burst detection is performed on each group, and it is determined which of the modulated carrier signals is modulated with the tone burst, according to which of the groups the tone burst is detected in. | 11-07-2013 |
20130295926 | Method and Device for Processing Data in Mobile Communication Network - A method and a device for processing data in a mobile communication network are provided, wherein a deployment information is distributed within a coverage area of a wide area system. Furthermore, a communication system is suggested including said device. | 11-07-2013 |
20130295927 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR USE IN CONTROLLING WIRELESS TRANSCEIVER OPERATION IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A mobile device operates for communications via a first wireless network with use of a first transceiver. The device performs scanning operations with use of a second transceiver for identifying a set of cell IDs corresponding to a plurality of stations of one or more second wireless networks. The device stores the set of cell IDs in association with an ID of the first wireless network. While operating for communications with use of the second transceiver, the device maintains the first transceiver in a low power state. The device performs scanning operations with use of the second transceiver for identifying a current set of cell IDs, and compares the cell IDs of the current set with cell IDs of the stored set. The device maintains the first transceiver in the low power state or enables its operation based on the comparison. | 11-07-2013 |
20130295928 | USER TERMINAL AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A user terminal that is capable of performing communications according to a radio communication protocol of a first radio communication system and a radio communication protocol of a second radio communication system and includes a measured band specification unit that specifies a measured frequency band, whose communication quality is to be measured, based on frequency information indicating frequency bands used by the second radio communication system and transmitted from a first base station conforming to the first radio communication system; a cell search control unit that controls a process of measuring the communication quality of the measured frequency band; a target band setting unit that sets a target frequency band based on whether the communication quality of the measured frequency band is greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold; and a cell switch control unit that controls a process of switching to the target frequency band. | 11-07-2013 |
20130303163 | Method and Apparatus for Wireless Communication Using Location Based Information - A method and apparatus is disclosed whereby location based information (LBI) is used to make access and routing decisions within a network. Such LBI is sent from mobile devices to the core network when the mobile device registers with the network and is updated periodically. Over time, this collected LBI data represents the position of mobile devices over time and periodic patterns of usage in different geographic areas. When a network receives an indication that a mobile device requires registration with the network, the network determines as a function of said LBI, a desired network access technology to use to connect said mobile device with the network. Instructions are then transmitted to the mobile device to establish a connection using said desired network access technology and the device is registered with the network. Dynamically updated LBI information from mobile devices is also used for IP network routing optimization. | 11-14-2013 |
20130310030 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR ACCESS NETWORK DISCOVERY AND SELECTION - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for access network discovery and selection are disclosed. According to one aspect, a system for access network discovery and selection includes an access network discovery and selection function (ANDSF) network element for identifying to a user equipment (UE) an access network through which the UE can connect to a core network, the ANDSF including an interface for communicating with nodes in a core network. The ANDSF is configured to receive information from a node in the core network and perform an access network discovery or selection operation based at least in part on the received information. | 11-21-2013 |
20130310031 | METHOD FOR SELECTING A NETWORK BY A TERMINAL AND DUAL-STANDBY TERMINAL - Embodiments provide a method for selecting a network by a terminal and a dual-standby terminal. The method includes: enabling, by a first network processing module, a circuit switched (CS) domain to preferably camp on a first network, and executing a CS domain service; enabling, by a second network processing module, a packet switched (PS) domain to preferably camp on a second network, and executing a PS domain service; wherein, signal quality of the first network is better than that of the second network, and a data transmission rate of the second network is higher than that of the first network; and closing the second network processing module when no PS domain service exists in a set duration. These embodiments help improve the service quality and reduce power consumption of the terminal. | 11-21-2013 |
20130310032 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTING A BASE STATION TRANSCEIVER SYSTEM BASED ON SERVICE COMMUNICATION TYPE - Techniques for use in selecting a base station transceiver system for communication with a mobile station are described. The mobile station is connected to a first base station transceiver system, and scans to identify a second base station transceiver system for communication. The mobile station further identifies that the second base station transceiver system provides a predetermined communication service, and that the first base station transceiver system fails to provide the predetermined communication service. In response to identifying, the mobile station causes the second base station transceiver system to be selected for communication over the first base station transceiver system even if the signal quality of the second base station transceiver system is worse than that of the first base station transceiver system. Identifying whether the first and second base station transceiver system provide the predetermined communication service is based on parameters transmitted from the first and second base station transceiver systems. | 11-21-2013 |
20130310033 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DETECTING A TARGET CELL IN A CELLULAR NETWORK - A method for detecting a target cell by a mobile device, the method comprising storing traversed paths of the mobile device, the stored traversed paths each comprising information to identify cells in a sequence of cells traversed by the mobile device referenced to the target cell, compiling information identifying cells traversed by the device in real time to produce current path information, comparing the current path information to the stored traversed paths and inferring from the comparison a relative proximity of the mobile device to the target cell and adapting a search for the target cell based on the relative proximity. | 11-21-2013 |
20130324117 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING CONTROL INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods, a Base Station (BS), and a User Equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system for transmitting and receiving control information are provided. The method for transmitting control information by a BS in a wireless communication system includes receiving information related to a signal transmitted by a second BS that the second BS which is a neighboring BS of the first BS, determining whether a second UE using an identical resource to that used by a first UE included in a cell of the first BS exists within a cell of the second BS based on the received information, when the second UE exists, generating control information for controlling a signal transmitted to the second UE by the second BS based on the received information, and transmitting the generated control information to the first UE through a control channel. | 12-05-2013 |
20130324118 | METHOD OF BARRING NETWORK ACCESS IN MOBILE DEVICE, MOBILE DEVICE, AND PROCESSOR USED IN MOBILE DEVICE - When a network is in a state of requiring some sort of access barring, a reference value notified to a mobile device is determined to indicate a value in which an access of a certain mobile device is denied while an access of another mobile device is allowed. When an own device has a special type access class, it is determined that an access is allowed The appropriateness of an access is determined according to designation from the network when the own device has the special type access class, and when the own device does not have the special type access class, it is determined that an access is denied. | 12-05-2013 |
20130324119 | Method, Device and System for Controlling UE to Take Measurements - The disclosure provides a method, device and system for controlling UE to take measurements, the method comprising: a radio network controller sending an ANR measurement configuration message to UE, wherein the information carries the maximum time that the UE is to take ANR measurements; the UE receiving the ANR measurement configuration message, taking the ANR measurements, timing a measurement period, and storing the measurement results; when the measurement period reaches the maximum time, the UE deleting the ANR measurement configuration message. The disclosure solves the problem of lack of specific procedure about whether UE needs to continue taking measurements and how the measurements should be taken when there is no qualified information after a long period of measurement, thereby preventing the UE from constantly being in a measurement mode, and saving resources. | 12-05-2013 |
20130331097 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISCOVERING NEIGHBOR NODES IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method for processing a first node to configure a neighbor network in a wireless communication system including the first node and one or more second nodes neighboring the first node. The method includes generating discovery information; and broadcasting the generated discovery information to one or more of the second nodes. The discovery information includes information of the first node, an indicator indicating whether to receive the discovery information and accept the relay of the received discovery information to other nodes, and a hop limit indicating the number of available relays of the discovery information. A value of the indicator is set through an input of a user. | 12-12-2013 |
20130331098 | Automatically Determining and Alerting Users to Available Wireless Networks - Automatically determining and alerting a user to available wireless networks. Initially, the method may automatically determine that one or more wireless networks are available to a wireless device at a location. The method may determine if the wireless device has been present at the first location for more than a threshold amount of time, e.g., based on periodic determination of the available wireless networks to the wireless device. Based on the wireless device being present at the first location for more than the threshold amount of time, an alert may be automatically displayed to the user on a display of the wireless device. The alert may indicate at least one wireless network of the one or more wireless networks at the first location. The wireless device may connect to wireless network indicated by the alert in response to user input. | 12-12-2013 |
20130331099 | METHOD OF BARRING ACCESS TO NETWORK, MOBILE DEVICE FOR THE METHOD, AND PROCESSOR USED IN MOBILE DEVICE - When a network is in a state of requiring any sort of access barring, determining whether a special type access class is included as an access class to which an own device belongs, determining appropriateness of an access by referring to, from barring information, a first barring information for designating whether a mobile device belonging to each access class is subject to access barring when having determined that the special type access class is included, and determining the appropriateness of an access by referring to, from the barring information, second barring information indicating a value serving as a reference for determining the appropriateness of an access according to a relationship between a numerical value generated by each mobile device and the reference indicated by the second barring information when having determined that the special type access class is included. | 12-12-2013 |
20130331100 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF PROVIDING SMALL CELL INFORMATION TO USER EQUIPMENTS IN A HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - A method and a system for providing small cell information to a user equipment in a heterogeneous network environment are provided. A user equipment sends a request to a network entity for providing availability of one or more small cells in its proximity. The network entity obtains location information associated with the user equipment and retrieves a small cell map displaying the one or more small cells from a map database. Then, the network entity determines whether the one or more small cells are in the proximity of the user equipment using the small cell map. Accordingly, the network entity provides a notification indicating availability of the one or more small cells to the user equipment. Moreover, the user equipment initiates a scan for the one or more small cells based on the received notification. | 12-12-2013 |
20130337806 | DEVICE, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF SCANNING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION CHANNELS - Some demonstrative embodiments include devices, systems and/or methods of scanning wireless communication channels. For example, a device may include a controller to receive one or more energy indications corresponding to one or more frequency ranges within a wireless communication frequency band, wherein a frequency range of the frequency ranges at least partially covers a plurality of wireless communication frequency channels, and wherein the controller is to scan for at least one wireless communication beacon over one or more channels of the plurality of wireless communication frequency channels, if an energy indication corresponding to the frequency range indicates wireless communication activity over the frequency range. | 12-19-2013 |
20140004856 | OUT-OF-SERVICE SCANNING IN MOBILE EQUIPMENT HAVING TWO OR MORE MODEMS | 01-02-2014 |
20140004857 | Transfer of Access Restriction Information Between a Radio Network Node and a User Equipment | 01-02-2014 |
20140018068 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING PAGING DELAY WITH TIMING ARRANGEMENTS AND DUAL PAGE SCANS - Systems and methods for controlling a delay associated with paging a remote device. In one implementation, a paging device arranges page operations such that if one of two consecutive page scans performed by a remote device occurs during a response scan, the other page scan occurs during the transmission of a page. In another implementation, a device scanning for a page arranges page scans such that if one of two consecutive page scans occurs during a page response scan, the other page scan occurs during the transmission of a page. In another implementation, a device scanning for a page performs a series of sets of separate page scans, wherein the time interval between two of separate scans in a set is less than the time interval between adjacent sets. The page scans in a set are configured to ensure that one of them occurs during the transmission of a page. | 01-16-2014 |
20140018069 | System and Method for Facilitating Accelerated Network Selection in a Radio Network Environment - A method for facilitating accelerated network selection on a wireless user equipment (UE) device includes storing information regarding power-off time and power-off location as the UE device is about to enter a power-off condition. Upon power-up, the method further includes computing an estimated distance that the UE device has traveled while in the power-off condition using the stored information and a current time, defining a boundary that lies the estimated distance from a location indicated by the power-off location, for a plurality of regions lying within the boundary, logically sequencing acquisition records that are associated with the regions in a system acquisition database structure based on the regions nearness to the boundary, and locating a network via scanning using scanning data obtained from the logically sequenced acquisition records. | 01-16-2014 |
20140018070 | ROBUST FREQUENCY SCAN IN PRESENCE OF STRONG ADJACENT SYSTEMS - A method for performing a frequency scan in presence of an adjacent jammer signal is provided. The method can include a wireless communication device determining an occurrence of an acquisition (ACQ) failure on a candidate system in a frequency scan candidate list (FSCL) generated based on a first frequency scan; identifying the candidate system as a jammer signal in response to the ACQ failure; suppressing the jammer signal to derive a jammer suppressed signal; and performing a second frequency scan based at least in part on the jammer suppressed signal. | 01-16-2014 |
20140018071 | Scheduling in Coordinated Multi-Point Transmission Scheme - Methods, a user equipment, a base station and a computer program product for managing assignments between user equipments and cooperation areas are provided. The present invention discloses receiving, at a base station belonging to a cooperation area, a connection request message from a user equipment to be connected to the cooperation area. The connection request message includes a parameter indicating preference information. It is determined, on the basis of the parameter, whether the user equipment is allowed to connect to the cooperation area. A connection acknowledgement/non-acknowledgement message is forwarded from the base station to the user equipment. The present invention discloses acquiring information about reachable cooperation areas, determining preference information with respect to the reachable cooperation areas, sending a connection request message including preference information to a reachable cooperation area, and selecting the cooperation area to which the connection request message was sent if a connection acknowledgement message is received. | 01-16-2014 |
20140018072 | Method and Terminal for Cell Search - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method and terminal for a cell search that are related to the communications field. The terminal includes: two spaces, a first processing module, a first processing unit, and a second processing unit. The present invention can ensure that a cell search result exists in each time unit, thereby accelerating an initial search and shortening an initial search delay. | 01-16-2014 |
20140018073 | SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR INDICATING CELL IDENTIFIERS - The technology described relates to cell identifiers in which a cell provides two reporting cell identifiers for user equipments (UEs) taking cell measurements. In a non-limiting example embodiment, a secondary synchronization channel (S-SCH) is used to transmit two short cell identities. In this case, a cell uses two sets of signature sequences, one corresponding to the old reporting cell identifier and one corresponding to the new reporting cell identifier. | 01-16-2014 |
20140024369 | Method and Device for Discovering UE, First UE and Base Station - The present invention discloses a method and a device for discovering a UE, a first UE and a base station. The method for discovering a UE comprises the steps of: monitoring, by a first UE, an uplink signal in a mobile communication system; extracting, by the first UE, first information for identifying a UE that is to be discovered and that transmits the uplink signal from the monitored uplink signal; transmitting, by the first UE, a monitoring report message carrying the first information to a base station, acquiring, by the first UE, the device ID of the UE to be discovered in accordance with the monitoring report response message and completing the discovery process of the UE. According to the present invention, it is able to discover the UE without changing a channel system of an existing system and occupying time-frequency resources of the system. | 01-23-2014 |
20140031036 | Method and Apparatus for Avoiding In-Device Coexistence Interference - A method, system and device are provided for avoiding in-device coexistence interference between different radio technologies deployed in adjacent bands on the same device by controlling and separating the LTE signaling and the non-LTE signaling using dedicated time intervals to separate LTE signaling from non-LTE signaling. In addition, coexistence mode handover procedures are provided which use threshold-based triggering events to avoid coexistence interference and to prevent ping-pong effects by establishing a “keeping time” parameter so that a non-interfering network node does not switch back to an interfering network node after handoff. Coexistence interference is also avoided by providing a hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) mechanism which accounts for coexistence interference by providing a fixed or variable on-interval parameter and an activity parameter indicating whether non-LTE activity is present to maximize a time interval for non-LTE devices without interference from LTE activity on the same device. | 01-30-2014 |
20140038597 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR DETERMINING RESELECTION PARAMETERS FOR DETECTED CELLS - The present disclosure presents a method and apparatus for determining reselection parameters for detected cells. For example, the method may include receiving system information block (SIB) data associated with one or more cells in a neighbor cell list (NCL). In such example, the SIB data may include a ranking offset parameter associated with each of the NCL cells. Furthermore, such an example method may include detecting a cell that is not in the NCL, determining a reselection ranking value associated with each of the NCL cells, the detected cell and the serving cell. In addition, in some examples, such method may include ranking the one or more NCL cells, the detected cell and the serving cell in a ranking list based on the reselection ranking values. As such, reselection parameters for detected cells may be determined. | 02-06-2014 |
20140038598 | SMALL CELL DETECTION METHOD AND APPARATUSES USING THE SAME - The present disclosure provides a method of performing a small cell detection, a small cell base station using the same method, and a mobile electronic device using the same method. The method and the device would perform functions including a user equipment (UE) detecting a discovery signal from a small cell base station (BS) over a schedulable resource in a Macro cell frequency, the user equipment transmitting a detection report to a Macro cell BS in response to detecting the discovery signal, the UE receiving a measurement command to measure a small cell BS in the small cell frequency, and generating and transmitting the measurement report after measuring the small cell BS in the small cell frequency. | 02-06-2014 |
20140038599 | Wireless Femtocell Setup Methods and Apparatus - Methods and apparatus that enable a wireless femtocell to operate in its designated frequency so as to minimize interference between the wireless femtocell and neighboring base stations (and other femtocells or nomadic cells). In one exemplary embodiment, the femtocell cell comprises a UMTS (Universal Mobile Telecommunications System) femtocell which has the ability to scan the air interface in a manner similar to that associated with a UE in order to identify unallocated resources within the wireless network, and subsequently request access for the unallocated resources. Business methods useful in combination with the aforementioned methods and apparatus are also disclosed. | 02-06-2014 |
20140045494 | Control Mechanism for Autonomous Mobility of Terminal Device - There is provided a mechanism for controlling an autonomous mobility procedure of a user equipment. A list of candidate communication cells usable as target cells for the autonomous mobility procedure conducted by the UE is transmitted by the network to the UE. Furthermore, when the list is sent to the communication element, preparation information is sent to the candidate communication cells contained in the list sent to the user equipment for preparing the candidate communication cells for a potential autonomous mobility procedure conducted by the user equipment. When a cell is detected, the user equipment uses the list to determine whether the detected cell is a candidate cell for the autonomous mobility procedure. When the cell receives an access request, it uses the preparation information for determining that the requesting UE is conducting an autonomous mobility procedure, and obtains configuration date for immediately providing service to the user equipment. | 02-13-2014 |
20140045495 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CELL SEARCH AND SELECTION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Systems and methodologies are described herein that facilitate improved cell search and selection in a wireless communication system. For example, a terminal as described herein can utilize one or more Closed Subscriber Group (CSG)-specific offset and/or hysteresis parameters as described herein to increase the amount of time on which the terminal is allowed to camp on a desirable cell. Additionally, specialized reselection timing can be employed as described herein to increase a delay associated with selecting a Home Node B (HNB) or Home Evolved Node B (HeNB) cell, thereby reducing power consumption associated with rapid cell reselection operations in a densely populated network environment. Further, a two-step reselection process can be performed as described herein in the context of selecting a frequency for cell reselection, thereby mitigating the effects of rapid reselection between cells and/or frequencies due to CSG cell prioritization. | 02-13-2014 |
20140051435 | CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENT AND A METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION NETWORK SEARCH AND SIGNAL POWER MEASUREMENT - A circuit arrangement is provided. The circuit arrangement may include: a processing circuit configured to receive a pre-processed signal at a first data rate during a first time period, the processing circuit further configured to perform a communications network search by processing the pre-processed signal at a first processing clock frequency during the first time period, and to perform the communications network search by processing the pre-processed signal at a second processing clock frequency during a second time period, wherein the second time period commences after the first time period, and wherein the second processing clock frequency is greater than the first processing clock frequency. | 02-20-2014 |
20140051436 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR IDENTIFYING LOCAL AREA NETWORKS | 02-20-2014 |
20140051437 | PLMN SPECIFIC IMPLICIT REJECT FEATURE FOR CONTROLLING MOBILE STATION SERVICE ESTABLISHMENT - A method is provided by a network node for restricting access attempts by a plurality of mobile stations (MSs). The network node supports a Multi-Operator Core Network (MOCN) having a plurality of Public Land Mobile Networks (PLMNs). The method includes determining that an overload condition is occurring. Responsive to determining that the overload condition is occurring, an Implicit Reject indication is communicated within one or more Access Grant Channel (AGCH) messages or Paging Channel (PCH) messages to the MSs identifying that an Implicit Reject feature is active to restrict access attempts to the network node. A broadcast message is communicated to the MSs containing information identifying at least one of the PLMNs to which the Implicit Reject feature applies. Any of the MSs registered with the at least one of the PLMNs identified by the information can restrict their access attempts to the network node. A corresponding method by a MS and corresponding network nodes and MSs are provided. | 02-20-2014 |
20140051438 | METHOD, TERMINAL DEVICE, NETWORK-SIDE DEVICE, AND COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM FOR MANAGING POWER SUPPLY - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method, a terminal device, a network-side device, and a communications system for managing a power supply. The method includes: determining a terminal power consumption level according to remaining power or terminal settings, where the terminal power consumption level is one of at least two power consumption levels. In the embodiments of the present invention, different power consumption levels are applied according to different remaining power of a terminal power supply or terminal settings, thereby adapting to differentiated power consumption requirements and improving the power supply utilization efficiency of a terminal. | 02-20-2014 |
20140057629 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR SEARCHING AND SELECTING NETWORK - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method, an apparatus, and a system for searching and selecting a network, relate to the field of radio transmission, and can reduce the execution time and cost for searching and selecting a network. The method according to the present invention includes: acquiring information about a current location of a terminal and radio network information about the location; if it is obtained that multiple radio networks exist at the current location of the terminal according to the radio network information about the location, selecting a network among all radio networks that exist at the current location of the terminal according to a preset network selection rule; and camping on the selected radio network. The present invention is applicable to network search and selection. | 02-27-2014 |
20140066058 | OPTIMIZATION ON NETWORK ASSISTED PROXIMITY SERVICES DISCOVERY MANAGEMENT - Methods, apparatuses, and computer program products for network assisted ProSe discovery management are provided. One method includes establishing, by a network element, a discovery context of a user equipment, and transmitting a discovery context establishment request comprising beacon information on at least one other user that a user of the user equipment is interested in discovering. | 03-06-2014 |
20140066059 | METHOD AND APPARATUS DETERMINING WHITE SPACE INFORMATION - A method, apparatus and computer program product are provided to obtain white space information regarding one or more white space channels that are available at the current location of a mobile terminal and one or more service providers that offer connectivity utilizing the white space spectrum. In the context of a method performed, for example, by an access network discovery and selection function device, a location of a mobile terminal is determined and, based on the location of the mobile terminal, white space information is obtained. The method also causes the white space information to be provided to the mobile terminal, such as by utilizing a device management protocol. A corresponding apparatus and computer program product are also provided. | 03-06-2014 |
20140066060 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO SCAN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SPECTRUM - Methods and apparatus are disclosed to scan a wireless communication spectrum. An example method disclosed herein includes causing a first scanner to determine, for a frequency of a wireless communication spectrum, a decoded base station identifier, causing a second scanner to determine a plurality of signal strengths at the frequency without determining a base station identifier, and determining that the base station identifier is associated with a subset of the plurality of signal strengths by comparing at least one of timestamps and locations associated with the base station identifier and the plurality of signal strengths. | 03-06-2014 |
20140066061 | SCHEDULING PRIORITIZED NETWORK SEARCHES FOR A MULTI-MODE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A multi-mode communication device having a scan optimizer capable of prioritizing scan frequencies for different radio access technologies (RATs) during a network search. The scan frequency prioritization may be based on various network coverage considerations associated with RAT availability, RAT density within a region, geographic location, historic attachment for the multi-mode device, an operation mode of the multi-mode device, etc. The multimode device can utilize its scan optimizer to generate an optimized scan schedule to be employed for a limited duration during a network search to improve its likelihood of success in detecting and/or attaching to a network associated with a prioritized RAT. A default scan schedule having equal scan frequency prioritization can be employed by the multi-mode device at a time when the limited duration of the optimized scan schedule expires and no networks associated with a prioritized RAT have been acquired. | 03-06-2014 |
20140073321 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CACHING LOCAL MASHUP SERVICE PARAMETERS - An approach is provided for caching parameters of local mashup services. One or more devices and/or service providers determine one or more mashup services, one or more trigger conditions associated with the one or more mashup services, and/or one or more actions associated with the one or more mashup services. Further, the one or more devices cache the one or more mashup services, the one or more trigger conditions, and/or the one or more actions at one or more local caches. Furthermore, the one or more devices and/or service providers determine one or more results of one or more queries for the one or more mashup services, the one or more trigger conditions, and/or the one or more actions from the one or more local caches. | 03-13-2014 |
20140080481 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ADVERTISING AND COMMUNICATING WITHIN A NEIGHBORHOOD AWARE NETWORK - In a particular embodiment, a method includes receiving, by a first mobile device, a first discovery message via a network advertisement protocol common to a plurality of mobile devices. The first discovery message includes information specific to a mobile device cluster that is a subset of the plurality of mobile devices. The method further includes using the information to communicate with at least a second mobile device of the mobile device cluster using a second cluster protocol that is different than the network advertisement protocol. | 03-20-2014 |
20140087727 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SCANNING MULTI-MODE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION ENVIRONMENTS - A method and apparatus adaptively scan communication channels to find a channel having a desired attribute such as being usable for communication with a home network in one of a plurality of communication modes. A first scan of a first set of channels is performed, and attributes are assigned to channels. If a channel having the desired attribute is not found, the attributes are used to configure a second scan of a second set of channels using a second scan mode, such that the expected amount of resources consumed in the second scan is reduced, for example by scanning channels more likely to be usable for communication first. The second scan of a second set of channels is performed, and additional attributes are assigned to channels. If a channel having the desired attribute is found during the first or second scan, the scan may terminate. | 03-27-2014 |
20140094167 | SMART SEARCHING OF WIRELESS DEVICES USING DEVICE LOCATION INFORMATION - Particular embodiments described herein provide for an apparatus, such as a wireless electronic device, that includes a memory element configured to store electronic code, a processor operable to execute instructions associated with the electronic code, and at least one module. The at least one module is configured to receive first location information identifying a first location associated with an electronic device. The at least one module is further configured to receive first connection location information indicative of a second location of the electronic device at a time of connection with a first wireless device. The at least one module is further configured to evaluate for a presence of the first wireless device when the first location is within a predetermined distance of the second location. | 04-03-2014 |
20140094168 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE STATION, BASE STATION, AND MEASUREMENT METHOD - A mobile communication system including a base station which sets a plurality of cells and a mobile station is provided. In the mobile communication system, the base station notifies the mobile station in communication through a first cell among the plurality of cells, of the identification information of at least one cell among the plurality of cells, which can be used for communication with the mobile station and instructs the mobile station to measure a reception state of radio signals. The mobile station detects, in response to the instruction from the base station, a cell for transmitting radio signals which the mobile station is able to receive, and when identification information of the detected cell matches any of the identification information of the at least one cell, the mobile station notifies the base station of the identification information of the detected cell. | 04-03-2014 |
20140094169 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication device and method provide a way for multiple transmitting base stations that share a same cell ID to transmit a predetermined signal to a user equipment that allows the user equipment to subsequently communicate with the most effective subset of said multiple transmitting base stations for that particular user equipment. The user equipment receives the predetermined signal from all of the base stations, and then provides feedback regarding the quality of signal reception. Based on the feedback, a message format is created that informs the user equipment which base stations are included in a subset of base stations that will be used to communicate with the user equipment. | 04-03-2014 |
20140099946 | SMART ANTENNA FOR INTERFERENCE REJECTION WITH ENHANCED TRACKING - A smart antenna system is provided for communicating wireless signals between a mobile device and a plurality of different fixed base stations using one or more channels and one or more beams. The smart antenna system includes a control subsystem, a radio transceiver and an antenna subsystem coupled to each other and adapted to perform scanning of one or more combinations of base stations, channels and beams using one or more test links established with one or more of the fixed base stations where the test links use at least some of the channels and the beams. A first combination of base station, channel and beam is selected based on the scanning; and a first operating link is established for transmitting a wireless signal to the selected base station using the selected channel and beam. | 04-10-2014 |
20140099947 | Smart Antenna For Interference Rejection With Enhanced Tracking - A smart antenna system is provided for communicating wireless signals between a mobile device and a plurality of different fixed base stations using one or more channels and one or more beams. The smart antenna system includes a control subsystem, a radio transceiver and an antenna subsystem coupled to each other and adapted to perform scanning of one or more combinations of base stations, channels and beams using one or more test links established with one or more of the fixed base stations where the test links use at least some of the channels and the beams. A first combination of base station, channel and beam is selected based on the scanning; and a first operating link is established for transmitting a wireless signal to the selected base station using the selected channel and beam. | 04-10-2014 |
20140099948 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETECTING AND MEASURING FOR HOME NODE-BS - Methods and apparatus are disclosed for a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) to detect and perform measurements with respect to Home Node-Bs (HNB) and Home evolved Node-Bs (H(e)NB) (collectively “HNB”). The methods may include generating and transmitting a request for a measurement configuration that may include gap allocations to detect and measure a primary scrambling code or a physical cell identity of a target HNB for at least one frequency or radio access technology (RAT). The request may be in response to the WTRU entering a HNB cell for which the WTRU has stored fingerprint information and whose closed subscriber group ID is in the WTRU's whitelist. The network may configure the WTRU to measure the requested frequency or RAT in response to the proximity report/request. Methods are described for releasing the measurement configuration. | 04-10-2014 |
20140099949 | METHODS AND ARRANGEMENTS FOR HANDLING AN IDENTIFICATION OF AN AVAILABLE COVERAGE IN A CELLULAR NETWORK - A method in a base station for handling an identification of an available coverage in a cellular network is provided. The base station serves a first cell in the cellular network. The base station identifies a coverage of a second cell in the cellular network. When the second cell is in the active mode it overlaps a portion of the first cell. When the second cell is in the sleep mode, the base station transmits via the first cell a message to a user equipment located in the portion. The message comprises an indication of the coverage of the second cell, thereby enabling the user equipment to identify the coverage of the second cell as an available coverage for handling of an upcoming data transmission. | 04-10-2014 |
20140099950 | METHOD AND USER EQUIPMENT FOR PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATION - The exemplary embodiments relate to a method for use in a user equipment (UE), and a cellular infrastructure, for achieving synchronization between UEs for a peer-to-peer or device-to-device (D2D) communication. The method comprising: receiving at a UE a synchronization message from a cell or a RAT or a source of the cellular infrastructure; assembling a message including a list comprising information on the source or cell or RAT, sending the assembled message to a another UE and initiate synchronization between involved UEs based on the information in the assembled message. | 04-10-2014 |
20140120909 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR SELECTING A VISITED NETWORK - Device located in a mobile telephony infrastructure, that is capable of selecting a visited network and/or a host network, and of connecting a mobile terminal to said visited network selected via said selected host network, wherein said device is located in said mobile terminal, and wherein the selection is dynamically carried out through a sequencing according to at least one criterion. | 05-01-2014 |
20140135001 | Fast Cell Search - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate searches for a cell in a wireless communication environment. A mobile device can employ a searcher that can detect timing information respectively associated with PSCs and cells to determine the cell with the highest correlation. The searcher can detect SSCs, which can include detecting associated phase information, to determine the SSC with the highest correlation, CP length, and/or other information to facilitate identifying a desired cell having the strongest signal to establish communication between the mobile device and the desired cell. PSCs respectively associated with cells can have different positions in the symbol sequences, and SSCs can respectively be phase shifted at different angles to facilitate detection and identification of a cell(s), where a PSC can be utilized as a phase reference by the associated SSC. | 05-15-2014 |
20140141775 | METHOD OR SYSTEM TO SEARCH WHEN MOVING OR STANDING STILL FOR 802.11 WIRELESS NETWORKS, TO THEN SEND OR RECEIVE GPS AND OTHER INFORMATION USING 802.11 WIRELESS NETWORKS TO A WEB PORTAL OR SOFTWARE APPLICATION - A method or system that when moving or standing still searches and connects to 802.11 wireless networks to then send GPS or other information and receive data or software or information from an internet web service or software application. The method or device or software searches for many types of 802.11 Wi-Fi networks, then connects to send and receive information to a web service or software application. This method or system describes four of the most common types of 802.11 network connections in claims | 05-22-2014 |
20140141776 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SELECTING NETWORK IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for a Mobile Station (MS) to select a network in a communication network are provided. The method includes searching for a first network, and searching for a second network that has a lower priority than the first network while searching for the first network. | 05-22-2014 |
20140141777 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF IMPROVING PROXIMITY SERVICE DISCOVERY IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus are disclosed to provide proximity service discovery in a wireless communication system. The method includes receiving, from a first user equipment, a discovery signal by a second user equipment for discovering or being discovered. The method further includes transmitting, from the second user equipment, a discovery check signal to a network in response to the discovery signal to check a discovery result. | 05-22-2014 |
20140141778 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING NEIGHBOR RELATION - The present invention is applicable to the field of communications, and provides a method, an apparatus and a system for establishing a neighbor relation. The method includes: receiving a discovery message sent by a long term evolution element management system LTE EMS for discovering an LTE to 3rd generation mobile communication 3G neighbor relation; obtaining, according to the discovery message, an LTE-3G neighbor relation policy corresponding to the LTE-to-3G neighbor relation among locally stored LTE-3G neighbor relation policies; and establishing a 3G-to-LTE neighbor relation if the policy allows a bidirectional neighbor relation. The technical solutions provided in the present invention have the advantage that a network terminal has few limitations. | 05-22-2014 |
20140141779 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING A COOPERATIVE OPERATION BETWEEN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS AND DEVICE FOR SAME - The present invention relates to a method for performing a cooperative operation between heterogeneous networks and a device for same. A method for a first type base station to perform a cooperative operation between heterogeneous networks in a wireless communication system includes receiving a downlink synchronization channel from at least one second type base station; obtaining an identifier (ID) of the second type base station by using the received downlink synchronization channel; and transmitting at least one of a channel number and a bandwidth of a center frequency of the first type base station and the cell ID of the second type base station to a server. The first type base station and the second type base station use different wireless communication methods or wireless access methods. | 05-22-2014 |
20140148156 | APPARATUS, COMPUTER PROGRAMS AND METHODS FOR ENABLING FILTERING OF NEIGHBOR CELLS OR FREQUENCIES - A serving cell sends to user equipments (UEs) indications of frequency bands supported by neighbor cells/frequencies, at least one individual neighbor cell/frequency supporting a plurality of frequency bands. The neighbor cells/frequencies are filtered by the UE to retain only those that are indicated to support a frequency band or frequency bands which are also supported by the UE. The sent indications comprise, for each respective neighbor cell/frequency, one absolute radio frequency channel number (ARFCN) associated with the respective neighbor cell/frequency and the frequency band or bands associated with the respective neighbor cell/frequency. Examples are given of various system information blocks for sending the frequency band indications to the UE. In one embodiment they are arranged in an information element IE having an entry for each of the neighbor cells/frequencies and a list of frequency bands for each entry. | 05-29-2014 |
20140155060 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SIGNAL SCANNING FOR MULTIMODE RECEIVER - In a signal processing method, an input signal is provided at an input to a receiver. A bandwidth of the receiver is controlled to a predetermined wideband setting. For band in a plurality of frequency bands, the input signal is processed at the receiver with a mixer, an amplifier, and a filter, to generate a first processed signal, and a power spectral density of the processed signal is generated over that frequency band, to provide a frequency domain signal for that frequency band. Based on the frequency domain signals corresponding to each frequency band in the plurality of frequency bands, a frequency domain representation of the processed signal is reconstructed over a reconstruction band having a bandwidth larger than the predetermined wideband setting. Based on the reconstructed frequency domain representation, a spectral component is identified corresponding to at least one cellular telephony access mode. | 06-05-2014 |
20140155061 | Enhanced Higher Priority Public Land Mobile Network (HPPLMN) Search - Embodiments provide an enhanced approach for Higher Priority Public Land Mobile Network (HPPLMN) search. In one embodiment, information acquired during a search (for each detected cell per frequency channel) is saved in a database and persisted in the database based on a validity time. An idle mode-to-connected mode transition by the UE, rather than aborting the search, only suspends the search for it to be resumed at a later time upon a connected mode-to-idle mode transition by the UE. Saved search data that is valid at the time of the transition is maintained and the frequency channel(s) associated with it is not re-searched in the current search. In an embodiment, the search is resumed based on weights that are associated with frequency channels, where a weight indicates a priority for visiting the frequency channel. | 06-05-2014 |
20140155062 | Method and Apparatus for Selecting Carrier in Wireless Communication System - A method for selecting a carrier in a wireless communication system is provided. A home eNodeB (HeNB) receives a carrier information response message as a response of the carrier information request message, and selects a primary cell (PCell) of the HeNB based on the received information on carriers used by the pico eNB. The carrier information response message includes the information on carriers used by a pico eNB. | 06-05-2014 |
20140155063 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND BASE STATION DEVICE - Provided are a wireless communication system and a base station device. An entrance cell base station ( | 06-05-2014 |
20140162635 | Traffic Steering Across Cell-Types - Concepts and technologies are described herein for traffic steering across cell-types. According to one aspect disclosed herein, a mobile device enables radio access network (“RAN”) selection across multiple cell-types, including, but not limited to, macro cells, metro cells, femto cells, pico cells, and the like, based upon network conditions, local device information, and/or other information such as policies and user profiles. The local device information can include, but is not limited to, mobility state information, performance measurement information, battery utilization information, channel quality information, and user overrides. | 06-12-2014 |
20140162636 | Device-Based Idle Mode Load Balancing - Concepts and technologies are described herein for device-based idle mode load balancing. According to one aspect disclosed herein, a mobile device can receive a cell information message that includes load information of a current camping cell on which the mobile device is currently camping and load information of at least one neighbor cell of a plurality of neighbor cells to the current camping cell. The mobile device can also obtain cell-type information of the current camping cell and cell-type information of the at least one neighbor cell. The mobile device can also determine a mobility state of the mobile device, and, based upon the load information of the current camping cell, the load information of the at least one neighbor cell, the cell-type information of the current camping cell, the cell-type information of the at least one neighbor cell, and the mobility state information, select a target camping cell. | 06-12-2014 |
20140162637 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTIVE DISCOVERY USING CUSTOMER CATEGORY IN DEVICE TO DEVICE COMMUNICATION SERVICE - A method and an apparatus for selective discovery using a customer category in a device-to-device (D2D) communication service is disclosed. A method of selectively discovering service providing devices that provide services via D2D communication using a mobile communication network includes receiving, by a server for managing information about the service providing devices, information about a user equipment from the user equipment, verifying whether the user equipment corresponds to a preset customer category using the received information about the user equipment based on a service customer category table including information about a customer category that is the information about the user equipment provided with the services of the service providing devices, and selectively transmitting information about the services provided by the service providing devices to the user equipment based on a verification result. | 06-12-2014 |
20140162638 | SERVICE-ASSISTED NETWORK ACCESS POINT SELECTION - Embodiments enable prioritization and selection of network access points (NAP) by a computing device using NAP attribute values. The computing device obtains the attribute values based on a location of the computing device and/or proximate NAPs detected by the computing device. The obtained attribute values are compared to a state of the computing device (e.g., sensor values), user preferences, or other criteria to select at least one of the NAPs for connection with the computing device. In some embodiments, a user of the computing device is presented with a list of Wi-Fi access points ranked according to relevance to the computing device and/or user. | 06-12-2014 |
20140171070 | EXPANDED NEIGHBOR LIST FOR CELL RESELECTION - A user equipment (UE) may expand a neighbor list available to the UE to avoid neighbor information error caused by an unexpected leakage of distant time division synchronous code division multiple access (TD-SCDMA) cells. The neighbor list, may be expanded by combining previously received neighbor information with currently received neighbor information. In some instances, a new serving cell may be selected from the previously received neighbor list instead of the currently received neighbor list. | 06-19-2014 |
20140171071 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SEARCHING FOR RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGIES - A method for searching for radio access technologies by a wireless communication device is described. The method includes initiating a search for one or more radio access technologies. The method also includes determining if the wireless communication device has low mobility. The method also includes suspending the search when a first event occurs. The method also includes storing the search results. The method further includes resuming the search based on the search results when a second event occurs. | 06-19-2014 |
20140171072 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF CALCULATING AVAILABLE CHANNELS CONSIDERING PRIORITY IN TVWS - Disclosed are an apparatus and a method of calculating available channels considering a priority in a TVWS. An apparatus for calculating available channels considering a priority in a TVWS according to the present invention includes: a communication module configured to receive a request for information on usable available channels from a TV Band Device (TVBD); an available channel calculation unit configured to calculate one or more available channels usable by the TVBD based on one or more predetermined reference parameters according to the request; a priority assignment unit configured to assign a priority to each of the calculated available channels, generate an available channel list including the available channels to which the priorities are assigned, and provide the TVBD with the generated available channel list; and a database configured to store the available channels, to which the priorities are assigned, calculated for each TVBD. | 06-19-2014 |
20140171073 | DISCOVERY SIGNAL TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USE IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A discovery signal transmission/reception method and an apparatus for improving energy efficiency of the system are provided. The discovery signal transmission method of a base station in a mobile communication system according to the present disclosure includes acquiring a discovery signal configuration of a neighbor cell, transmitting the discovery signal configuration to a terminal, receiving a measurement report including a result of measurement on a discovery signal of the neighbor from the terminal, the measurement being performed based on the discovery signal configuration, and determining whether to make a handover decision for the terminal based on the measurement report. The discovery signal transmission/reception method of the present disclosure is advantageous in improving energy efficiency of a mobile communication system. | 06-19-2014 |
20140171074 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication system is described in which a base station operating in a hybrid or closed access mode requests deletion of the copy of the CSG-Id list maintained at the corresponding mobility management entity in the core network, when the base station changes its operation mode to an open (non-CSG) access mode. | 06-19-2014 |
20140179311 | Cell Search Method and System and Terminal Device - Embodiments of the present invention provide a cell search method and a system, and a terminal device. The cell search method includes selecting at least two antennas and each cell searcher corresponding to each antenna, configuring cell search parameters for each cell searcher, where the cell search parameters include a communications standard, a band, and a frequency corresponding to a cell to be searched, and controlling each cell searcher to search for the cell according to the cell search parameters. | 06-26-2014 |
20140179312 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR NETWORK CURATION - Systems and methods for network curation are disclosed. In some embodiments, a method comprises scanning, by a mobile device, an area to identify a network device for accessing a network, receiving, by the mobile device, a network identifier associated with the network device, providing a curation indicator request to a curation server, the curation indicator request comprising the network identifier, receiving a curation indicator from the curation server, the curation indicator being retrieved, based on the network identifier, from a database of a plurality of curation indicators, the curation indicator associated with a likelihood of intent to publicly share the network by the network device, comparing the curation indicator to an access setting, the access setting indicating acceptability of network access based on the likelihood of intent to publicly share the network by the network device, and accessing the network via the network device based on the comparison. | 06-26-2014 |
20140194116 | Method for Scanning in a Multi-Mode Multi-Antenna Device - A method and system are provided in which a device comprising a first or main phase locked loop (PLL) and a second or reference PLL, is operable to communicate utilizing a first and a second receiving antenna. The first PLL may generate a first signal based on a reference signal generated by the second PLL. A second signal may also be generated based on the reference signal. Data associated with a first radio access technology (RAT) may be received via the first receiving antenna utilizing the generated first signal. The first RAT or another RAT may be scanned via the second receiving antenna utilizing the generated second signal. The scan via the second receiving antenna may be performed concurrently with the reception of data via the first receiving antenna. A switch may be utilized to enable or disable scanning operations via the second receiving antenna. | 07-10-2014 |
20140194117 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR SELECTING A CELL ACCORDING TO A SPEED OF A TERMINAL IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The present invention defines an efficient method for (re)selecting a cell according to a speed of a terminal in a HetNet where cells having various regions such as macro cells, pico cells and femto cells are arranged in the same frequency band in a mobile communication system. A cell selection control method of a terminal in a mobile communication system, according to an embodiment of the present invention, comprises a step of receiving, from a base station, cell list information for not allowing a terminal moving at a high speed to select a cell and a step of setting the terminal so that cells included in the cell list information are considered or not considered to be targets of selection or reselection when the terminal moves at the high speed. According to the present invention, in a network consisting of various types of cells using the same frequency band, the terminal can determine whether to select or reselect a cell according to the speed of the terminal. That is, the terminal moving at the high speed does not select or reselect a frequent service cell, thereby efficiently performing the cell selection or reselection. Further, power consumption of the terminal can be reduced. | 07-10-2014 |
20140199998 | DISTRIBUTED MOBILE ACCESS POINT ACQUISITION - Providing for distributed access point management for access to a mobile network is described herein. By way of example, an interface application maintained at a Femto cell base station (BS) can facilitate initial power up and/or acquisition for a Femto user terminal (UT). Upon start-up, a bootstrap process is utilized by the Femto cell to provision the UT with an SDL establishing at least one BS as high priority within a particular geographic area (GEO). Thus, when the Femto UT is within the GEO, the UT is more likely to acquire, camp on and/or handoff to the preferred BS. When outside the GEO, a serving access point can provision the Femto UT OTA with a custom SDL suited to another GEO having a different high priority access point. By implementing access point management at distributed access points, expensive network equipment can be mitigated or avoided. | 07-17-2014 |
20140206348 | NETWORK ASSISTED DEVICE-TO-DEVICE DISCOVERY FOR PEER-TO-PEER APPLICATIONS - The techniques introduced here provide for network assisted device-to-device communication for peer-to-peer applications. The techniques include registering a user's peer-to-peer application identifier with a peer-to-peer application server, registering a peer-to-peer application with a device-to-device server, sending a peer-to-peer service request to the peer-to-peer application server, and receiving network assistance in discovering a peer with the desired P2P content/service and establishing a device-to-device communication arrangement for exchange of peer-to-peer services. | 07-24-2014 |
20140206349 | Obtaining, by a Terminal, of Information Relating to Access to a Service - A method is provided with which a terminal can obtain information relating to a radio environment. The method includes the following steps: a discovery device receives a request from the terminal to discover a radio environment; the discovery device determines a list comprising a plurality of access points that belong respectively to an access network and are provided to supply radio coverage at a current location of the terminal; a piece of information is obtained relating to an access to a service by using the access points on the list; the list is enriched with the information obtained in association with the access point; the enriched list is scheduled according to at least one criterion relating to the service; and the ordered list is sent to the terminal by the discovery device. | 07-24-2014 |
20140206350 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING DETECTION OF A COMPATIBLE NETWORK - An approach is provided for searching and detecting cells. System synchronization sequences are detected. An information block on a control channel of one of a plurality of networks is decoded, in response to the detected synchronization sequences. The synchronization sequences are independent of the networks. The information block includes a system indicator specifying release version of the network. | 07-24-2014 |
20140206351 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AN ADAPTIVE FILTER ARCHITECTURE - A system that incorporates teachings of the subject disclosure may include, for example, a method for identifying a spectral region in a radio frequency spectrum for initiating a communication session having a transmission link and a reception link, determining a correlation factor from signals measured in the spectral region, detecting according to the correlation factor a foreign communication signal in the spectral region, generating coefficient data to prevent interference with the foreign communication signal while transmitting in the transmission link, filtering a first signal for transmission in the transmission link according to the coefficient data to generate a filtered signal, and causing a transmission of the filtered signal which prevents interference with the foreign communication signal while transmitting in the transmission link. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 07-24-2014 |
20140213248 | MOBILE DEVICE AND METHOD OF SCANNING FOR CHANNELS - A mobile device used for channel scanning includes a channel management module, a positioning module, a matching module, and a scanning module. The channel management module is used to establish a channel list. The channel list includes position data and corresponding channel information. The positioning module acquires real-time position data of the mobile device through a positioning system of the mobile device. The matching module is used to acquire the channel information from the channel list which corresponds to the real-time position data of the mobile device. The scanning module scans and connects to one channel according to the acquired channel information. A channel scanning method is also provided. | 07-31-2014 |
20140213249 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING BASE STATIONS PROVIDING COOPERATIVE COMMUNICATION TO A MOBILE STATION IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of determining member Base Stations (BSs) providing cooperative communication to a Mobile Station (MS) in a communication system. The method includes when a candidate list of the member BSs generated using at least one of strengths of signals received from adjacent BSs and cell loading state information of the adjacent BSs is received from the MS, selecting candidate BSs having a service quality larger than or equal to a threshold from candidate BSs included in the candidate list as targets to receive a member negotiation; and performing a capability negotiation with each of the selected targets to receive the member negotiation to select final member BSs and transmitting information on the determined final member BSs to the MS. | 07-31-2014 |
20140213250 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DEVICE TO DEVICE COMMUNICATION - A method and apparatus for performing a device-to-device (D2D) communication by a user equipment and supporting D2D communication by a communication entity. The D2D communication method may include: acquiring ProSe ID of the UE or the UE's user, which is used in the D2D communication; generating an expression by using the ProSe ID; broadcasting the generated expression; receiving a direct D2D connection request message from another UE over a core network; sending a direct connection accept message in response to the direct D2D connection request message; and performing the D2D communication with another UE. Accordingly, D2D communication can be efficiently performed. | 07-31-2014 |
20140220970 | DEVICE-ANCHOR BASE STATION SELECTION AND DETECTION - Systems and methods are disclosed for providing efficient and reliable communication for wireless devices, e.g., machine type communication devices, in a cellular communications network. In one embodiment, a node of a cellular communications network is configured to select a device-anchor base station for a wireless device from candidate device-anchor base stations, where the candidate device-anchor base stations are wireless devices that satisfy one or more predefined criteria for serving as a candidate device-anchor base station and establish a connection between the wireless device and the device-anchor base station for the wireless device such that data transmissions between the wireless device and a base station of the cellular communications network are via the device-anchor base station. In this manner, communication between the wireless device and the base station is assisted by the device-anchor base station. | 08-07-2014 |
20140235237 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF SEARCHING FOR OPERATOR NETWORK IN A MULTI-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY ENVIRONMENT - A method and apparatus of searching for an operator network in a multi-Radio Access Technology (RAT) environment are provided. The method, calculating a length of a sleep interval to perform background Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN) searching, comparing the length of the sleep interval with a predetermined reference parameter, if the length of the sleep interval is larger than the reference parameter, performing background PLMN searching of a passive RAT during the sleep interval, and if the length of the sleep interval is equal to or smaller than the reference parameter, performing background PLMN searching of an active RAT during the sleep interval. | 08-21-2014 |
20140235238 | Multi-Network Terminal-Proximity Discovery Using Joint Spectrum - A first mobile communication device is communicatively connected to a first network for receiving a first communication service in a first geographic area and in a first frequency-band. A second mobile communication device is communicatively connected to a second network, different from the first network, for receiving a second communication service in a second geographic area and in a second frequency-band. The first device is transmitting, in a third frequency-band disjoint from the first and second frequency-bands, a first identifier and a first location of the first device. The second network monitors the third frequency-band and receives the information in the transmission. Under control of the first identifier, a database is consulted for determining if the first device is listed as associated with the second device. If so, a second location of the second device is determined and a spatial proximity is determined between the first and second devices based on the first and second locations, enabling the first device and the second device to set up a device-to-device communication session. | 08-21-2014 |
20140242981 | White Space Utilization - The concepts relate to radio white space utilization. One example can obtain information about a location of a device. The example can access a white space database to obtain radio white space frequencies relative to the location. This example can also perform active scanning of at least some of the radio white space frequencies at the location and not perform active scanning on allocated frequencies. | 08-28-2014 |
20140242982 | MEASUREMENT REPORTING TO AVOID STRONG INTERFERENCE - A measurement reporting method to avoid strong interference includes measuring all cells on a neighbor frequency indicated by a network on a neighbor list. A first and second set of cells are identified. The identified first set of cells are from the neighbor list and have a first signal strength a first predefined amount above a serving cell signal strength. The second set of cells are not on the neighbor list and have a second signal strength above a first threshold signal value. The first signal strength of the first set of cells and the second signal strength of the second set of cells are compared to determine whether to send a measurement report for the first set of cells. | 08-28-2014 |
20140242983 | HETEROGENEOUS DEVICE MANAGEMENT IN MACHINE TO MACHINE AREA NETWORK - The present disclosure is related to managing heterogeneous M2M devices in a machine to machine (M2M) area network. Particularly, the present disclosure relates to supporting heterogeneous M2M devices (i.e., M2M devices not being supported in an M2M gateway) by employing a variety of network interfaces of other M2M devices in an M2M area network. | 08-28-2014 |
20140242984 | SINGLE-RADIO DEVICE SUPPORTING COEXISTENCE BETWEEN MULTIPLE RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGIES - Electronic devices may be provided that contain wireless communication circuitry. The wireless communication circuitry may include radio-frequency transceiver circuitry coupled to antennas. An electronic device may include a baseband processor and other storage and processing circuitry that implements protocol stacks for handling multiple radio access technologies. The storage and processing circuitry may use the transceiver circuitry to convey data using a first radio access technology while periodically interrupting the conveying of the data to monitor a paging channel using a second radio access technology. In performing the paging channel monitoring operations, the storage and processing circuitry may enforce a time limit that ensures that operations using the first radio access technology are not disrupted more than desired. | 08-28-2014 |
20140242985 | ACTIVE SCANNING IN WIRELESS NETWORK - This document discloses a solution for preparing for a connection establishment in a wireless network. According to an aspect, transmission of a request message from the wireless apparatus is carried out on a channel. Thereafter, a response message is acquired on said channel as a response to the request message, the response message being originated from a second wireless apparatus which is in an unassociated state with said wireless apparatus, and the response message comprising information on at least two wireless networks operating on at least one of said channel and another channel. Then, the received response message may be utilized in the connection establishment. | 08-28-2014 |
20140248873 | SENSOR, A MOBILE USER TERMINAL AND A METHOD OF A SENSOR SENSING A MOBILE USER TERMINAL - A method is provided of a sensor sensing a mobile user terminal for cellular radio telecommunications, the user terminal being associated with any one of a plurality of networks, each network having a distinct carrier frequency band for radio signals. The method comprises: broadcasting a common signal at each of multiple carrier frequency bands; the user terminal receiving the signal in the associated carrier frequency band of its network; the user terminal checking information in the received signal, and upon determining that the information is acceptable to allow connection to the sensor, the user terminal acknowledging to the sensor its receipt of the signal. | 09-04-2014 |
20140248874 | Methods and Apparatus for Radio Resource Control - Improved systems and techniques for controlling access to network resources. A base station broadcasts extended access barring (EAB) and access class barring (ACB) information. Upon a determination by a user equipment that the user equipment requires service from the base station, the user equipment determines its EAB category and call type. The user equipment receives the EAB and ACB information broadcast by the base station and determines if it is subject to EAB based on its EAB category. If the user equipment is not subject to EAB, the user equipment determines if its call type is subject to ACB and, if the call type is subject to ACB, applies access class barring based on its call type. | 09-04-2014 |
20140256316 | METHOD AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE FOR NETWORK SEARCH - A method and an electronic device for network search. The network search method in an electronic device includes scanning a frequency band corresponding to a first communication system to search for a first Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN); when discovering a second PLMN as a result of the scanning, determining whether a frequency band of the second PLMN and a frequency band of a second communication system overlap each other; and when the frequency band of the second PLMN and the frequency band of the second communication system overlap each other, scanning the other frequency band excluding the overlapping frequency band in the entire frequency band corresponding to the second communication system to search for the first PLMN. | 09-11-2014 |
20140256317 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR DISCOVERING WIRELESS ACCESS POINT - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method, a device, and a system for discovering a wireless access point AP, so as to achieve a purpose of rapidly discovering an available wireless access point and saving electricity of a mobile terminal STA. A base station controller BSC receives a request message sent by a mobile terminal STA, acquires information about one or more APs near the STA from an access controller AC, and sends a notification message to the STA, so that the STA performs an active scan based on a service set identifier SSID to discover a corresponding AP. | 09-11-2014 |
20140274038 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING BETTER PLMN SEARCH DURING CONNECTED MODE DRX - Disclosed are methods and apparatus for performing a better PLMN (BPLMN) search during connected mode DRX. In one aspect, a user equipment (UE) detects a trigger to begin a BPLMN search while in connected mode discontinuous reception (CDRX); determines whether it is configured for a manual BPLMN search; determine whether the CDRX duration is greater than or equal to the minimum amount of time required to perform the manual BPLMN search; and when determined that the CDRX duration is greater than or equal to the minimum amount of time required for the BPLMN search, performs the manual BPLMN search while in the CDRX. | 09-18-2014 |
20140274039 | ADAPTIVE WIRELESS ACCESS POINT DISCOVERY - Disclosed are a system, apparatus, and method for adaptive discovery and scanning of wireless access points. In one embodiment, a set of channels can be scanned in a first iteration to discover wireless access points. In one embodiment, a discovery profile based on the discovered wireless access points can be determined and in a second iteration, a subset of the set of channels can be scanned. In one embodiment, the subset consists of non-overlapping channels selected according to the discovery profile. | 09-18-2014 |
20140274040 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING SCAN OPERATIONS - Various methods, apparatuses and/or articles of manufacture are provided which may be implemented for use by a mobile device to alter a scan operation. Various methods, apparatuses and/or articles of manufacture are provided which may be implemented for use by one or more electronic devices to determine one or more scan factors for use by a mobile device in altering a scan operation. | 09-18-2014 |
20140274041 | USING MOTION TO IMPROVE LOCAL WIRELESS NETWORK CONNECTIVITY - The disclosure is directed to using motion to improve local wireless network connectivity. An aspect determines whether or not a motion state of a mobile device has changed and, if the motion state has changed, determines whether or not to trigger a scan for a local wireless network. | 09-18-2014 |
20140274042 | USING MOTION TO OPTIMIZE PLACE OF RELEVANCE OPERATIONS - The disclosure is directed to using a change in motion to improve place of relevance (PoR) detection. An aspect determines whether or not a motion state of a mobile device has changed to a new motion state, determines whether or not to trigger the mobile device to scan for available local wireless networks if the motion state has changed, and identifies a PoR based on the scanning. | 09-18-2014 |
20140274043 | ACCESS POINT SELECTION FOR ASSISTANCE DATA GENERATION - Methods, systems, computer-readable media, and apparatuses selecting access points and generating assistance data for access points is provided. In one embodiment a plurality of access points in a first area are identified, a location assistance quality value with each access point of the plurality of access points is associated with each access point, and a subset of the plurality of access points is selected based on the location assistance quality value of each access point of the plurality of access points. Assistance data is then generated for the selected access points. | 09-18-2014 |
20140274044 | USING MOTION TO IMPROVE LOCAL WIRELESS NETWORK CONNECTIVITY - The disclosure is directed to using motion to reduce unnecessary scans for local wireless networks. An aspect determines whether or not a motion state change event of a user device indicates a change from a moving motion state to a stationary motion state, and if the motion state change event indicates a change from a moving motion state to a stationary motion state, ignoring the motion state change event. An aspect of the disclosure is directed to using motion to reduce latency of scanning for local wireless networks. An aspect determines whether or not a user device is in motion, determines whether or not a periodic scan timer has expired and/or a received signal strength indicator (RSSI) is below a threshold, and if the user device is in motion and the periodic scan timer has expired or the RSSI is below the threshold, scanning for a local wireless network. | 09-18-2014 |
20140274045 | Method, Device, and System for Processing Closed Subscriber Group Subscription Data Request - The present invention relates to a method, a device, and a system for processing a request for closed subscriber group subscription data. A closed subscriber group subscriber server receives a request sent by a mobility management network element. The request includes an identifier of the mobility management network element and an identifier of a user equipment is used for requesting closed subscriber group subscription data of the user equipment. If the closed subscriber group subscription data of the user equipment does not exist, the closed subscriber group subscriber server stores the identifier of the mobility management network element and the identifier of the user equipment. | 09-18-2014 |
20140287748 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACQUIRING CELL IDENTIFIER IN RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for acquiring a cell identifier by a source cell in a radio communication system is provided. The method includes receiving information about a new cell from a User Equipment (UE) in the source cell, acquiring an Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (EUTRA) Cell Global Identifier (ECGI) of the new cell from the UE, if it is determined based on the information about the new cell that there is no neighbor relationship with the new cell, determining whether a Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN) Identifier (ID) (PLMN ID) in the ECGI is included in a mapping table between a primary PLMN ID and a shared PLMN ID, and acquiring an X2 Internet Protocol (IP) address of the new cell from an Evolved Packet Core (EPC) according to the determination results. | 09-25-2014 |
20140287749 | Cell Type Information Sharing Between Neighbor Base Stations - The present invention relates to a method and arrangement for cell type information sharing between neighbour base stations in a telecommunications system. One embodiment comprises informing a second radio base station serving a second cell and having a neighbour relation with a first cell served by a first base station, of at least the cell type of the first cell. This is accomplished by adding the cell type information to a set of information to be signaled to the second base station, and then signalling the set of information to the second base station. | 09-25-2014 |
20140287750 | TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS - Providing a mobile terminal with system information which enables the terminal to access one of the cells of a cellular telecommunications system includes transmitting from the telecommunications system to all terminals within the cell, including the terminal, a system information indicator that makes available to the terminal system information to provide access to the system. The system information indicator is transmitted on the broadcast channel (BCH). The system information indicator may be a sub-set of the system information conventionally transmitted on the BCH but which is sufficient to allow the mobile terminal to access the network and obtain in the downlink further system information. Alternatively, the information transmitted in the BCH may be a profile index value which directs the mobile terminal to retrieve from a store of the mobile terminal system information pre-stored on the mobile terminal. | 09-25-2014 |
20140287751 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR REDUCING WI-FI SCANNING USING CELLULAR NETWORK TO WI-FI ACCESS POINT MAPPING INFORMATION - The subject matter described herein includes methods, systems, and computer readable media for reducing Wi-Fi scanning using cellular network to Wi-Fi access point mapping information. In one exemplary method, a mobile communications device receives Wi-Fi and cellular signals and creates or obtains a database of mappings between Wi-Fi access points and cellular network information. The mobile communications device detects signals from base stations in the cellular network. The mobile communications device determines at least one recommended access point from the data derived from the database. The mobile communications device determines whether any Wi-Fi signals are present. In response to determining that at least one Wi-Fi signal is present, the mobile communications device attempts to connect to the at least one recommended access point. | 09-25-2014 |
20140295831 | Background Paging Monitoring in Dual SIM Wireless Communication Device - A wireless communication device includes a single baseband processor and RF chain for servicing a first and second SIM. Each of the SIMs connects to a different network, and one may be used for one data type while the other is used for another data type. In order to track the connectivity of an inactive first SIM, a controller periodically interrupts service to the second SIM. During its connection, the first SIM monitors the connection to its network. A triggering mechanism and trigger threshold define when a switch to a new cell is needed. The device receives the mechanism and threshold from the network and calculates a modified threshold and/or mechanism is order to reduce a number of potentially missed calls. | 10-02-2014 |
20140295832 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF PERFORMING A DISCOVERY PROCEDURE - The present invention is directed to a method and an apparatus for use in a wireless communication system. Specifically, the present invention is directed to a method of performing a discovery procedure for a ProSe and an apparatus therefore, in which the method comprises: receiving first resource allocation information for plural ProSe channels from a base station via a broadcast signal; sensing the plural ProSe channels; transmitting a sensing result for the plural ProSe channels to the base station; receiving second resource allocation information indicating one of the plural ProSe channels from the base station via a unicast signal; and transmitting a discovery signal via the ProSe channel indicated by the second resource allocation information. | 10-02-2014 |
20140295833 | Systems and Methods For Selecting a Network Access System - A system according to some embodiments of the invention includes (1) a component (e.g. ANDSF) that provides a cell selection rule to a UE and (2) a component (e.g. an access node) that provides the UE with information about the load in the cell currently utilized by the UE. This enables the UE to determine whether to leave the cell, which may be a 3GPP cell, and use a different cell, which may be a non-3GPP cell, by applying the cell selection rule in conjunction with its knowledge about the load of the cell. | 10-02-2014 |
20140295834 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SEPARATED CONNECTIONS OF UPLINK AND DOWNLINK - Provided is a method and an apparatus for uplink and downlink separated connections, wherein a terminal may establish a downlink cell association with a downlink base station, receive an identifier of an uplink base station providing an uplink from the downlink base station to the terminal through an established downlink, and establish an uplink cell association with the uplink base station using the identifier of the uplink base station, and the downlink base station may select the uplink base station from among base stations in a network based on an uplink reference signal and a bias factor. | 10-02-2014 |
20140295835 | Downlink Signaling Counter Management for Multiple Subscriber Identity Devices - A downlink signaling counter management method is disclosed for a communication device adapted to be simultaneously associated with at least two subscriber identities and adapted to simultaneously provide radio receiving capabilities to less than all of the at least two subscriber identities. The method comprises, for each decoding of a paging block for a subscriber identity, determining whether the paging block decoding was correct and determining whether a previous paging block decoding condition is fulfilled. If the paging block decoding is correct, the downlink signaling counter is updated with a first value if the previous paging block decoding condition is fulfilled and with a second value if the previous paging block decoding condition is not fulfilled. If the paging block decoding is not correct and if the paging block decoding was based on a maximum number of paging bursts, the downlink signaling counter is updated with a third value if the previous paging block decoding condition is fulfilled and with a fourth value if the previous paging block decoding condition is not fulfilled. Corresponding computer program product, system and device are also disclosed. | 10-02-2014 |
20140295836 | RADIO NETWORK NODE, USER EQUIPMENT AND METHODS FOR ENABLING ACCESS TO A RADIO NETWORK - Embodiments herein relate to a method in a radio network node ( | 10-02-2014 |
20140302845 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING AUTONOMOUSLY SEARCH FOR A CELL AND A DEVICE THEREFOR - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system. More specifically, the present invention relates to a method and a device for performing autonomously search for a cell in the wireless communication system, the method comprising: receiving configuration information including frequency information; autonomously performing search for a cell in accordance with the frequency information; and transmitting a proximity indication about a detected cell when the cell is detected on a frequency identified by the frequency information. | 10-09-2014 |
20140315546 | METHOD FOR SEARCHING WIRELESS SIGNAL, MOBILE ELECTRONIC DEVICE USING THE SAME, AND NON-TRANSITORY STORAGE MEDIUM - A method for searching wireless signal, a mobile electronic device using the same, and a non-transitory storage medium are provided. In the method, after a motion sensor of the mobile electronic device is activated, a motion status of the mobile electronic device is determined by using the motion sensor. Then, a frequency of the mobile electronic device performing a wireless signal searching procedure is adjusted according to the motion status, so as to reduce power wasted due to the unnecessary wireless signal searching procedure being performed. | 10-23-2014 |
20140315547 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND METHOD FOR PROCESSING SCAN RESULTS - A method for processing a scan result detects a floating touch signal of the electronic device when a scanning module searches for networks or other electronic devices. The method further displays a current scan result acquired from the scanning unit on a display device. The method further determines an updated scan result at a predetermined interval. When the floating touch signal is detected when the updated scan result is different from the current scan result, the method maintains the current scan result displayed on the display device and determines a difference result between the updated scan result and the current scan result. The difference result is displayed on a designated region of the display device. | 10-23-2014 |
20140315548 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR ACCESS CLASS BARRING FOR VOIP CALLS - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to methods and apparatus for transmission restriction. An exemplary method generally includes initiating a mobile originating (MO) call, determining availability of parameters for a first access gating mechanism for determining whether to bar or allow transmission of the MO call, selecting the first access gating mechanism or a second access gating mechanism, based on the determination of the availability of the parameters, and applying the selected gating mechanism to determine whether to bar or allow the MO call. | 10-23-2014 |
20140315549 | Distribution Of System Information In A Wireless Access Telecommunications System - The invention relates to a wireless access telecommunications system comprising at least an SA-cell with which a terminal in an active mode is configured to have a data connection and an LA-cell on which the terminal in an idle mode is configured to camp. A method for the terminal to at least obtain LA-cell system information and SA-cell system information includes, when the terminal is in the active mode and an SA-cell radio interface of the terminal is enabled, the terminal receiving at least a part of the SA-cell system information for the terminal from the SA-cell via the SA-cell radio interface. The method further includes enabling an LA-cell radio interface of the terminal during one or more of a plurality of LA time periods and receiving at least a part of the LA-cell system information for the terminal from the LA-cell via the LA-cell radio interface. | 10-23-2014 |
20140315550 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication system includes a communication network including a plurality of communication cells, a plurality of mobile communication devices each operable to connect into the communication network via at least one of the communication cells, and a communication apparatus for providing at least one of the communication cells. The communication apparatus is operable to provide first and second communication cells via which a mobile communication device can connect to a communication network and to determine whether a mobile communication device is connected to the communication network via the first and/or second communication cells. The communication apparatus is also operable to monitor for further communication cells in dependence on a result of the determination by the determining unit. | 10-23-2014 |
20140323126 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INDICATING DISCOVERY SIGNAL RESOURCES IN DEVICE-TO-DEVICE WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Methods and apparatuses are provided for indicating a discovery signal resource by a User Equipment (UE) performing device-to-device communication. The UE receives information relating to the device-to-device communication from a base station. A synchronization signal including discovery signal-related information, is transmitted from the UE to a nearby UE, based on the information relating to the device-to-device communication. A discovery is performed based on the discovery signal-related information. | 10-30-2014 |
20140329524 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO SCAN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SPECTRUM - Methods and apparatus are disclosed to scan a wireless communication spectrum. An example method disclosed herein includes causing a first scanner to determine, for a frequency of a wireless communication spectrum, a decoded base station identifier, causing a second scanner to determine a plurality of signal strengths at the frequency without determining a base station identifier, and determining that the base station identifier is associated with a subset of the plurality of signal strengths by comparing at least one of timestamps and locations associated with the base station identifier and the plurality of signal strengths. | 11-06-2014 |
20140335857 | CELL SEARCH METHOD - A cell search method is disclosed. In an environment that a plurality of small cells are located around a macro cell, a macro base station may allocate a terminal-specific signal distinguishing a terminal from other terminal to the terminal which establishes a connection with the macro base station, and share information of the terminal-specific signal with a plurality of small cell base stations. When a cell search is triggered, the terminal may transmit the allocated terminal-specific signal, and the plurality of small cell base stations perform measurements on the received terminal-specific signal and then report the measured results to the macro base station. The macro base station may configure a candidate set of small cells for the terminal based on the measurement results reported from the plurality of small cell base stations, and transmit the candidate set to the terminal. | 11-13-2014 |
20140335858 | CELL SEARCH METHOD FOR SUPPORTING DISCONTINUOUS TRANSMISSION AND/OR RECEPTION OF BASE STATION - Disclosed is a cell search method for supporting discontinuous transmission and reception of small cell base stations. A cell search method performed by a base station, in an environment that a plurality of small cell base stations perform discontinuous transmission and reception, may comprise transmitting information about small cell base stations whose current transmission and reception mode is in active state; receiving, from a terminal, measurement results on the small cell base stations included in the information about small cell base stations; estimating small cell base stations located around the terminal based on the measurement results; and transmitting, to the estimated small cell to stations, an instruction to change their transmission and reception modes. Therefore, power consumption of the small cell base stations may be reduced with maintaining terminal performances for searching small cells. | 11-13-2014 |
20140342733 | WI-FI PROCESS - A method and apparatus for a wireless device that can adapt a rate of related wireless network unit scans for adjacent networks is disclosed. In one embodiment, the wireless device can include a wireless network unit and a co-located geo-location signal receiver, and a processor. The processor can determine the position and speed of the wireless device from data received from the geo-location signal receiver. The processor can configure the wireless network unit to adapt the rate of related wireless network scans based upon determined speed and position. In one embodiment, the wireless network unit scans can be wireless scans for other nearby networks for roaming or location based services. | 11-20-2014 |
20140342734 | Method, system, mobile terminal and computer program product - Systems, methods, and computer program products are provided for calculating an indicator of a quality of communication within a wireless communication access network and for estimating the available capacity of a base station within the wireless communication access network. In one exemplary embodiment, a method comprises receiving an indication, generated by a mobile terminal, of the quality of communication between the base station and the mobile terminal, and estimating the available capacity of the base station based on the received indication. | 11-20-2014 |
20140349642 | CONTROL APPARATUS, TERMINAL APPARATUS, AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING CELL SEARCH - In a control apparatus, a network IF acquires position information of a terminal that exists in both of a macro cell and a small cell, and position information of a terminal that exists in the macro cell. A control unit then identifies the terminal that exists in a peripheral area including an area corresponding to the small cell based on the position information of the terminals. The control unit then notifies the identified terminal of a control signal that starts cell search about the small cell through the macro cell. | 11-27-2014 |
20140349643 | MECHANISMS FOR ROAMING BETWEEN 3GPP OPERATORS AND WLAN SERVICE PROVIDERS - Embodiments describe methods, apparatuses and logic for a user equipment (UE) to connect to an access point (AP) in a wireless local area network (WLAN) based on credentials from a UE's home third generation partnership project (3GPP) network. In some embodiments, the UE may receive selection policy parameters from the WLAN including a network access identifier (NAI) realm. The UE may also receive selection policy parameters from the 3GPP network. The UE may compare the selection policy parameters of the WLAN with the selection policy parameters of the 3GPP network and discover roaming relationships between service providers and the relative priorities of different networks, and create a network list based on the comparison. The UE may then associate with an AP of the WLAN based on the prioritized network list. | 11-27-2014 |
20140349644 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING CSG PRIORITIES IN IDLE AND CONNECTED MODES - A method comprising detecting closed subscriber group (CSG) proximity based on an autonomous search function; signaling a proximity indication to a network, wherein the proximity indication includes at least one priority of at least one allowed neighbor CSG cell. A method comprising, performing measurements on neighboring CSG cells; and generating a measurement report including measurements of at least one neighboring CSG cell; and transmitting a message including a measurement report and a CSG priority for at least one CSG cell. | 11-27-2014 |
20140357266 | USING APPLICATION FEEDBACK TO OPTIMIZE PLMN SEARCH - One aspect provides a modem for use at a terminal. The modem comprises a first interface, a second interface, and a processing unit. The first interface is arranged to connect to a network. The second interface is arranged to connect to a host processor on the terminal. The processing unit is arranged to perform a procedure to attempt to connect to the network via the first interface. The processing unit is also arranged to receive an indication of an operating mode that the host processor is operating in from the host processor via the second interface, where the operating mode is one of a plurality of operating modes. The processing unit is further arranged to, in the event of failure of the procedure, repeat performing the procedure at a time controlled in dependence on the received indication. | 12-04-2014 |
20140357267 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DETERMINATION OF PROXIMITY BETWEEN WIRELESS DEVICES - Methods and systems to determine the proximity of wireless devices to each other. In an embodiment, the proximity may be determined as a membership in a classification, e.g., high, medium, or low proximity of one wireless device to a second. The process for determining proximity may include a training phase, where a set of wireless devices may perform scans to determine the identities and number of wireless access points, such as wireless routers. From this, statistical features may be extracted and used to perform training; the output of this training may be a set of trained models. The trained models may be used in an operational phase. Here, scan data from wireless devices may be submitted to a feature extraction process. The extracted features may then be used to determine the trained model most closely fitting the extracted features. | 12-04-2014 |
20140357268 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EFFICIENT RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY FREQUENCY SCANNING BASED ON FALSE ALARMS - Efficient RAT frequency scanning based on false alarms is described. A first RAT associated with multiple frequency bands, and a first frequency band among the multiple frequency bands, may be selected. A first signal scan associated with the first RAT may be performed in the first frequency band to identify a candidate signal in the first frequency band. Determining that the candidate signal is not associated with the first RAT may signal a false alarm, and information related to the candidate signal may be stored as false alarm information. A second RAT associated with at least one of the multiple frequency bands, and a second frequency band among the at least one of the multiple frequency bands, may be selected based on the stored false alarm information. A second signal scan associated with the second RAT in the second frequency band may be performed. | 12-04-2014 |
20140357269 | SERVER-ASSISTED DEVICE-TO-DEVICE DISCOVERY AND CONNECTION - A method includes receiving, at a network node, a device-to-device D2D discovery request from a first device and sending a D2D discovery response from the network node to the first device. The D2D discovery response includes information associated with a second device that is available to establish a D2D connection with the first device. The network node may perform inquiries regarding D2D connection permission from both devices. If D2D connection is permitted by both devices, the network node may facilitate the D2D scanning by sending each device's scanning information to the other device via a non-D2D link. In parallel to D2D scanning, the network node may speed up D2D link setup by distributing, via non-D2D links, link setup information to each device, where the link setup information may include device credential(s), IP address allocation(s), and/or group owner assignment. | 12-04-2014 |
20140357270 | MEASUREMENT CONFIGURATION - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, there is provided an apparatus, comprising: a receiver configured to receive a first message, the first message comprising an indication of a determination that a user equipment is in physical proximity of a first cell, at least one processor configured to determine whether the first cell is available to the user equipment, and the at least one processor being configured to, responsive to a determination the first cell is available to the user equipment, cause a second message to be transmitted to the user equipment, the second message comprising an instruction for the user equipment to perform at least one measurement to discover the first cell. | 12-04-2014 |
20140357271 | REDUCING SERVICE ACQUISITION TIME WHEN A USER DEVICE IS POWERED UP - A user device receives network information for a future destination of the user device. The user device stores the network information for the future destination in a local store of the user device. Responsive to the user device starting up, the user device searches for an available network using the network information in the local store of the user device, wherein searching for the available network excludes searching for a last registered network. | 12-04-2014 |
20140357272 | Cellular Communication System Support for Limited Bandwidth Communication Devices - A network node that serves a host cell in a cellular communication system transmits, at (a) first time interval(s), first control channel information on a control channel that extends over a first bandwidth of a radiofrequency spectrum. The first control channel communicates information necessary to enable a first type of communication device to receive data from the host cell. The first type of communication device can receive first bandwidth-wide signals. At (a) second time interval(s), second control channel information is transmitted on a second control channel of a first M-cell. The second control channel occupies a second bandwidth that is smaller than the first bandwidth. The second time interval(s) do(es) not coincide with any of the first time interval(s). A second type of communication device having reduced receive bandwidth capabilities compared to those of the first type of communication device is thereby made capable of being served by the node. | 12-04-2014 |
20140364116 | Session Setup In An Energy-Efficient Cellular Wireless Telecommunications System - The invention relates to a telecommunications system comprising at least a plurality of SA-cells. The invention provides a method for a terminal to facilitate establishment of a data connection between the terminal and at least one of the SA-cells. The method includes steps of, while the terminal is in an idle mode, the terminal transmitting an information request message (IRM) for the plurality of SA-cells and receiving, from each SA-cell of one or more SA-cells of the plurality of SA-cells, a message comprising at least information indicative of a strength with which the each SA-cell received the IRM. The method further includes the step of, at least partially based on the messages received from the one or more SA-cells, the terminal selecting an SA-cell of the plurality of SA-cells for establishing the data connection between the terminal and the selected SA-cell. | 12-11-2014 |
20140364117 | REFERENCE SIGNAL DESIGN FOR CELL SEARCH IN AN ORTHOGONAL WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate efficient cell acquisition in a wireless communication system. In one aspect, a reference signal for use in cell acquisition can be constructed in a bandwidth-agnostic manner such that it contains a common central portion in a predetermined frequency band that is independent of a bandwidth utilized by an associated wireless communication system. The central portion can be constructed as a two-dimensional block in time and frequency that spans a default cell search bandwidth, a predetermined bandwidth specified by synchronization codes or other signals, or another suitable bandwidth. A reference signal can then be constructed form the central portion by tiling or expanding the central portion such that it spans the entire system bandwidth. | 12-11-2014 |
20140370888 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, LOCATION REGISTRATION METHOD, REPEATER, AND RADIO CLIENT DEVICE - A radio client device scans a channel allocated to a predetermined repeater, and transmits a request for location registration to the predetermined repeater in a case of detecting a usage condition signal. A repeater, in a case of receiving a request for location registration from a radio client device, conducts location registration for the radio client device, transmits information about the radio client device whose location is registered to a predetermined repeater in a communication area of the repeater or to a predetermined repeater in a different communication area, and in a case of receiving information about a radio client device whose location is registered from another repeater in the communication area of the repeater, transmits information about the radio client device whose location is registered to the predetermined repeater in the different communication area. | 12-18-2014 |
20140370889 | METHOD OF DETERMINING ORTHOGONAL RESOURCE BASED ON VIRTUAL CELL ID IN COMP COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The invention provides a solution, in a reception point of a communication system, of providing a user equipment with a virtual cell ID, where firstly a virtual cell ID corresponding to the reception point is received from a network control device, the virtual cell ID being used for indicating a cluster to which the reception point belongs; then the virtual cell ID is provided to at least one user equipment served by the reception point; and finally resource index information corresponding to each user equipment among the at least one user equipment is transmitted respectively to the each user equipment. There is further provided a solution, in a user equipment of a communication system, of determining an orthogonal resource, where firstly a virtual cell ID of the reception point is obtained; then resource index information corresponding to the present user equipment is received from the reception point; next an orthogonal resource corresponding to the present user equipment is determined according to the virtual cell ID and the resource index information; and finally uplink control information is transmitted to the reception point over the determined orthogonal resource. A tradeoff between the number of orthogonal resources and interference intensity can be achieved by applying of the invention. | 12-18-2014 |
20140370890 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACCESS CLASS BARRING - The present invention provides a method and device for Access Class (AC) barring. The method comprises: determining the state-related AC barring parameters of a terminal according to the state AC barring information of the terminal and the membership of the terminal in a cell; barring AC according to the determined state-related AC barring parameters. The present invention solves the problem that in related techniques it can not be guaranteed that member UEs own higher priority than non-member UEs do. Hence it improves the effect of AC barring and conduces to improve user experience. | 12-18-2014 |
20150011207 | METHOD AND RELATED MOBILE DEVICE FOR SEARCHING FOR A MOBILE NETWORK - Instead of performing a complete frequency scan and a subsequent cell scan on detected candidate frequencies, according to the method for searching for a PLMN as disclosed herein, the frequency scan is interrupted for performing an immediate cell scan based on inspection results for a specific candidate frequency obtained during the frequency scan. During the cell scan, the bandwidth among other parameters of the cell may be detected. Based on the detected bandwidth, certain candidate frequencies falling into the detected bandwidth can be skipped when resuming the frequency scan. | 01-08-2015 |
20150017981 | METHOD FOR DISCOVERING NEIGHBOR CELLS IN A RADIO CELLULAR NETWORK - The present invention relates to a method for discovering neighbor cells (NC) in a radio cellular network (NTW) comprising cells, each served by a controller (e NB), the method comprising, with respect to a controller (eNB) serving a cell (C): (a): selecting a frequency (f) in a frequency list, each frequency being associated with a priority (Prio), a target value (TV) and a counter (Count), and wherein said frequency (f) is selected in the frequency list according to its priority (Prio); (b): selecting a terminal (UE) located in the cell (C) and connected with the controller (e NB); (c): sending a control message to the selected terminal (UE), said control message comprising a request to perform radio measurements relating to neighbor cells (NC) of the cell (C), for the selected frequency (f); (d): incrementing the counter (Count) associated with the frequency (f); (e): if the counter (Count) is equal to the target value (TV) for the selected frequency (f), then deleting the selected frequency (f) from the frequency list; repeating steps (a), (b), (c), (d) and (e) during a predetermined time (Tc) or until the frequency list if empty. | 01-15-2015 |
20150017982 | METHOD FOR USING A USER EQUIPMENT WITH A FIRST PUBLIC LAND MOBILE NETWORK AND WITH A SECOND PUBLIC LAND MOBILE NETWORK, USER EQUIPMENT, PROGRAM AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT - A method for using a user equipment with a first public land mobile network (PLMN) and with a second PLMN includes: operating the user equipment in a plurality of idle modes. The user equipment is a Dual Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) Dual Standby (DSDS) user equipment. With respect to the first PLMN and with respect to an idle mode of the user equipment in the first PLMN, a first discontinuous reception scheme is implemented in case that the first PLMN is a registered public land mobile network (RPLMN) to the user equipment. With respect to the second PLMN and with respect to an idle mode of the user equipment in the second PLMN, a second discontinuous reception scheme is implemented in case that the second PLMN is a RPLMN to the user equipment. | 01-15-2015 |
20150024742 | Phased Search for Femtocells - User equipment (UE) includes an architecture for locating femtocells. The architecture implements a phased search approach. The phased search helps the UE find the correct femtocells in a time and power efficient manner, by performing the search in a way that matches the likely changes to femtocell configurations. | 01-22-2015 |
20150024743 | Cell Selection and Reselection Optimizations Responsive to Mobility State - User equipment (UE) obtains system information using a foreground or background process. The system information may include cell information that distinguishes femtocells from macrocells. Given this cell information, the UE may avoid tuning to or attempting to connect to cell types that the UE does not support. For instance, the UE may avoid connection attempts to femtocells, when the UE does not support femtocell connections. | 01-22-2015 |
20150024744 | METHOD FOR CELL SELECTION FOR NARROWBAND TERMINAL AND APPARATUS USING SAME - Provided are a method for cell selection for a narrowband terminal and an apparatus using same. A narrowband terminal receives a wireless frame comprising a first synchronous signal for a user equipment supporting a first bandwidth, and a second synchronous signal for a user equipment supporting a second bandwidth which is narrower than the first bandwidth. The narrowband terminal searches at least one neighboring cell on the basis of the second synchronous signal. The narrowband terminal selects at least one cell from among one or more neighboring cells. | 01-22-2015 |
20150024745 | Device Discovery Method, Device, and System - A device discovery method includes: enabling, by a first device, a device-to-device monitoring and broadcasting function; after the first device detects broadcast information of a second device, reporting the broadcast information of the second device and a user identifier of a target user to a network side, requesting that the network side obtains, according to the broadcast information of the second device, an identifier of a user that logs in to the second device, and determines whether the identifier of the user that logs in to the second device is the user identifier of the target user; and receiving a result of the determining returned by the network side, and confirming, by the first device according to the result of the determining, whether a device to which the target user logs in falls within a preset distance from the first device. | 01-22-2015 |
20150031358 | Cell Search and Measurement in Heterogeneous Networks - An extended cell search procedure enables more inclusive measurement reports by mobile terminals operating in a heterogeneous network. The mobile terminal may be configured to conduct an extended cell search to enable better detection of signals transmitted from weaker cells. For mobile terminal with extended cell search capabilities, the network sends an extended cell search message to the mobile terminal when there is a need for an extended cell search. In response to the extended cell search message, the mobile terminal uses an extended cell search procedure rather than the normal cell search procedure (as specified in Rel-8 of the LTE standard) when performing cell searches. | 01-29-2015 |
20150031359 | OPTIMIZATION ON NETWORK ASSISTED PROXIMITY SERVICES DISCOVERY MANAGEMENT - Methods, apparatuses, and computer program products for network assisted ProSe discovery management are provided. One method includes establishing, by a network element, a discovery context of a user equipment, and transmitting a discovery context establishment request comprising beacon information on at least one other user that a user of the user equipment is interested in discovering. | 01-29-2015 |
20150038136 | POWER EFFICIENT DISCOVERY OF LTE-DIRECT RELAY FOR OUT-OF-COVERAGE DEVICES - Methods, systems, and devices are described for managing wireless communications. In one method, a mobile device may determine to transition to a relay status. The relay status may indicate a capability of the mobile device to function as a relay device between at least one other mobile device and a base station. A peer discovery signal that indicates the relay status may then be transmitted. In another method, a mobile device may broadcast an out-of-coverage status indicator in a first peer discovery signal. A second peer discovery signal may be received from at least one other mobile device. The second peer discovery signal may indicate a capability of the at least one other mobile device to function as a relay device. | 02-05-2015 |
20150038137 | METHOD AND RELATED MOBILE DEVICE FOR CELL SEARCH IN MULTI RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY SYSTEMS - In one implementation, a radio is tuned to a frequency and bandwidth such that it can accommodate a plurality of frequency channels of a plurality of RATs. Radio samples are acquired by the radio and stored to an input memory. The RAT specific cell search further includes performing a RAT specific frequency scan on the set of radio samples to detect candidate frequencies for each RAT. Performing the RAT specific frequency scan may comprise dividing the set of radio samples into the plurality of frequency channels for each RAT, sensing the energy for each channel for each RAT, determining a set of frequency channels having highest energy for each RAT and attempting to detect candidate frequencies having highest energy for each RAT. | 02-05-2015 |
20150038138 | METHOD AND USER EQUIPMENT FOR COLLECTING CONFIGURATION DATA USEABLE FOR INITIALIZATION OF A RADIO ACCESS NODE - It is presented a user equipment ( | 02-05-2015 |
20150045020 | Systems and Methods for Limiting Mobile Device Measurements for Cell Reselection and Handover - System and method embodiments are provided for limiting mobile device neighbor cell measurements for cell reselection and handover. In an embodiment, a method in a mobile device for limiting neighbor cell search and measurements for reselection and handover includes determining a state of the mobile device from one of a plurality of states, wherein the states comprises an idle state, a static-idle state, a connected state, and a static-connected state defining idle state to static-idle state and connected state to static-connected state transition criteria; defining static-idle state to idle state and static-connected state to connected state transition criteria; and selecting a time interval to wait between successive neighbor cell search and measurements for cell reselection and handover according to the state of the wireless device, wherein the time interval corresponding to one of the states is less than the time interval corresponding to another of the states. | 02-12-2015 |
20150045021 | MANAGING WIRELESS CONNECTIONS BASED ON MOTION - Methods, systems, and apparatuses are described for avoiding short-lived wireless connections. In one method, a first connection with a first access point may be used for data transmissions. A motion state of a mobile device may be determined based on sensor data from at least one sensor within the mobile device. A second access point may be identified. A determination may be made to use the second access point for data transmissions based at least in part on the motion state of the mobile device. | 02-12-2015 |
20150045022 | ACCESS POINTS AND METHODS FOR ACCESS POINT SELECTION USING AN INFORMATION DATA STRUCTURE - Methods and systems are presented which provide selection techniques for network equipment to communication stations with access point information that may be utilized to select network equipment for determining a location of the communication station. Techniques are disclosed involving location determination information in wireless networks. Such techniques may involve time of flight distance measurement protocols, signal strength measurement techniques and wireless communication networks. The networks may include IEEE 802.11 networks. In some embodiments, a device or communication station may receive a list of access point entries including data structures that have logical links corresponding to neighboring access points, the list being usable by the device to select an access point in a constant O(1) time. The data structure many include an address access point identifier, the geographic coordinates of the access point, a height above a floor value, unit types, and the error values. | 02-12-2015 |
20150045023 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR IMPROVED MEASUREMENTS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Methods and apparatus for communication comprise storing a first portion of a set of frequencies in a frequency measurement list, wherein the first portion of the set of frequencies includes a first sequence of one or more frequencies. The methods and apparatus further comprise storing a second portion of the set of frequencies in a frequency waitlist when a maximum frequency measurement list size meets or exceeds a maximum frequency measurement list size threshold value, wherein the second portion of the set of frequencies includes a second sequence of one or more frequencies. Moreover, the methods and apparatus comprise performing a communication procedure based on one or more frequencies stored in one or both of the frequency measurement list and the frequency waitlist. | 02-12-2015 |
20150045024 | MEASUREMENT PATTERN FOR SMALL CELL SEARCHING - Methods and apparatus, including computer program products, are provided for small cell searching. In one aspect there is provided a method. The method may include searching, in a first mode, for a first cell including a first base station based on a first event; changing, based on a second event, to a second mode having a search rate different than the first mode, wherein the second mode searches for the first cell including the first base station; and establishing a connection from a user equipment to the first base station serving the first cell. Related apparatus, systems, methods, and articles are also described. | 02-12-2015 |
20150045025 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTING EQUIVALENT PLMN - Provided are a method and apparatus for selecting a Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN). A method for providing a PLMN list in a Mobility Management Entity (MME) may include: receiving a request from a user equipment (UE); determining whether the UE prefers Voice over Long Term Evolution (VoLTE) according to the request; and sending, when the UE prefers VoLTE, a variant equivalent PLMN list that contains, for each PLMN, information indicating whether VoLTE is supported by the PLMN or a VoLTE-support PLMN list that contains only PLMNs supporting VoLTE. Hence, the UE having a preference for VoLTE may select an equivalent PLMN supporting VoLTE in an effective manner. | 02-12-2015 |
20150050930 | METHOD FOR DETECTING A SIGNAL FOR DIRECT COMMUNICATION BETWEEN UE'S IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR SAME - The present invention relates to a method for transmitting an identification signal from a first UE to a second UE for direct communication between UE's in a wireless communication system. In particular, the method includes the steps of: transmitting a first identification signal formed by using a part of the information on the first UE to the second UE; and transmitting a second identification signal including the rest of the information on the first UE to the second UE, wherein the transmission duration time of the second identification signal is longer than that of the first identification signal. | 02-19-2015 |
20150050931 | DETERMINING AN IDENTIFICATION OF A CELL - An apparatus receives a plurality of reports from at least one mobile terminal, which is connected to a particular cell of a cellular communication network. Each report includes an identification of a first type of a plurality of cells of the cellular communication network currently observed by the at least one mobile terminal and, associated with each identification of the first type, a result of at least one measurement on signals. The apparatus computes for each identification of the first type, a result of at least one measurement in the plurality of reports. The apparatus then determines, based on the computed sums, one of the identifications of the first type to be an identification of the first type of the particular cell. | 02-19-2015 |
20150050932 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, MOBILE STATION DEVICE, AND BASE STATION DEVICE - A wireless communication system includes a first base station device, a second base station device, and a mobile station device configured to communicate with the first and second base station devices. The first base station device includes a request notifying unit configured to notify the mobile station device of a request for carrier aggregation. The mobile station device includes: a cell search unit configured to, upon receiving the request, perform cell search and thereby search the second base station device available for carrier aggregation; and a base station notifying unit configured to notify the first base station device of information indicating the second base station device detected by the cell search unit performing the cell search. | 02-19-2015 |
20150056987 | Contention-based Integration of Device to Device (D2D) Networks with Wireless Infrastructure - Efficient D2D link integration can be achieved by allowing mobile devices to independently initiate D2D/connection-proxy discovery without re-broadcasting beacons originating from the wireless access point. A mobile station wanting to establish a D2D link may broadcast a search message to neighboring mobile stations, which may return offer messages specifying a connection quality and/or parameters of the candidate indirect connection. The requesting mobile station may then select one of the responding neighboring mobile stations through which to establish the indirect connection. Responding mobile stations may delay offer message transmission by a period that is proportional to a connection quality to reduce offer message redundancy. | 02-26-2015 |
20150056988 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR OBTAINING SYSTEM INFORMATION FOR A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - Devices, systems, articles of manufacture, and methods for obtaining system information for a wireless communication device are described. According to some embodiments, a subscription supported by the wireless communication device enters a paging reorganization mode. The wireless communication device acquires a portion of system information by a first subscription using a radio frequency (RF) resource. The subscription changes a paging mode of the wireless communication device. The subscription releases the RF resource after acquiring the portion of the system information and prior to acquiring all of the system information. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also claimed and described. | 02-26-2015 |
20150056989 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IDENTIFYING MICROCELLS IN MACROCELLS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS, AND HANDOVER METHOD AND SYSTEM USING SAME - The present invention relates to a method for identifying a microcell in a macrocell including the steps of: a User Equipment (UE) obtaining a physical identity of the microcell by performing cell search on an adjoining microcell; and the UE identifying the microcell by using a specific pattern of a sub-frame transmitted by the microcell. | 02-26-2015 |
20150056990 | EXTENDING EARFCN VALUE RANGE IN GERAN - An E-UTRAN neighbor cell list is broadcast in a GERAN network using the extended EARFCN value ranges (i.e., 18 bits). Extending the EARFCN value ranges in GERAN and signaling EARFCN values within the extended EARFCN value range to inter-RAT-capable UEs that camp in GERAN allow GERAN to support continued inter-RAT mobility between GERAN and E-UTRAN networks. E-UTRAN neighbor cell information may be communicated to UEs in the GERAN network by System Information message broadcasts using the extended EARFCN value ranges. | 02-26-2015 |
20150065126 | METHOD FOR CONNECTING TO NETWORK AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE THEREOF - A method for connecting to a network in an electronic device is provided. The method includes generating a list of Access Points (APs) to which the electronic device fails to connect upon AP connection, when APs are scanned, classifying the scanned APs into a first group and a second group based on the list, and omitting performance of a discovery operation with an AP of the second group and performing the discovery operation with an AP of the first group, wherein the first group is a group of APs which are not included in the list. | 03-05-2015 |
20150065127 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR IMPROVING CONNECTED MODE SEARCH - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to a method and apparatus for improving connected mode search (e.g., by UE having at least two RF chains). According to aspects, the UE may dynamically configure based, at least in part, on at least one measured signal quality parameter, one of the first or second RF chains to perform a search procedure while the other RF chain communicates with the network. According to aspects, the UE may coordinate a search procedure during compressed mode gaps using both RF chains when a measured at least one signal quality parameter passes a first threshold for both RF chains, wherein a set of one or more carriers searched by the first RF chain is different than a set of one or more carriers searched by the second RF chain. | 03-05-2015 |
20150065128 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMPUTER PRODUCT, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A communication apparatus includes a display configured to display an image; a processor configured to control the display; and a storage configured to store information processed by the processor. The processor, in each communication area of a base station that is communicable with the communication apparatus, upon connection to an access point enabling communication with the base station by a different communication method, correlates and stores to the storage as connection history information, a connection history of connection to the connected access point and the communication area, and when the display is caused to transition from a non-displaying state to a displaying state, scans the access point corresponding to the communication area, based on the connection history information. | 03-05-2015 |
20150072679 | HIGHER PRIORITY NETWORK SCANNING - A user equipment (UE) determines whether the UE is camped on a highest priority network. The UE being configured to scan for a higher priority network even though the UE is already camped on the highest priority network as specified in a network selector data structure that identifies networks and that indicates respective priorities of the identified networks. In response to determining that the UE is camped on the highest priority network, the UE stops scanning for a higher priority network. | 03-12-2015 |
20150072680 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION CONTROL SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND CONNECTION PROGRAM - A communication system having a first communication apparatus and a second communication apparatus is disclosed. The first communication apparatus includes a transmission unit which transmits a signal including at least a network identifier, and wherein the second communication apparatus includes a selection unit which selects a network identifier included in a signal received; and a control unit which connects to a network of the network identifier selected when predetermined information is included in a predetermined location in the network identifier selected and which outputs an alarm when the predetermined information is not included in the predetermined location in the network identifier selected. | 03-12-2015 |
20150079980 | Transmision Point Selection - This disclosure relates to selection of transmission points in a communication system. Information of potential reference signals is sent from a network element to a mobile device to configure the mobile device for measurement of at least one received signal characteristic of the indicated potential reference signals. The mobile device then performs measurement on the indicated potential reference signals and sends to the network element information of at least one port selected by the mobile device based on the measurement. | 03-19-2015 |
20150079981 | Method and Device for Receiving System Information - The embodiments of the present document provide a method and apparatus for receiving system information. The method includes: a UE receiving system information and/or system information updating indication of a serving cell and/or a neighboring cell according to system configuration, including: receiving the system information and/or the system information updating indication of the serving cell and/or the neighboring cell from other locations except a fixed location configured by the system. By using the method and the apparatus provided by the embodiments of the present document, the user terminal can receive the system information from other locations except the fixed location configured by the system, thereby solving the problem in the related art that the user terminal cannot obtain the system information due to interference in the system information at the fixed location. | 03-19-2015 |
20150087301 | GEO-LOCATION ASSISTED CELLULAR NETWORK DISCOVERY - A mobile device includes a global navigation satellite system (GNSS) module, a modem, a memory, and an application processor. The GNSS module is configured to determine geographical location information of the mobile device. The memory is configured to store the geographical location information and associated cell information including previously camped cell information entries associated with respective geographical location information. The modem is coupled to the GNSS module and configured to perform a cell search based on previously camped cell information associated with the geographical location information. The modem may retrieve one of the previously camped cell information entries from the memory based on corresponding geographical location information. The application processor is coupled to the GNSS module and modem, and configured to store association data in the memory. The association data includes the geographical location information from the GNSS module and associated cell information from the modem. | 03-26-2015 |
20150087302 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND WIRELESS CONNECTION METHOD THEREOF - Disclosed is a wireless connection method for a mobile terminal. The method includes: starting to search for an access point in a current environment; judging whether the access point is found within a preset time, and when rise judgment result is yes, acquiring the found current access point and suspending the search; judging whether the access information recorded in advance matches the current access point, and when the judgment result is yes, recessing the current access point using the access information; storing the current access point in a list; and continuing searching for a next access point, and returning to the step of judging whether an access point is round within a preset time. Also disclosed is a mobile terminal. In this way, the mobile terminal and the wireless connection method therefor of the present invention can rapidly access an access point, improving the user experience. | 03-26-2015 |
20150094057 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT FOR D2D DISCOVERY - According to a first aspect of embodiments herein, the object is achieved by a method in a base station for handling a process of discovering a candidate user equipment for Device to Device, D2D, communication in a cell. The cell is served by the base station. The base station divides ( | 04-02-2015 |
20150094058 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SEARCHING FOR NETWORK - The present invention discloses a method and an apparatus for searching for a network. The method includes: determining that a user equipment (UE) camping on a cell of a current public land mobile network (PLMN) is in an access barred state; determining that the UE cannot be successfully registered with the current PLMN; and performing a PLMN search. In the method and the apparatus for searching for a network according to embodiments of the present invention, if it is determined that the UE normally camping on the cell of the current PLMN is in the access barred state and cannot be successfully registered with the current PLMN, the PLMN search is performed, so that when the UE is in the access barred state, the UE can still perform the PLMN search, and can further select a new PLMN for access and execute a normal service, thereby improving user experience | 04-02-2015 |
20150094059 | Mobile Communication Device Providing Communication Pathway Determination Assistance - A system and method in a mobile communication device for providing assistance to a user in determining a communication pathway. A system may comprise processor-executable instructions, that when executed by a processor, cause a mobile communication device that supports a communication type over multiple networks to access availability information stored in a remote database for determining available networks among the multiple networks for performing the communication type, determine the available networks using the availability information, provide user assistance for determining a selected network among the available networks for the communication type, and perform the communication type using the selected network. | 04-02-2015 |
20150099514 | OPERATING STATES FOR D2D DISCOVERY - A device is configured to perform a method of device-to-device (D2D) communication in a wireless communication network in accordance with a Long Term Evolution (LTE) standard. The method includes entering an RRC-Idle state or an RRC-Connected state. The method also includes transmitting, in the RRC-Idle state or RRC-Connected state, a D2D discovery signal for receipt by at least one second device in the network. The method further includes receiving, in the RRC-Idle state or RRC-Connected state, at least one D2D discovery signal from the at least one second device in the network. | 04-09-2015 |
20150105070 | Method To Improve Cell Selection Procedures in a Single SIM/Multi-SIM Environment - The various embodiments provide methods implemented by a mobile communication device for determining whether to camp on a cell based on an updated measurement of the received signal strength associated with the cell. A mobile communication device may determine an updated received signal strength for an absolute radio-frequency channel number (“ARFCN”) associated with a cell while or after acquiring and decoding the ARFCN's broadcast control channel. The mobile communication device may utilize the updated signal strength value when calculating the ARFCN's cell's suitability criteria instead of the potentially stale signal strength value acquired during an initial power scan over the frequency band, thereby enabling the mobile communication device to make more accurate cell suitability determinations. Thus, the mobile communication device may experience an increase in performance and/or may increase the user's experience. | 04-16-2015 |
20150105071 | Method and Arrangement for Supporting Cell Selection - Methods and arrangements, for supporting cell selection in a mobile terminal (UE | 04-16-2015 |
20150105072 | METHOD FOR DETERMINING NEIGHBORING BASE STATION, BASE STATION, AND PROCESSING NETWORK ELEMENT - The present invention provides a method for determining a neighboring base station, a base station, and a processing network element. The method for determining a neighboring base station includes: receiving, by a base station, a measurement report, sent by a terminal, of another base station adjacent to the base station; sending, by the base station, the measurement report to a processing network element; and determining, by the processing network element, a neighboring base station of the base station according to the measurement report. The technical solution provided in the present invention can be used to determine a neighboring base station of a base station, which avoids a problem in the prior art that an error is likely to occur in manually determining a neighboring base station of a base station, thereby improving accuracy of determining a neighbor relationship between base stations. | 04-16-2015 |
20150111571 | USER EQUIPMENT AND RECONNECTION METHOD FOR MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - User equipment includes a cell search unit configured to execute a cell search; a detector configured to detect that reconnection is required; a storage unit configured to store VoIP support information that indicates, for each type of radio communications system (RAT), whether voice packet communication is allowed; a cell search target determination unit configured to refer to the VoIP support information and report only the type of the radio communications system (RAT) for which the voice packet communication is allowed to the cell search unit as a target of the cell search, when the detector detects that the reconnection is required for the voice packet communication; and a communication unit configured to communicate in a cell that is detected by the cell search. | 04-23-2015 |
20150111572 | RADIO TERMINAL AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - A radio terminal according to a present invention comprising a communication judgment unit ( | 04-23-2015 |
20150119026 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ACQUIRING SERVICE USING MULTIPLE CHANNELS - The present disclosure includes systems and methods for acquiring service using multiple channels. In one embodiment, the present invention includes a method comprising successively configuring a first wireless communication channel and a second wireless communication channel of a single wireless apparatus to receive a plurality of signal frequencies of one or more radio communication protocols. The first wireless communication channel is configured to receive different signal frequencies of the plurality of signal frequencies than the second wireless communication channel. The first wireless communication channel and the second wireless communication channel process the plurality of signal frequencies in parallel to establish a service connection. | 04-30-2015 |
20150119027 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE TERMINAL APPARATUS, LOCAL AREA BASE STATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - The present invention is designed to provide highly efficient local area radio access. In a communication system in which a mobile terminal apparatus ( | 04-30-2015 |
20150119028 | Method, device and terminal for selecting public land mobile network - A method, device and terminal for selecting a Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN) are disclosed. The device includes a wireless access technology module for storing one or more wireless access technologies supported by the terminal and select a wireless access technology for accessing a PLMN, a list module for generating a PLMN list according to the wireless access technology selected by the wireless access technology module, and a network selecting module for searching and selecting a PLMN according to the PLMN list. The method includes determining a wireless access technology for accessing a PLMN; generating a PLMN list according to the wireless access technology; and, searching and selecting a PLMN according to the PLMN list. Through implementation of the disclosure, the problem that a wireless access technology expected by a user can not be implemented due to use of a network selecting method provided by a current 3GPP standard protocol can be better solved, and the user experience is enhanced. | 04-30-2015 |
20150119029 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SEARCHING FOR RADIO FREQUENCY SIGNALS BY A SUBSCRIBER UNIT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and subscriber unit (SU) are provided that control an order in which a subscriber unit (SU) tunes to, and inspects, a frequency for a signal. When the SU activates in a wireless communication system, the SU searches for an RF signal by reference to a search list, wherein the search list maintains a prioritized list of channel numbers in association with a Public Land Mobile Network, an access technology, and a band number. In response to detecting the RF signal, the SU determines whether the RF signal is acceptable and, in response to determining that the RF signal is acceptable, connects to an access network associated with the RF signal. | 04-30-2015 |
20150119030 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETECTING CELL IDENTITY CONFLICT - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method and an apparatus for detecting a cell identity conflict. The method includes: determining that a user equipment accesses a first cell or performs connection establishment or connection re-establishment in a first cell at a first time point T1; searching whether interaction information related to the user equipment exists in other cells except the first cell near the first time point T1; and performing cell identity conflict detection on the first cell and a second cell when it is found, through the searching, that the interaction information related to the user equipment exists in the second cell among the other cells near the first time point T1. The embodiments of the present invention do not rely on a neighboring cell list and an operation of reporting cell information by a user equipment, thereby improving detection efficiency of a cell identity conflict. | 04-30-2015 |
20150126187 | System and Methods for Cooperative Network Acquisition on a Multi-SIM Wireless Device - Methods and devices are disclosed for enabling efficient service acquisition on multiple SIMs of a multi-SIM wireless communication device. After both SIMs have lost service, or after initial power up of the wireless device, the wireless device may detect radio frequency channels associated with wireless networks of all SIMs, and determine whether the strongest received radio frequency channel matches a preferred network of any SIM. Upon detecting a match, the wireless device may awaken that SIM and automatically camp that SIM on cell of the matched radio frequency channel. In this manner, the wireless device may avoid repetition typically involved in acquiring service on multiple SIMs. | 05-07-2015 |
20150126188 | Beacon Management for Network Assisted Device-to-Device Communication - A method of a wireless communication device adapted to perform device-to-device communication is disclosed. The method comprises transmitting an indication of device-to-device communication capability to a network node ( | 05-07-2015 |
20150133115 | OPERATION METHOD FOR SEARCHING FOR CELL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND DEVICE SUPPORTING SAME - Provided is an operation method for sensing a cell which is performed by a terminal in a wireless communication system. The operation method comprises: obtaining wireless fingerprint information from a network; obtaining an intra-frequency measurement result by performing an intra-frequency measurement; evaluating a correlation on the basis of the wireless fingerprint information and the intra-frequency measurement result; and determining whether or not to search for a cell on the basis of the evaluation result on the correlation. | 05-14-2015 |
20150141004 | AVOIDING FORBIDDEN CELL RESELECTIONS IN MULTIMODE NETWORKS - Methods, systems, and devices for wireless communications are described. According to these techniques, a user equipment (UE) may determine that the UE is in a serving cell, identify at least one forbidden neighbor cell while the UE is in the serving cell, and adjust a measurement interval of the at least one forbidden neighbor cell while the UE is in the serving cell. | 05-21-2015 |
20150141005 | Using Sensor Data to Provide Information For Proximally-Relevant Group Communications - Methods, devices, and systems for a mobile device to perform actions associated with applications when confirmed to be within proximity of a physical location relevant to the applications, including identifying a unique identifier of a proximate wireless network access point, determining whether the unique identifier matches a predefined identifier stored on the mobile device and associated with an application, obtaining sensor data via a sensor in response to determining that the unique identifier matches the predefined identifier, processing the obtained sensor data to identify encoded information, determining whether the encoded information within the obtained sensor data is associated with the unique identifier, and performing an action based on the encoded information in response to determining that the encoded information is associated with the unique identifier. In various embodiments, the unique identifier may be a service set identifier (SSID), and the sensor data may be acoustic signals emitted from a speaker. | 05-21-2015 |
20150141006 | DEVICES AND METHODS FOR PREVENTING OUT-OF-SERVICE PERIODS IN MULTI-SUBSCRIPTION SCENARIOS - Access terminals capable of employing multiple subscriptions are adapted to prevent out-of-service periods for one or more subscriptions. According to one example, an access terminal can establish a data communication on a first subscription utilizing a first network, and an idle mode connection on a second subscription utilizing a second network. A determination can be made that the first subscription is indicating data transfer. In response to such a determination, the second subscription can attempt a change from a radio access technology associated with the second network to a different radio access technology. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also included. | 05-21-2015 |
20150141007 | Extended access barring for CSG cells - It is provided an apparatus, comprising CSG (closed subscriber group) determining means adapted to determine one of plural CSG types to which the apparatus belongs, based on a CSG entry stored by the apparatus, wherein the plural CSG types are related to a closed subscriber group advertisement received from a cell of a base station; selecting means adapted to select one of plural EAB (extended access barring) parameter sets based on the determined one of the plural CSG types, wherein the plural EAB parameter sets are received from the cell and wherein each of the plural EAB parameter sets is related to one of the plural CSG types; applying means adapted to apply extended access barring to an access of the apparatus to the cell based on the selected EAB parameter set. | 05-21-2015 |
20150141008 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, SERVER APPARATUS, CONTROLLING SYSTEM, CONTROLLING METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A mobile communication terminal performs: registering a length of time starting at a time when an identifier of a base station is detected by a first communication unit, the identifier being transmitted by the base station accommodated in a first communication network, and ending at a time when the first communication unit accesses an access point accommodated in a second communication network in association with the identifier, the access point having an accessible range smaller than that of an accessible range of the base station; and starting, at the second first communication unit, a search for access information transmitted by the access point when a reference time determined based on a length of time associated with the registered identifier has passed a time when the identifier is detected, in a case where the identifier detected by the first communication unit is stored. | 05-21-2015 |
20150148034 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING MASS REGISTRATION SCENARIO IN TWO-WAY RADIO SYSTEM - A method and apparatus are described for managing a mass registration scenario in a two-way radio system. A site controller in a trunked radio system detects a mass registration condition in which registration requests by subscriber units are likely to collide on an inbound control channel. During the mass registration condition, the site controller initiates a restriction period by instructing subscriber units that are members of particular talkgroups to temporarily cease registration requests. Those talkgroup members are permitted to resume their registration requests when a predetermined delay time has passed since the members were instructed to cease registration, or when a particular silence time has passed without registration activity over the control channel. | 05-28-2015 |
20150148035 | Access Control for Terminals in UTRAN FEMTO System - The teachings herein provide authorization control enabling the co-existence of legacy mobile terminals ( | 05-28-2015 |
20150296364 | System and Methods for Increasing Efficiency of a Public Land Mobile Network Search in Service Acquisition on a Multi-SIM Wireless Device - Methods and devices are disclosed for enabling improved service acquisition on a first SIM of a multi-SIM wireless communication device. After the first SIM has lost service, the wireless device may detect a condition triggering a public mobile land network (PLMN) selection associated with the first SIM, receive an indication that service acquisition settings of the first SIM are set to a manual mode, and determine whether the second SIM is in idle mode. Upon determining that the second SIM is in idle mode, the wireless device may identify timing of a sleep cycle implemented by the second SIM, and perform the PLMN search using the first and second radio resources. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296429 | Network Elements,Cellular Communication System and Methods Therefor - A method and apparatus is provided for facilitating identification of a cell in a cellular communication system and particularly a system which incorporates different radio access technologies. A network element such as a Radio Network Controller (RNC) includes a store containing a neighbor cell list, the neighbor cell list containing parameters relating to neighbor cells wherein parameters of cells in the neighbor cell list which have a common area of coverage and which support radio access technologies different from one another are linked together. A signal processor correlates measurement reports received by the RNC from a user equipment with the neighbor cell list to determine the identity of a cell in the cellular communication system. The invention has particular applicability to resolving the problem of Primary Scrambling Code confusion where a repeating pattern of small cells lies underneath a macrocell. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296444 | Radio Resource Control Connection Establishment - The invention refers to method performing a Radio Resource Control, RRC, connection establishment in accordance with a cell selection process, wherein a first timer ( | 10-15-2015 |
20150296520 | Multi-SIM Acquisition Performance Improvement by Priority Modification in Partial Out-of-Service Conditions - Various embodiments for improving acquisition of services in multi-SIM mobile devices by using modified priorities for radio access technologies (RATs) in partial out-of-service conditions include determining when a first radio access technology (RAT) within a plurality of RATs begins to use a shared resource within the multi-SIM mobile device that is configured to be utilized by the plurality of RATs, determining whether a second RAT within the plurality of RATs was in-service or out of service at the time when the first RAT began using the shared resource, calculating a modified priority value for the second RAT in response to determining that the second RAT was in-service at the time, and determining an order for subsequent scanning for the services by the plurality of RATs based on the calculated modified priority value for the second RAT when the second RAT in-service at the time. | 10-15-2015 |
20150304946 | FASTER CELL SELECTION - Methods and apparatus are described for performing cell selection for reducing an initial acquisition time between a user equipment (UE) and a network entity, comprising measuring a signal from a cell, the signal including at least one system information block (SIB), wherein the at least one SIB includes a plurality of cell selection threshold values; attempting to decode the at least one SIB; determining, in response to successfully decoding the at least one SIB, whether one or more measurements of the signal pass or fail a cell selection criteria check that includes the plurality of cell selection threshold values; determining, in response to the cell selection criteria check failing, whether the plurality of cell selection threshold values are within range of a plurality of corresponding minimum network threshold values; and performing a cell selection procedure on the cell in response to determining that the plurality of cell selection threshold values are within range of the plurality of corresponding minimum network threshold values. | 10-22-2015 |
20150312843 | PROVIDING GROUP CALL PRIORITY ACCESS IN LTE AND PRIORITY ACCESS FOR USER EQUIPMENTS WITH DUAL ACCESS CLASSES - The disclosure relates to determining priority access with dual access barring classes. An aspect receives, at a client device, at least one high priority access barring class and at least one low priority access barring class, switches to the low priority access barring class, receives an access barring message, and switches to the high priority access barring class in response to receiving the access barring message. An aspect receives a call request for a high priority call among a group of client devices, transmits a notification to a network instructing it to transmit an access barring message in response to receiving the call request, wherein one or more members of the group of client devices switch to a high priority access class in response to receiving the access barring message, and suppresses call announcements for non-priority call requests after transmitting the notification. | 10-29-2015 |
20150319597 | SIGNAL TRANSMISSION METHOD AND DEVICE FOR DEVICE-TO-DEVICE (D2D) IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of transmitting a discovery signal by a first UE for device-to-device (D2D) communication in a wireless communication system according to the present invention includes a step of a first UE transmitting a discovery signal for identifying a second UE for D2D communication, wherein the discovery signal includes information related to the presence or absence of D2D data for the D2D communication. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319676 | NARROW BANDWIDTH SIGNAL REJECTION - Methods and apparatus are described for performing a cell search procedure. For example, the methods and apparatus may include making multiple signal power measurements over multiple bandwidths on a wideband frequency channel, where the signal power measurements may correspond to a signal received on the wideband frequency channel. Further, the methods and apparatus may further include performing a narrowband rejection procedure based on the signal power measurements, where the narrowband rejection procedure may determine whether the signal power measurements correspond to a narrowband signal or a wideband signal. Moreover, the methods and apparatus may also include continuing a wideband cell search procedure on the wideband frequency channel based on the narrowband rejection procedure determining that the signal power measurements correspond to the wideband signal. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319679 | Femtocell Fingerprinting - User equipment (UE) includes an architecture for handling femtocell fingerprints. The architecture may, as examples, maintain the validity and reliability of fingerprints and coordinate enhancement to existing fingerprints. The architecture also supports fingerprint creation, updating, and deletion. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319680 | Motion-Based Kinetic Fingerprint Radio Selection - Motion adaptive wireless user equipment (UE) in a wireless network are provided. Kinetic information is leveraged to select a preferred radio (or radio technology) or adapt a reselection scanning interval. This can serve to improve the performance of a UE by reducing the amount of power expended in maintaining an adequate level of connectedness to the wireless network components in the face of UE movement. In a further aspect, kinetic power generators can be employed as a source of UE transit data. Kinetic fingerprints can be compared to UE transit data, e.g., that acquired from a kinetic generator of the UE, to facilitate selection of preferred radios and reselection intervals. In this aspect, radio selection schema and reselection scanning schema can effectively be selected with little to no drain on a UE power source. | 11-05-2015 |
20150327044 | METHODS, APPARATUSES, AND DEVICES FOR WIRELESS TRANSCEIVER DISCOVERY USING RE-ALLOCATED SCAN TIMES - Methods, apparatuses, and devices are disclosed that may be used re-allocate active scan times of available frequency channels used by wireless transceivers within range of a mobile device. Re-allocation of active scan times may comprise increasing and/or decreasing active time scans based, at least in part, on a number of wireless transceivers discovered transmitting on one or more of the available frequency channels. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327105 | BLACKLISTING TECHNIQUES FOR DETECTED SET EVENT EVALUATION - Blacklisting techniques for detected set event evaluation are described. In one embodiment, for example, user equipment (UE) may comprise at least one radio frequency (RF) transceiver, at least one RF antenna, and logic, at least a portion of which is in hardware, the logic to receive a measurement control message comprising a remotely-selected event evaluation blacklist (EEB) for a wireless communication frequency, determine whether a local EEB exists for the wireless communication frequency, and in response to a determination that a local EEB exists for the wireless communication frequency, replace the contents of the local EEB with the contents of the remotely-selected EEB. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327159 | Systems and Methods for Using a Channel Access Scheme of a First Network to Synchronize With a Second Network During an Active Call on a Multi-SIM Device - Embodiment methods and devices enable use of a shared radio resource on a multi-SIM wireless communication device to maintain session information on a service associated with one SIM during unused time slots of an active communication session associated with another SIM. During the session, a processor may calculate radio idle time periods in the active communication session, determine whether any of the radio idle time periods will exceed a predetermined threshold duration, and retune the shared radio resource to receive search samples on a frequency of the non-active network during radio idle time periods that exceed the predetermined threshold duration. Search samples may be stored for processing between radio idle time periods in order to maintain session information on a service associated with one SIM and provide service information to applications executing on the device during the active communication session. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327316 | METHOD FOR MATCHING MULTIPLE DEVICES, DEVICE FOR ENABLING MATCHING THEREOF AND SERVER SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method for matching multiple devices, and a device and a server system for enabling the matching thereof. According to one aspect of the invention, provided is a matching method comprising: determining, from a perspective of a first device, characteristic information on a motion of the first device; determining, from a perspective of a second device, characteristic information on at least one of the motion of the first device, an input to the second device according to the motion of the first device, an operation on the second device according to the motion of the first device, and a location change of the first device caused by the motion of the first device; and matching the first device and the second device based on the characteristic information determined from the perspective of the first device and the characteristic information determined from the perspective of the second device. | 11-12-2015 |
20150334550 | DISCOVERY MESSAGE TRANSMISSION FOR DEVICE TO DEVICE COMMUNICATION - A method for transmitting a discovery message for device to device communication from a first user equipment to a second user equipment includes: receiving or generating, by the first user equipment, a position information defining a geographical position; generating, by the first user equipment, the discovery message; and transmitting, by the first user equipment, the discovery message to the second user equipment using a common air interface of the first user equipment and the second user equipment. The discovery message comprises a position information part such that at least a part of the position information is transmitted from the first user equipment to the second user equipment | 11-19-2015 |
20150334639 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE TERMINAL APPARATUS, LOCAL AREA BASE STATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - The present invention is designed to provide highly efficient local area radio access. A communication system, in which a mobile terminal apparatus ( | 11-19-2015 |
20150341772 | Method and Apparatus for Processing D2D Device Identity - The disclosure provides a method and an apparatus for processing Device-to-Device (D2D) device identity. The method includes that: a D2D device transmits a temporary D2D identity request; the D2D device receives temporary D2D identity authorization information corresponding to the temporary D2D identity request, and acquires a temporary D2D identity; and the D2D device broadcasts the received temporary D2D identity, wherein the temporary D2D identity is configured to discover the D2D device by a discovering D2D device in a D2D discovery process. By the disclosure, the security of communication among the D2D devices is improved. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341846 | Targeted PLMN Search - Targeted public land mobile network (PLMN) search by a wireless user equipment (UE) device. A PLMN search may be initiated at the UE. It may be determined whether PLMN search targeting information is available. A targeted PLMN search may be performed if PLMN search targeting information is available. Targeting the PLMN search may include reducing the number of frequencies or frequency bands searched as part of the PLMN search. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341848 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISCOVERING RADIO NETWORK - A terminal determines a state of the terminal among an idle state and a connected state. The terminal selects one of a plurality of network scan methods based on a state of the terminal. In addition, the terminal discovers an accessible radio network according to the selected scan method. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341851 | POLICY CONTROL FOR A MACHINE-TO-MACHINE GROUP - A method for controlling, by a policy and charging enforcement unit, an access procedure of a mobile entity to a packet switched network via a cellular network, the mobile entity belonging to a group of mobile entities having common policy and charging rules. The method comprises the steps of receiving an attach request message to establish a group session for one of the mobile entities belonging to group, and checking whether a group subscription profile with policy and charging rules is provided in the policy and charging enforcement unit for the group, wherein if the policy and charging rules are provided in the policy and charging enforcement unit, the provided policy and charging rules are applied to the one mobile entity for which the attach request message has been received. | 11-26-2015 |
20150351003 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR DETECTING DISCOVERY SIGNAL - A method and a device for detecting a discovery signal in a wireless communication system are provided. A wireless device receives a discovery setting for detecting a discovery signal of a target cell from a serving cell, and detects the discovery signal transmitted by the target cell according to the discovery setting. The discovery setting includes information on a discovery subframe to which the discovery signal is transmitted among a plurality of subframes. | 12-03-2015 |
20150351009 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SEARCHING FOR A PUBLIC LAND MOBILE NETWORK (PLMN) - Embodiments of the present invention include devices, systems and methods for efficient PLMN searching. One method can include initiating a service search procedure. A list of channels to perform a power scan on is prepared. One or more channels are removed from the list of channels that use a same public land mobile network as a camped on cell. Frequencies of the channels are obtained from system information. A power scan is performed on the channels in the list of channels to obtain power scan results. One or more channels are removed from the power scan results. An acquisition process is performed on the channels in the power scan results. Other aspects, embodiments and features are also claimed and described. | 12-03-2015 |
20150351010 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SHARING SCANNING INFORMATION - Systems and methods are disclosed for facilitating a scanning process to obtain information about available WLANs operating within range. Scanning information already obtained by one or more wireless communications devices may be shared with another wireless communications device, thereby reducing the time spent by performing scans by other wireless communications device. As desired, shared scanning information may be used preferentially depending on one or more metrics characterizing the information, such as the age of the scanning information or the relative distance to the sharing wireless communications device. | 12-03-2015 |
20150351011 | Systems and Methods for Cell Selection and Reselection by Improving System Information Reading Procedure - Described herein are methods performed by user equipment (“UE”) for carrier aggregation deployment and organization in unlicensed bands. The method includes initiating a cell selection process with a target cell, wherein the target cell sends a plurality of information blocks, receiving a first information block, prior to reading a second information block, determining whether the target cell is suitable for the UE to camp on based on the first information block, and terminating the cell selection process when the target cell is determined to be unsuitable for camping based on the first information block. The terminating may include comparing data from the first information block to data stored in a database. The method further includes determining whether the UE is in a stationary state or is in a state of motion, and using this information to improve cell selection delay on target cell. | 12-03-2015 |
20150351012 | Device and Method for WiFi Scan Optimization - A method and wireless station used to perform WiFi scans. The wireless station determines a first cell identity of a first cell to which the wireless station is currently connected, determines a second cell identity of a second cell that is available, determines whether either of the first or second cell identities are related to a WiFi network based on relationships between cell identities and WiFi networks stored in the wireless station, performs a first type of scan for available WiFi networks when either of the first cell identity or the second cell identity is related to the WiFi network and performs a second type of scan for available WiFi networks when neither of the first cell identity or the second cell identity is related to the WiFi network, the first type of scan is performed more frequently or over more channels compared to the second type of scan. | 12-03-2015 |
20150351016 | CELL SEARCH METHOD AND DEVICE - A cell search method is applied to a wireless system for cell search synchronization. Frame signals of the wireless system include a first sub-frame and a second sub-frame. Both of the first and second sub-frames include a first regular timeslot and a down pilot timeslot. It is determined whether a length of an actual synchronization window is smaller than a length of the first synchronization search window that is a sum of a length of the first-sub frame and a length the first regular timeslot and the down pilot of the second sub-frame. When the length of the actual synchronization search window is smaller, at least a part of data carried in the first regular timeslot and the down pilot timeslot of the second sub-frame or the first sub-frame is duplicated to before or after the actual synchronization search window. | 12-03-2015 |
20150358803 | METHOD, BASE STATION AND USER EQUIPMENT FOR PERFORMING D2D SERVICE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for performing device to device (D2D) communication in a wireless communication system and a user equipment for the method are disclosed. The method comprises the steps of determining at least one D2D communication group a of a plurality of D2D communication groups; and giving RNTI corresponding to the determined at least one D2D communication group a to a D2D transmitting user equipment i and a D2D receiving user equipment j of a D2D link (i, j). | 12-10-2015 |
20150358805 | Assisted Device Discovery - An electronic device may communicate according to a first communication standard and a second communication standard. The first communication standard may have a longer communication range than the second communication standard. The electronic device may send a capability indication through the first communication standard. The capability indication may indicate the electronic device is capable of communicating according to the second communication standard with a shorter communication range than the first communication standard. The electronic device may discover a second electronic device capable of communicating according to the second communication standard and positioned outside of a non-extended communication range of the second communication standard. Upon discovery, the electronic device may communicate with the second electronic device at an extended range of the second communication standard even though the second electronic device is positioned outside the non-extended communication range of the first electronic | 12-10-2015 |
20150358894 | User Equipment and Method of Searching for a Cell - A user equipment comprises a wireless interface for communication with a cellular communication network. The user equipment is configured to detect a device-to-device signal received from a further user equipment at the wireless interface. The user equipment is configured to search for a cell of the cellular communication network to camp on based on the device-to-device signal. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358897 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PERFORMING ACTIVE SCANNING - A method and a device for performing active scanning are disclosed. The method for active scanning of a STA comprises the steps of: transmitting a probe request frame that contains channel monitoring type information in a scanning channel; determining whether the scanning channel is in a busy state until a MinimumChannelTime; determining whether a PPDU including a valid PLCP header is received in the scanning channel until the MinimumChannelTime; and determining a time for monitoring a probe response frame transmitted by the AP in the scanning channel based on whether the PPDU is received until the MinimumChannelTime and channel monitoring type information, when the scanning channel is in the busy state, wherein the channel monitoring type information can contain information on a type with which the STA monitors the probe response frame in the scanning channel. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358898 | COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A communications system is described in which a core network apparatus provides a configuration for accessing a packet data network by a mobile communications device when operator determined barring is in place. Also disclosed are signalling messages used to control the setting up of the packet data connection, which messages are sent between a device in the core network and the mobile communications device. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358901 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING ACCESS TECHNOLOGY SELECTION - A method and system for selecting at a terminal at least one of a plurality of available access networks for use with a wireless application invoked at the terminal according preferences associated with the wireless application, the network service provider, the subscriber, the subscriber subscription and application content provider. The selection may be constrained by an Application Policy received from a network service provider. | 12-10-2015 |
20150365834 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ENHANCED CELL SELECTION AND CELL RE-SELECTION - A method for cell selection or cell re-selection by a wireless communication device in a Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) network is described. The method includes obtaining signal-to-noise ratios (SNRs) associated with multiple cells. The method also includes delaying a camping decision until a broadcast control channel (BCCH) of a strong SNR cell is decoded. The SNR of the strong SNR cell is greater than the SNR of a high received signal strength indication (RSSI) cell. The method further includes camping on the strong SNR cell. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365882 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING A CELL SEARCH IN MULTIPLE ANTENNA WIRELESS SYSTEMS - A methods for performing a cell search in multiple antenna wireless systems using a plurality of spatial filters is disclosed, and includes applying a plurality of spatial filters to a plurality of received signal streams to generate a plurality of filtered signal streams. The plurality of received signal streams correspond to signals received at a plurality of receive antennas from a plurality of signal sources (e.g., neighboring cells). In an aspect, the plurality of spatial filters may be predefined spatial filters and may be weighted using a set of predefined filter weights. In an additional or alternative aspect, the plurality of spatial filters may be adaptive spatial filters and may be weighted using a set of dynamically determined filter weights. The method includes detecting physical network identities based on the plurality of filtered signal streams. | 12-17-2015 |
20150373619 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT FOR PCI ASSIGNMENT - Network node and method therein for assignment of Physical Cell Identities (PCIs) to Radio Base Stations (RBSs) in a wireless communication network. The method includes determining a most densely located RBS, based on the distances from each RBS to a certain number of other RBSs of the plurality of RBSs. The method further includes, for each RBS, i, for which a PCI is to be assigned: assigning a Secondary Synchronization Signal (SSS) to the RBSi from a set of SSSs, based on a distance from the RBSi to another RBS in the communication network associated with the same SSS, and a number of tiers between the RBSi and, at least, the other RBS. Further, a Primary Synchronization Signal (PSS) is assigned to the RBSi, based on the number of cells associated with the RBSi; and a PCI is assigned to the RBSi, based on the SSS and the PSS. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373627 | UE INITIATED DISCOVERY IN ASSISTED MILLIMETER WAVELENGTH WIRELESS ACCESS NETWORKS - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. The apparatus may be a UE. The UE transmits a beamformed broadcast request signal to a base station in a plurality of transmissions in transmit spatial directions of the UE, receives a beamformed broadcast response signal from the base station in a resource of a plurality of resources, and determines a preferred transmit spatial direction of the UE based on the resource in which the beamformed broadcast response signal is received. The apparatus may be a base station. The base station scans for a beamformed broadcast request signal from a UE, determines a preferred transmit spatial direction of transmit spatial directions of the UE, determines a resource of a plurality of resources for indicating the determined preferred transmit spatial direction, and transmits a beamformed broadcast response signal to the UE in the determined resource. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373630 | USER EQUIPMENT FOR MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS AND METHOD FOR ACCESSING A TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method and a user equipment ( | 12-24-2015 |
20150373635 | METHOD OF AUTOMATICALLY SELECTING LEGAL COMMUNICATION CHANNEL USED BY MOBILE ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND MOBILE ELECTRONIC DEVICES USING THE SAME - The disclosure provides a method of automatically selecting a legal range communication channel within an unlicensed spectrum for a mobile electronic device and a mobile electronic device using the same method. In one of the exemplary embodiments, the mobile electronic device would determine a geographical region information in which the mobile electronic device is located; determine a legal range of communication channels within an unlicensed spectrum according to the geographical region information; and select a communication channel from the legal range of communication channels for a communication through a first wireless interface. | 12-24-2015 |
20150382170 | SMART SEARCHING OF WIRELESS DEVICES USING DEVICE LOCATION INFORMATION - Particular embodiments described herein provide for an apparatus, such as a wireless electronic device, that includes a memory element configured to store electronic code, a processor operable to execute instructions associated with the electronic code, and at least one module. The at least one module is configured to receive first location information identifying a first location associated with an electronic device. The at least one module is further configured to receive first connection location information indicative of a second location of the electronic device at a time of connection with a first wireless device. The at least one module is further configured to evaluate for a presence of the first wireless device when the first location is within a predetermined distance of the second location. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382286 | TELEMATICS SUPPORT FOR MOBILE WIRELESS NETWORK SERVICE SWAPPING - A method for implementation at a processor of a vehicular telematics unit is described. The method allows data structures formatted to store one or more wireless network communication parameters to be updated in response to a swap of a subscription with one network service provider for a subscription with a different network service provider. The method includes receiving, from a network access device of the vehicular telematics unit, a home public land mobile network (HPLMN) identifier corresponding to a wireless network service provider corresponding to an active subscription. The method also includes identifying, in a set of one or more access point name (APN) data structures each having a public land mobile network (PLMN) identifier field, a matching APN data structure having the HPLMN identifier stored at its PLMN element and designating the matching APN data structure as active. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382288 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR OPTIMIZING PERFORMANCE OF A RADIO DEVICE - An apparatus ( | 12-31-2015 |
20160006531 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR IMPROVING SERVICE SEARCH AND BAND SCAN - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to techniques for improving band scanning procedures by a UE, for example, to speed re-acquiring service after a loss of service event. | 01-07-2016 |
20160007270 | PROXIMITY DETECTION - A method of detecting a proximity to a target device. The method comprises scanning a wireless network frequency band in a personal mobile device to discover at least one wireless network signal, triggering, in response to a discovery of the at least one wireless network signal, a magnetic field scan of a magnetometer operated by the personal mobile device, detecting, in the personal mobile device, according to the magnetic field scan, a presence or an absence of a magnetic field signature associated with a predefined proximity to a target device. | 01-07-2016 |
20160007274 | SCANNING METHOD AND APPARATUS - Disclosed are a scanning method and a scanning apparatus. The scanning method for a station (STA) comprises the steps of: transmitting a probe request frame including a scanning priority for a plurality of access points (APs); and sequentially monitoring for the reception of a probe response frame, which is a response to the probe request frame, from at least one of the plurality of Aps for the plurality of APs on the basis of the scanning priority. Thus, scanning processes can be quickly performed. | 01-07-2016 |
20160007275 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACTIVE SCANNING IN WIRELESS LAN - Disclosed are a method and an apparatus for active scanning in a wireless LAN. The method for active scanning in a wireless LAN may comprise the steps of: a first station (STA) transmitting a first probe request frame to an access point (AP); and a first STA receiving a probe response frame from the AP, wherein the probe response frame is a response for the probe request frame, and the first probe request frame comprises fast initial link setup (FILS) capability information which can indicate whether the first STA supports FILS. | 01-07-2016 |
20160014676 | NETWORK ASSISTED ACCESS NETWORK SELECTION ENHANCEMENTS FOR A MACHINE-TO-MACHINE WIRELESS NETWORK ENVIRONMENT | 01-14-2016 |
20160014677 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR UTILIZING WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS TO SUGGEST CONNECTIONS FOR A USER | 01-14-2016 |
20160014679 | NETWORK ASSISTED ACCESS NETWORK SELECTION ENHANCEMENTS FOR A MACHINE-TO-MACHINE WIRELESS NETWORK ENVIRONMENT | 01-14-2016 |
20160014683 | ASSISTED SYSTEM SCANNING WITH PAIRED DEVICES | 01-14-2016 |
20160014687 | Location Information Erase on SIM Cards | 01-14-2016 |
20160014689 | ADVERTISING SUPPORTED DOMAINS VIA PROBE REQUEST/RESPONSE AND BEACONS | 01-14-2016 |
20160014712 | Cluster Based Communication | 01-14-2016 |
20160021514 | Survey Techniques for Generating Location Fingerprint Data - Surveying techniques for generating location fingerprint data are described. A mobile device can survey a venue by measuring, at multiple locations at the venue, signals from one or more signal sources. At each location, the mobile device can take multiple measurements of signals. The mobile device can take each measurement at a distinct orientation. The measurements can be used to determine expected measurements of the signals at the venue. Differences between the multiple measurements of signals can be used to determine a variance of the expected measurements. The expected measurements and variance can be designated as location fingerprint data for the venue. The location fingerprint data can be used by mobile devices for determining a location at the venue. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021525 | NETWORK DISCOVERY BY BATTERY POWERED DEVICES - Disclosed are techniques to minimize the electricity consumption of battery powered devices during network communications and performance of other functions. Example techniques include efficiently discovering other mains powered and battery powered devices within communication range of the battery powered device. In another example, techniques enable a battery powered device to serve as a relay for one or more other battery powered devices. In another example, techniques ensure that transmissions to and/or from battery powered devices are delivered efficiently and with low latency. In yet another example, techniques determine whether and under what conditions a battery powered device should migrate from one network to another. In the event of migration, example techniques minimize battery consumption associated with the migration. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021601 | METHOD FOR TRANSFERRING INFORMATION BETWEEN BASE STATION AND TERMINAL, BASE STATION, TERMINAL, AND SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present invention relate to the field of communications technologies, and disclose a method for transferring information between a base station and a terminal, a base station, a terminal, and a system, which diversify manners for transferring information between a base station and a terminal. The method includes: receiving a broadcast channel, where the broadcast channel is not only used for transferring basic physical layer configuration information of a cell, but also used for transferring first specific content agreed between the terminal and the base station, and the first specific content is used for transferring configuration information required by the terminal to access a network; and parsing out the first specific content from the broadcast channel. The present invention is mainly applied to transfer of information between abase station and a terminal. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021650 | METHOD FOR ADAPTIVE BEAM PLACEMENT IN WIRELESS SYSTEMS - A method for operating a phased array antenna for a wireless communication system serving an area in which communications demands from a plurality of mobile communication devices change as a function of time, the method involving: for each time of a plurality of successive times, (1) obtaining information indicative of a total mobile communications demand density as a function of beam direction for that time; and (2) with the phased array antenna, electronically generating a communication beam directed in a direction for which total mobile communications demand density is high for that time relative to other beam directions. | 01-21-2016 |
20160029298 | Method of Controlling WLAN Access for Wireless Communication Devices - The present disclosure relates to method performed by a wireless communication device ( | 01-28-2016 |
20160029347 | CHANNEL SELECTION METHOD AND APPARATUS - The present invention provides a channel selection method and an apparatus, relates to the field of communications, can improve channel scan and detection efficiency. The method includes: randomly selecting m channels from a preset channel page; determining, from the m channels, a working channel and a spare channel that meet a preset condition; scanning, the working channel of the first superframes and the spare channel of the first superframes in an inactive period of each of the n first superframes according to preset first scan duration, to acquire n energy levels of the working channel and n energy levels of the spare channel; and determining, in an inactive period of the n | 01-28-2016 |
20160037324 | System And Method Providing Location Based Wireless Resource Identification - A system and method providing location based wireless resource identification in a communication system. Various aspects may comprise determining a location of a communication system (e.g., a multimode communication device). One or more wireless resources may then, for example, be identified based, at least in part, on the determined location. Additionally for example, respective manners of communicating with identified wireless resources may be determined and utilized for communication between the communication system and the identified wireless resources. A communication system may, for example, comprise a location determination module adapted to determine a location of the communication device. A wireless resource identification module may, for example, be adapted to identify one or more wireless resources based, at least in part, on the determined location. Also for example, a communication manager module may be adapted to determine respective manners of communicating with the identified wireless resources. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037437 | CONTROL OF SERVICES AT A CELL LEVEL OR A SECTOR LEVEL - A device may connect to a base station included in a service provider network. The base station may serve a geographic area where the device is located. The device may receive service information associated with the base station. The service information may correspond to the geographic area served by the base station, and may include an access state associated with a service. The access state may indicate a manner in which the device is permitted to access the service via the base station. The device may provide information associated with the access state to cause the device to access the service in accordance with the access state. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037440 | CELL DISCOVERY - This disclosure generally relates to cell discovery. In one embodiment, an association between a cell and an indicator index corresponding to one of a set of scrambling sequence indicators may be predefined. A first base station may transmit the set of scrambling sequence indicators to a second base station. The second base station may select an indicator from the indicators according to the predefined association, for generating a reference signal to be transmitted to user equipment. The user equipment may determine identification information of the cell based on the received reference signal and the predefined association, and transmit the identification information to the first base station. In this way, the user equipment may determine the identification information of the cell based on the received reference signal, and then transmit the identification information to the base station, such that the load on the base station may be reduced in the procedure of cell discovery. | 02-04-2016 |
20160044576 | METHOD FOR MANAGING INFORMATION ABOUT ON/OFF SMALL CELLS IN RADIO ACCESS SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FR SUPPORTING SAME - The present invention relates to a method for managing information of on/off small cells in a small cell-based network system and apparatuses for supporting the same. As an embodiment of the present invention, a method for managing information on on/off small cells in a radio access system supporting small cells comprises the steps of: receiving a first message including cell state change information of a first cell corresponding to a small cell, which is changed to an on state or an off state, by a second cell; and transmitting a second message including the cell state change information to a UE by the second cell. At this time, the cell state change information may contain identification information of the first cell, on/off time information indicating a time when change to an on state or an off state is made, and on/off timer information indicating a time interval in which the change to the on state or the off state is made. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044579 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, TERMINAL DEVICE, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication system includes a first cell, a plurality of second cells, a first base station that manages the first cell, and a terminal device that is present in the first cell, wherein the first base station transmits notification information indicative of a specific cell in which short-procedure communication is capable of being performed out of the second cells to the terminal device, and the terminal device performs a cell search targeting the specific cell out of the second cells in accordance with the notification information. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044580 | OVERLAPPING CHANNEL SCANS - While scanning through various channels to find network controllers that are both within range and available, the scanning device may cover multiple channels simultaneously by using a bandwidth that encompasses multiple channels. This may be particularly useful with WiFi devices that are using the 2.4 GHz band, in which the channel spacing may be about 5 MHz, while the channel bandwidth may be about 22 MHz. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044581 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF OPTIMIZED SERVICE ACQUISITION SCAN IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - One or more aspects of the disclosure provide for an improved service scan operable at an access terminal (AT). At power up or selection/reselection, the AT maintains a record of the best and worst possible rank of the system records associated with each acquisition record that is read. When performing a service scan, the AT sorts the acquisition records by the best possible rank in ascending order. For further optimization, according to some aspects of the disclosure, all acquisition records of the same best possible rank may be sorted in ascending order of the least possible rank. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044582 | METHOD TO ACCELERATE MANUAL PUBLIC LAND MOBILE NETWORK SEARCH IN DUAL-SIM DUAL-ACTIVE DEVICES - A method for public land mobile network (PLMN) search on a mobile communication device includes: initiating a PLMN search for a first plurality of radio access technologies (RATs) associated with a first subscription; determining whether one or more of the first plurality of RATs associated with the first subscription are also associated with a second subscription; and performing a PLMN search for the one or more of the first plurality of RATs that are also associated with the second subscription using an RF chain associated with the second subscription. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044588 | METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM FOR ACCESS TECHNOLOGY CONFIGURATION - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method, a device and a system for access technology configuration. The method includes: receiving a registration request of an access point, where the registration request includes a function unit list or a module class identification in the access point, the function unit list includes all function unit lists of a new module in the access point or a newly-added function unit list of the new module, and the module class identification is used to differentiate modules including different function units in the access point; identifying an access technology of the access point according to the function unit list or the module class identification, and generating access technology configuration information; and sending the access technology configuration information to the access point, so that the access point configures the access technology corresponding to the access point according to the access technology configuration information. | 02-11-2016 |
20160050551 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND DEVICES FOR ENABLING MULTIPLE RADIO ASSITED DISCOVERY - Embodiments of the present disclosure can include methods, devices and systems for unified information to be carried in P2P discovery, NAN discovery, BLE discovery and NFC discovery that enable two devices to set up a data session either over a P2P link or over an AP infrastructure link. Certain embodiments can be used or extended to any other out-of-band Wi-Fi or Wireless Gigabit Alliance (WiGig) Discovery. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050552 | METHOD FOR DEVICE TO DEVICE COMMUNICATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - The present invention relates to a Method for a device-to-device (D2D) communication in a wireless communication system. Specifically, when a terminal, which is performing a device-to-device communication while performing channel hopping, additionally performs the device-to-device communication with a new terminal, a channel hopping period of the existing device to device communication is configured by same time intervals for channels and one time interval among the same time intervals is configured to be identical to a channel hopping period for discovering a new terminal. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050592 | MOBILE TERMINAL FOR CELL RESELECTION IN CELLULAR MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHODS THEREFOR - Methods and apparatuses are provided for cell reselection at a mobile terminal. A first cell measurement is performed with respect to a serving cell and a first set of one or more cells included in a neighbor cell list. A second cell measurement is performed to detect a second set of one or more cells that are not included in the neighbor cell list, based on the first cell measurement. One or more candidate cells that satisfy cell reselection criteria are determined from among the first set of one or more cells and the second set of one or more cells. One of the one or more candidate cells is reselected. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050614 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CONFIGURING MULTI-BAND BASED LINK IN WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM - A method and a device for setting a multi-band based link in a wireless LAN system are disclosed. The method for configuring a wireless link comprises the steps of: receiving, from a wireless access device supporting the plurality of communication channels, a beacon message through a first communication channel among a plurality of communication channels; obtaining, from the beacon message, wireless access information which is used for accessing a first communication channel; and obtaining, from the beacon message, at least one available communication channel list except for the first communication channel among the plurality of communication channels. Thus, the time for configuring a link between wireless LAN apparatuses can be reduced. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050617 | METHOD FOR RECEIVING SEARCH SIGNAL FOR DETECTING SMALL-SIZED CELL - According to one embodiment of the present description, a method by which a terminal receives a search signal from a small-sized cell is provided. The method can comprise the steps of: receiving, from a serving cell, configuration set information of search signals of clustered neighboring small-sized cells for each cluster; determining configuration information of a search signal of each of the neighboring small-sized cells belonging to a corresponding cluster on the basis of the set information; and detecting a search signal from a corresponding small-sized cell on the basis of the determined configuration information. | 02-18-2016 |
20160057631 | Methods and Apparatus for Configuration of Femtocells in a Wireless Network - Methods and apparatus that enable and optimize the simultaneous operation of several wireless femtocells having overlapping coverage areas. In one embodiment of the invention, a resource allocation (e.g., time-frequency grid for an OFDM or TDMA based wireless network) governs the simultaneous operation of several femtocells with overlapping coverage areas by specifying uses for resources. A resource allocation unit (RAU) entity is disclosed for managing and modifying resource allocations for femtocells. The community of femtocells can flexibly share resources according to the time-frequency grid, thereby maximizing spectral efficiency without requiring substantial network overhead. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057730 | TELECOMMUNICATIONS APPARATUS AND METHODS - A paging method in a wireless telecommunications system. A core network element selects a base station from plural base stations including a tracking area to have primary responsibility for paging a terminal device and conveys an indication of the terminal device to the selected base station. Each base station maintains a paging database identifying one or more terminal devices for which it has a responsibility for paging. When a terminal device is to be paged, the core network element transmits a paging request to the plural base stations including the tracking area. The respective base stations then determine whether to onward transmit a paging message for the terminal device based on a comparison between an identifier for the terminal device being paged with entries in their paging database, and if the comparison indicates it has responsibility for paging the terminal device, it will transmit a paging message accordingly. | 02-25-2016 |
20160066211 | USER APPARATUS AND COLLISION DETECTION METHOD - A user apparatus that transmits and receives a discovery signal, including: collision detection means that detects a collision in a received discovery signal; collision notification means that, when a collision of a received discovery signal is detected by the collision detection means, transmits collision information indicating that a collision occurs in the received discovery signal; collision information reception means that receives collision information; and collision determination means that determines whether a collision occurs in a transmitted discovery signal transmitted by the user apparatus based on the collision information received by the collision information reception means. | 03-03-2016 |
20160066252 | APPARATUS, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING WIRELESS SCANNING - Some demonstrative embodiments include apparatuses, systems and/or methods of controlling wireless scanning. For example, an apparatus may include a radio to communicate with a wireless network; and a scan controller to control a wireless scan by the radio according to a scan pattern, the scan controller to determine a mobility state of the mobile device, the mobility state representing a combination of a velocity of the mobile device and an environment of the mobile device, and to determine the scan pattern based on the mobility state. | 03-03-2016 |
20160066260 | GENERATING DOWNLINK FRAME AND SEARCHING FOR CELL - The present application relates to a method of generating a downlink frame. The method of generating the downlink frame includes: generating a first short sequence and a second short sequence indicating cell group information; generating a first scrambling sequence and a second scrambling sequence determined by the primary synchronization signal; generating a third scrambling sequence determined by the first short sequence and a fourth scrambling sequence determined by the second short sequence; scrambling the short sequences with the respective scrambling sequences; and mapping the secondary synchronization signal that includes the first short sequence scrambled with the first scrambling sequence, the second short sequence scrambled with the second scrambling sequence and the third scrambling sequence, the second short sequence scrambled with the first scrambling sequence and the first short sequence scrambled by the second scrambling sequence and the fourth scrambling sequence to a frequency domain. | 03-03-2016 |
20160073325 | Systems and Methods For Selecting a Network Access System - A system according to some embodiments of the invention includes (1) a component (e.g. ANDSF) that provides a cell selection rule to a UE and (2) a component (e.g. an access node) that provides the UE with information about the load in the cell currently utilized by the UE. This enables the UE to determine whether to leave the cell, which may be a 3GPP cell, and use a different cell, which may be a non-3GPP cell, by applying the cell selection rule in conjunction with its knowledge about the load of the cell. | 03-10-2016 |
20160073329 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR NETWORK CURATION - Systems and methods for network curation are disclosed. In some embodiments, a method comprises scanning, by a mobile device, an area to identify a network device for accessing a network, receiving, by the mobile device, a network identifier associated with the network device, providing a curation indicator request to a curation server, the curation indicator request comprising the network identifier, receiving a curation indicator from the curation server, the curation indicator being retrieved, based on the network identifier, from a database of a plurality of curation indicators, the curation indicator associated with a likelihood of intent to publicly share the network by the network device, comparing the curation indicator to an access setting, the access setting indicating acceptability of network access based on the likelihood of intent to publicly share the network by the network device, and accessing the network via the network device based on the comparison. | 03-10-2016 |
20160073336 | WIRELESS ACCESS POINT RESOURCE AVAILABILITY, NOTIFICATION, AND NETWORK MANAGEMENT - A connection management resource receives performance information indicating bandwidth availability associated with multiple wireless access points in a wireless network. The connection management resource analyzes the performance information to identify an ability of each of the multiple wireless access points in the wireless network to provide a prospective new user access to a remote network. Based on the analysis of the performance information, the connection management resource produces a notification indicating the ability of each of the multiple access points to provide wireless bandwidth to the prospective new user to access the remote network. Via the notification, the prospective new user of a wireless access point is able to determine what to expect for bandwidth after establishing a respective link with the wireless access point. | 03-10-2016 |
20160080925 | Device of Handling Open Direct Discovery for Device-to-Device Communication - A communication device for handling an open direct discovery comprises a storage unit for storing instructions and a processing means coupled to the storage unit. The processing means is configured to execute the instructions stored in the storage unit. The instructions comprise receiving a discovery update message from a first proximity service (ProSe) function, wherein the discovery update message indicates a ProSe Application Code corresponding to a discovery filter or a ProSe Application ID corresponding to the ProSe Application Code; and stopping performing an open direct discovery according to the discovery filter. | 03-17-2016 |
20160081007 | RADIO TERMINAL AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - A radio terminal according to a present invention comprising a communication judgment unit ( | 03-17-2016 |
20160081011 | Method, system and device for acquiring quality of service of wireless access point - A method, system and device for acquiring the quality of service of a wireless Access Point (AP) are described, wherein the method includes that: a User Equipment (UE) detects quality of service of an AP according to a detection indication sent from a network side device; and the UE reports a detection result of the quality of service of the AP to the network side device. | 03-17-2016 |
20160081014 | WHITE SPACE UTILIZATION - The concepts relate to radio white space utilization. One example can obtain information about a location of a device. The example can access a white space database to obtain radio white space frequencies relative to the location. This example can also perform active scanning of at least some of the radio white space frequencies at the location and not perform active scanning on allocated frequencies. | 03-17-2016 |
20160100349 | WIRELESS ACCESS POINT SEARCH DEVICE AND METHOD IMPROVED IN MANNER OF STORING SEARCH RESULTS, CONTROL PROGRAM, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A wireless access point search device improved in a manner of storing search results. A wireless LAN interface searches for a wireless access point. A result receiving section stores an access point information item on the wireless access point found by the wireless LAN interface. When the sum of the number of access point information items stored in the result receiving section and the number of new wireless access point items on respective new wireless access points found by the wireless LAN interface is larger than a predetermined value, a panel controller determines, whether or not to store a new access point information item on each new wireless access point in the result receiving section, based on radio field intensity of the new wireless access point. | 04-07-2016 |
20160100351 | PERFORMING NEIGHBOR MEASUREMENTS BASED ON SIGNAL QUALITY - A method and apparatus for wireless communication adjusts thresholds for performing IRAT neighbor measurements and inter-frequency neighbor measurements. A serving cell search threshold for determining when to perform IRAT neighbor measurements is scaled and a serving cell search threshold for determining when to perform inter-frequency neighbor cell measurements is maintained. Inter-frequency neighbor measurements are performed when a serving cell signal quality is below the maintained, non-scaled, serving cell search threshold and IRAT neighbor measurements are performed when the serving cell signal quality is below the scaled serving cell search threshold. | 04-07-2016 |
20160105786 | LEVERAGING PEER-TO-PEER DISCOVERY MESSAGES FOR GROUP ACTIVITY NOTIFICATION - The disclosure relates to leveraging peer-to-peer (P2P) discovery messages. In an aspect, a user device that is a member of a P2P communications group generates a P2P discovery message indicating an activity state of a group communication session among members of the P2P communications group, and transmits the P2P discovery message to one or more other user devices that are members of the P2P communications group. In another aspect, a user device that is a member of a P2P communications group receives a P2P discovery message indicating an activity state of a group communication session among members of the P2P communications group and determines whether or not to join the group communication session based on the activity state of the group communication session. | 04-14-2016 |
20160112931 | Cell Broadcast for Signaling Resource Load from Radio Access Networks - Concepts and technologies are described herein for cell broadcast for signaling resource load from one or more radio access networks (“RANs”). According to one aspect disclosed herein, a base station can collect signaling load information of the base station. The base station can also generate a cell broadcast message that includes the signaling load information. The base station can also send the cell broadcast message to a target mobile device. The target mobile device can be configured to determine, based at least in part upon the signaling load information, to which radio access network of a plurality of radio access networks to connect. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112932 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR DISPLAYING WIRELESS DEVICE LIST - A method for displaying a wireless device list, includes: acquiring broadcast information sent from a wireless device, the broadcast information including a first field for indicating a name of the wireless device and a second field for indicating a manufacturer of the wireless device; acquiring an identity of the manufacturer of the wireless device according to the second field; and displaying the name of the wireless device and the identity of the manufacturer in a wireless device list. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112937 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, USER TERMINAL, AND PROCESSOR - A communication control method according to the present invention is a method for allowing a cellular communication system to cooperate with a wireless LAN system. The communication control method comprises: a detecting step of detecting, by a user terminal having a cellular communication unit and a wireless LAN communication unit, that the user terminal is present near a small-cell base station; a recognizing step of recognizing, by the user terminal, that the small-cell base station is of a collocated type where the small-cell base station is disposed at a same location as a wireless LAN access point; and a scanning starting step of starting, by the user terminal, scanning for discovery of the wireless LAN access point, when the user terminal has recognized that the small-cell base station is of the collocated type and has not discovered the wireless LAN access point. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112942 | Access Point Assisted Roaming - In embodiments of access point assisted roaming, a mobile device, such as a mobile phone, tablet computer, or other portable device is implemented for wireless connection with access points, such as Wi-Fi access points. An access point controller can receive a request for a neighbor report from the mobile device, and also obtain a travel direction of the mobile device. The access point controller is implemented to determine access points that are each configured for a wireless connection with a communication system of the mobile device, where a wireless connection with an access point is based in part on a detected signal strength of an access point. The access point controller can then generate the neighbor report that lists one or more of the access points in order of connection likelihood and based on the travel direction of the mobile device. | 04-21-2016 |
20160119093 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR SENDING SIGNAL, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - Disclosed is a method for sending a signal, comprising: a small cell sending a discovery signal (DS) in a corresponding sending mode according to a current state of the small cell. Further disclosed is a device for sending a signal. In the present invention, according to the current state of the small cell, an access state of the small cell is adjusted in real time, thereby significantly reducing the interference of the small cell to a neighbor cell, improving the system performance, and being able to reduce the energy consumption of the small cell. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119775 | Mobile Communication Device Providing Communication Pathway Determination Assistance - A system and method in a communication device for providing assistance to a user in determining a communication pathway. A system may comprise processor-executable instructions, that when executed by a processor, cause a communication device that supports a communication type over multiple networks to access availability information stored in a remote database for determining available networks among the multiple networks for performing the communication type, determine the available networks using the availability information, provide user assistance for determining a selected network among the available networks for the communication type, and perform the communication type using the selected network. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119795 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO SCAN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SPECTRUM - Methods and apparatus are disclosed to scan a wireless communication spectrum. In some examples, the methods and apparatus associate a first base station identifier with a first frequency by scanning a wireless communication spectrum at a first rate with a first scanner having base station identifier decoding enabled on the first scanner, measure a signal strength by scanning the wireless communication spectrum at a second rate with a second scanner having base station identification code decoding disabled on the second scanner, the disabling of the base station identification code decoding enables the second scanner to scan at the second rate, the second rate being higher than the first rate, determine whether the signal strength is associated with the first frequency, and when the signal strength is associated with the first frequency, populate a measurement record from the second scanner with the first base station identifier in association with the signal strength. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119857 | BILATERAL SEARCH ALGORITHM FOR LTE SYSTEM - Methods, systems, and devices are described for acquiring a network by a user equipment (UE) by concurrently scanning for a network signal on supported frequencies by two or more antennas. In one aspect, a method may include searching by a first antenna for a first signal on a first group of supported frequencies while concurrently searching by a second antenna for the first signal on a second group of supported frequencies. The method may further include acquiring the first signal from the first antenna on a first frequency, and tuning the second antenna to the first frequency to acquire the wireless network. In one aspect, the first and second groups of supported frequencies may represent frequencies within a single frequency band or frequencies in multiple frequency bands. In one aspect, supported frequencies may be divided into multiple groups and each group may be searched by a corresponding antenna. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119858 | Selective Scanning for Legacy Radio Coverage in Idle Mode - A mobile device may implement an idle mode process in order to selectively scan for legacy radio coverage using a timer-based scanning process. A mobile device may operate in idle mode and may establish a long term evolution (LTE) radio link with a nearby cell site. The idle mode process implemented by the mobile device may include evaluating one or more criteria that are indicative of whether the mobile device is capable of providing sufficient voice service capabilities using voice over LTE (VoLTE). Based on the criteria evaluation, a timer-based scanning process may be initiated. When the timer-based scanning process is initiated, the mobile device may scan for legacy radio coverage periodically. If no legacy radio coverage is available, the mobile device may indicate that voice services are unavailable. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119860 | SLOTTED CELL SEARCH IN HYBRID DATA IN MULTI-SIM DEVICES - A device for and a method of optimizing slotted cell search by a multi-subscriber identity module (multi-SIM) device is provided. The method includes performing a packet-based activity on a first SIM of the multi-SIM device for a first timeslot provided by a first timer, performing a cell-search activity on a second SIM of the multi-SIM device for a second timeslot provided by the second timer; and performing the packet-based activity for the first timeslot and the cell-search activity for the second timeslot by alternately switching between the first timer and the second timer. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119862 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FACILITATING INTERWORKING OF CELLULAR RADIO ACCESS NETWORKS AND WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS - A method, apparatus and computer program product are provided to facilitate interworking a plurality of cellular radio access networks and wireless local area networks (WLANs). In the context of a method, a set of information is maintained for a plurality of different cellular radio access networks that defines a relative priority of selection among the cellular radio access networks. The method also includes maintaining wireless access selection information defining a relative priority of selection among one or more WLANs relative to the cellular radio access networks. The method also permits the relative priority of the WLANs to be modified without modification of the set of information. For example, the relative priority the WLANs may be modified in a manner specific to the user equipment or specific to a cell. The method may also include causing notification to be provided to user equipment of the set of information and the wireless access selection information. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119863 | TERMINAL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION CONTROL DEVICE, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A terminal device including: an acquisition unit configured to acquire information on a small cell, a portion of or an entirety of the small cell overlapping a macro cell, and the macro cell; and a communication control unit configured to perform an access procedure for connection to a base station of the small cell when the terminal device is not connected to any base station. The device can suppress an increase in the load on the base station of the macro cell. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119963 | METHOD OF DEVICE DISCOVERY FOR DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION IN A TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK, USER EQUIPMENT DEVICE AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT - A method of device discovery for device-to-device communication in a telecommunication network, comprising transmitting, from a first device, a discovery request including a first proximity services identifier linked with the first device using a proximity services discovery channel for reception directly at a second device, receiving at the first device over the proximity services discovery channel, directly from the second device, a response to the discovery request including a second proximity services identifier linked with the second device. | 04-28-2016 |
20160127982 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REPORTING PROXY INFORMATION - Provided are a method and a wireless device for reporting proxy information in a wireless communication system. As the wireless device enters the proximity of a first target cell on a target frequency, the wireless device reports first proxy information indicating entering the proximity to a serving cell. Before the wireless device transmits proxy information indicating leaving the proximity after reporting the first proxy information, the wireless device does not report proxy information on entering the proximity of any other target cell on the target frequency. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127984 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND METHOD FOR SEARCHING NETWORK CARRIER - A method for searching network carrier using an electronic device includes receiving a request for a voice service from a user. The electronic device requests a server for a network carrier through which the electronic device can be connected to a network providing the voice service. A message is received from the server. When the received message comprises the network carrier, a connection is established between the network and the electronic device using the network carrier. The voice service is provided for the user through the network. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127986 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF LOCATING WIRELESS CONNECTION AMONG A PLURALITY OF WIRELESS CONNECTIONS - A system and method of locating a wireless connection among a plurality of possible wireless connections. More particularly, a system and method of locating a user preferred wireless connection among a plurality of possible wireless connections. The method includes scanning for available networks and determining whether the available networks satisfy one or more user preferences. The method further includes establishing a secondary network connection with one of the available networks based on one or more user preferences being satisfied. | 05-05-2016 |
20160128114 | Methods and Systems of Pairing Wireless Devices - Embodiments include systems and methods of verifying wireless devices for paring without user interaction or with reduced user interaction. A processor may send, from a first wireless device to a second wireless device, a discovery query, and may receive a discovery response from the second wireless device. The processor may authenticate, in the first wireless device, the second wireless device based on the discovery response. The processor may send, from the first wireless device to a second wireless device, a first capability query. The processor may receive, in the first wireless device from the second wireless device, a first capability response including first capability response information. The processor may authenticate, in the first wireless device, the second wireless device based on the first capability response information. The processor may initiate a pairing process between the first and second wireless devices when the first wireless device authenticates the second wireless device. | 05-05-2016 |
20160135220 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING A LICENSED SHARED ACCESS RADIO - Embodiments described herein relate generally to a communication between a user equipment (“UE”) and a plurality of evolved Node Bs (“eNBs”). A UE may be adapted to operate in a dual connectivity mode on respective wireless cells provided by first and second eNBs. The UE may communicate with a first eNB in a first frequency band. The UE may communicate with a second eNB in a second frequency band. The first eNB may detect that the second frequency band is unavailable. Based on this detection, the first eNB may notify the UE that communication in the second frequency band is no longer available. In response, the UE may control a radio to cease communication in the second frequency band. Other embodiments may be described and/or claimed. | 05-12-2016 |
20160142861 | Service Control Method for Machine Type Communications Device and Related Apparatus and System - A service control method for a machine type communications (MTC) device and a related apparatus are provided. The method includes receiving, by an access-network network element, a paging request message from a core-network network element, wherein the paging request message carries device type indication information of a paged user equipment (UE); determining a device type of the UE according to the device type indication information of the UE; and if the UE is an MTC device, performing the following service operations: paging the UE by using a dedicated paging resource allocated to an MTC device, or determining whether the UE is an MTC device allowed to be accessed in a service control policy, and paging the UE if the UE is an MTC device allowed to be accessed in a service control policy, or determining not to page the UE, and sending a paging reject message to the core-network network element. | 05-19-2016 |
20160150466 | DISCOVERY METHOD AND AN ELECTRONIC DEVICE THEREOF - A method of operating an electronic device and an electronic device thereof are provided. The method includes determining a predetermined discovery window from a plurality of discovery windows; and transmitting a discovery frame to at least one other electronic device in the predetermined discovery window. The electronic device includes a processor configured to determine a predetermined discovery window from among a plurality of discovery windows; and a communication module configured to transmit a discovery frame to at least one other electronic device in the predetermined discovery window. | 05-26-2016 |
20160157150 | METHOD FOR SELECTING A CELLULAR NETWORK | 06-02-2016 |
20160157161 | REDUCING NETWORK SERVICE SCAN TIME BY A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE | 06-02-2016 |
20160157165 | Cell Discovery Method and Device | 06-02-2016 |
20160157167 | FEMTOCELL USE FOR RADIO FREQUENCY NETWORK SWEEPS | 06-02-2016 |
20160165426 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, USER TERMINALS AND NETWORK DEVICES - A user terminal sets desired terminal information for designating a desired user terminal that is desired to be a communication partner of D2D communication, and the user terminal limits scanning of a discovery signal until determining that the desired terminal information is included in the discovery signal information notified from a network apparatus. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165428 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR STEERING TRAFFIC IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for steering traffic in a wireless communication system are provided. User equipment (UE) within a visitor public land mobile network (VPLMN) transmits to a network, access network discovery and selection functions (ANDSF)-related information including information on at least a home ANDSF (H-ANDSF) set by a home PLMN (HPLMN) and/or a visitor ANDSF (V-ANDSF) set by the VPLMN. The UE receives, from the network, the traffic steering information generated through the network on the basis of the ANDSF-related information, and steers the traffic on the basis of the received traffic steering information. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165429 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MITIGATING THE EFFECTS OF INTERFERERS WHILE PERFORMING CONDITIONAL DEVICE SCAM - A method, a personal area network device operating as a slave, and a short range communications device operating as a slave are disclosed. A data storage | 06-09-2016 |
20160165434 | Method, system, mobile terminal and computer program product - Systems, methods, and computer program products are provided for calculating an indicator of a quality of communication within a wireless communication access network and for estimating the available capacity of a base station within the wireless communication access network. In one exemplary embodiment, a method comprises receiving an indication, generated by a mobile terminal, of the quality of communication between the base station and the mobile terminal, and estimating the available capacity of the base station based on the received indication. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165517 | Geographical Detection of Mobile Terminals - One or more telecommunication network cells, each having a geographically distinct radio coverage area, communicate with a mobile terminal so as to identify it and generate information about its usage thereby. Indications of usage of the mobile terminal within the predefined geographical location range and usage of the mobile terminal outside the predefined geographical location range can then be provided based on the information about usage of the mobile terminal generated by the one or more telecommunication network cells. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165520 | Release-Independent Modifications of Network Parameters - A UE transmits a radio access capability to a base station. The radio access capability is transmitted via an information element that comprises a bitmap in which a bit has a value that indicates, to the base station, support of a modification to at least one of a maximum power reduction or a spectrum emission requirement. According to embodiments, the base station manages the UE based on the supported modification. Such managing of the UE may include, for example, one or more of admission control, imposing scheduling restrictions, and imposing handover restrictions. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165521 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING CELL INFORMATION BY USING SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNAL AND DEVICE SUPPORTING SAME - The present invention relates to a wireless access system, and provides a method of transmitting and receiving cell information by using a synchronization signal in a small-cell layout environment and a device supporting the same. A method of transmitting cell information in a wireless access system as an embodiment of the present invention may include the steps of: configuring one or more pieces of cell information by means of a base station; configuring a downlink synchronization signal including one or more pieces of cell information by means of the base station; and broadcasting the downlink synchronization signal by means of the base station. In this case, the cell information is configured to be information different from the downlink synchronization information configured based on the downlink synchronization signal. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165525 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SPECTRAL SCANNING WITHIN A NETWORK - In some embodiments, an apparatus includes a spectral scanning controller configured to interrupt service at a wireless access point (WAP) such that the WAP performs spectral scanning during service interruption. The spectral scanning controller is configured to interrupt service at the WAP at a first scanning frequency when the spectral scanning controller is in a first configuration. The spectral scanning controller is configured to interrupt service at the WAP at a second scanning frequency different from the first scanning frequency when the spectral scanning controller is in a second configuration. The spectral scanning controller is configured to move from the first configuration to the second configuration in response to a change in at least one of a service demand, a service quality, a spectral scanning demand or a spectral scanning quality. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165531 | METHOD FOR ENHANCED ACCESS SELECTION FOR A USER EQUIPMENT IN A CELLULAR TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK, TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK, AND SYSTEM FOR ENHANCED ACCESS SELECTION OF A USER EQUIPMENT - A method for enhanced access selection for a user equipment in a cellular telecommunications network includes: in a first step, a serving base station entity sending validation information to the user equipment, the validation information having either a positive value, indicating to apply a policy corresponding to a policy information data element, or a negative value, indicating not to apply the policy corresponding to the policy information data element; and in a second step, subsequent to the first step, the user equipment applying the policy corresponding to the policy information data element in case that the validation information has a positive value, and the user equipment terminating the data bearer or refraining from establishing the data hearer via the access point in case that the validation information has a negative value. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165533 | COMMUNICATION METHOD, STATION AND SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present application disclose a communication method, including: a station performs association certification with access points, wherein the access points at least includes a first access point and a second access point; the station sends sequence numbers to the access points; the station broadcasts a communication message for enabling the access points to return reply messages to the station according to the sequence numbers in sequence, after receiving the communication message; the station receives a reply message returned by at least one access point, and performs data communication with the at least one access point which returns the reply message. The present application may be used for solving the problems that in an OBSS system, the probability of STA in an overlapped area for competing to obtain a channel is small and the throughput is low. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165658 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR STOPPING DEVICE-TO-DEVICE OPERATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for stopping a device-to-device (D2D) operation in a wireless communication system is provided. A user equipment (UE) supporting proximity services (ProSe) stops an on-going D2D operation if at least one of conditions is satisfied. For example, when the UE detects any cell, when the UE finds a suitable cell, when the UE finds an acceptable cell, when the UE enters a connected state, or when the UE initiates radio resource control (RRC) connection establishment procedure, the UE may stops the on-going D2D operation. | 06-09-2016 |
20160174057 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RE-SEARCHING RESOURCE OF DISCOVERY SIGNAL FOR DEVICE TO DEVICE COMMUNICATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 06-16-2016 |
20160174088 | DISTRIBUTED SMALL-CELL SEARCH | 06-16-2016 |
20160174135 | COMMUNICATING AN INDICATOR EXTENDING AN AREA SCOPE OF SYSTEM INFORMATION | 06-16-2016 |
20160174139 | RANGING PROFILING FOR NEIGHBOR AWARENESS NETWORKING | 06-16-2016 |
20160174143 | FEMTOCELL DISCOVERY AND ASSOCIATION IN CELLULAR NETWORKS | 06-16-2016 |
20160174144 | SYSTEM FOR WIRELESS CONNECTIVITY CONTINUITY AND QUALITY | 06-16-2016 |
20160174286 | SYSTEM FOR WIRELESS CONNECTIVITY CONTINUITY AND QUALITY | 06-16-2016 |
20160174287 | METHOD FOR WIRELESS CONNECTIVITY CONTINUITY AND QUALITY | 06-16-2016 |
20160183170 | METHOD OF PROCESSING RECEIVED DIGITIZED SIGNALS AND MOBILE RADIO COMMUNICATION TERMINAL DEVICE | 06-23-2016 |
20160183173 | USER TERMINAL, RADIO BASE STATION AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD | 06-23-2016 |
20160183176 | SERVICE DISCOVERY TECHNIQUE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK FOR FORMING P2P GROUP | 06-23-2016 |
20160183177 | METHOD FOR SEARCHING NETWORK AT STARTUP, COMMUNICATION PROCESSOR AND TERMINAL EQUIPMENT | 06-23-2016 |
20160183179 | Methods and Devices for Cell Selection | 06-23-2016 |
20160183322 | Terminal Multiple Connection Management Method, Device and System | 06-23-2016 |
20160192174 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A base station of a communications network includes a transceiver circuit configured to transmit signals in a first Radio Access Node (RAN) and signals in a second RAN, and a controller configured to deter mine if signals in the second RAN should be stopped based on a load of the first RAN. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192279 | Session Setup In An Energy-Efficient Cellular Wireless Telecommunications System - The invention relates to a telecommunications system comprising at least a plurality of SA-cells. The invention provides a method for a terminal to facilitate establishment of a data connection between the terminal and at least one of the SA-cells. The method includes steps of, while the terminal is in an idle mode, the terminal transmitting an information request message (IRM) for the plurality of SA-cells and receiving, from each SA-cell of one or more SA-cells of the plurality of SA-cells, a message comprising at least information indicative of a strength with which the each SA-cell received the IRM. The method further includes the step of, at least partially based on the messages received from the one or more SA-cells, the terminal selecting an SA-cell of the plurality of SA-cells for establishing the data connection between the terminal and the selected SA-cell. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192282 | Peer-to-Peer Discovery - A wireless device that discovers other wireless devices for the formation of a peer-to-peer connection may perform a scan that is limited in duration and power consumption. The scan nonetheless is highly likely to discover a device, if a discoverable device exists. In addition, the scan may be performed in compliance with parameters of a peer-to-protocol such that the scan may be readily implemented in a wireless device, in some embodiments even as a firmware upgrade on a wireless network interface card. Parameters of the scan may be adjusted to increase the likelihood that, if the scan completes without discovering a device, no discoverable device exists. The scan may be used in an overall process in which discovery ends or the scan is selectively repeated following an unsuccessful scan, without entering a find phase. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192283 | METHOD FOR SEARCHING WIRELESS LAN AND METHOD FOR TRANSFERRING WIRELESS LAN SEARCH INFORMATION - A method for searching a wireless LAN by a mobile device is provided. The method may include: searching a small cell base station; transferring information about the searched small cell base station to a macro base station; receiving search information of wireless LAN access points in a local area of the mobile device from the macro base station; and performing a search for a wireless LAN access point on the basis of the received search information of the wireless LAN access points. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192284 | RESOLVING IDENTIFICATION CODE AMBIGUITIES IN WIRELESS ACCESS NETWORKS - Systems and methods for resolving identification code ambiguities in wireless access networks are described. In some embodiments, the systems and methods access an identification code associated with a cell in a wireless access network that is detected by a mobile device, determine a probability score for candidate cells that are assigned the identification code in the wireless access network, the probability score based on a likelihood that a candidate cell is a cell in the wireless access network associated with the identification code detected by the mobile device, and select one of the candidate cells as an origination cell of the identification code detected by the mobile device based on the determined probability scores. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192319 | PI reporting method and system, UE, network device and computer storage medium - Disclosed are a method and a system for reporting a Proximity Indication (PI), User Equipment (UE) and network equipment. The method includes that: UE receives a PI information request from a network side; and the UE reports PI information according to the PI information request. Based on this solution, the embodiments of the present disclosure may implement pertinent reporting of the PI information for multiple cell types under control of the network side in a complex small cell network environment, reduce unnecessary information reporting and resource waste on an air interface and enable the network side to effectively implement small cell discovery, handover judgment optimization processing and the like by virtue of the PI information reported by the UE, thereby achieving higher accuracy and effectiveness of PI information reporting and facilitating improvement in network performance. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192421 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A first communication terminal, unconnected with a communication network, searches for a second communication terminal existing around the own communication terminal. In the communication network, one of a plurality of communication terminals functions as a master having a function of an access point, and the rest of the communication terminals function as slaves of the master. Based on the information included in a communication message received from one or more second communication terminals found through the search, the first communication terminal determines a second communication terminal which serves as a connection counterpart from among the second communication terminals, and configures a communication network with the determined connection counterpart. | 06-30-2016 |
20160198326 | Methods and Systems for Varying Channel Scanning Duration | 07-07-2016 |
20160198329 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING DEVICE-TO-DEVICE DISCOVERY IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 07-07-2016 |
20160198331 | WIRELESS TERMINAL, SEARCH PROCESS METHOD FOR WIRELESS TERMINAL, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 07-07-2016 |
20160198333 | DYNAMIC SCROLLING-TICKER FOR INITIATING TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES | 07-07-2016 |
20160198392 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 07-07-2016 |
20160198395 | MANAGEMENT APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS, APPARATUS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS | 07-07-2016 |
20160198396 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD THEREOF | 07-07-2016 |
20160198397 | ELECTRONIC APPARATUS AND METHOD OF SETTING NETWORK OF AUDIO DEVICE | 07-07-2016 |
20160198403 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD, AND PROGRAM | 07-07-2016 |
20160205534 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, USER TERMINAL, AND COMMUNICATION APPARATUS | 07-14-2016 |
20160205617 | CARRIER FREQUENCY HANDLING IN CLUSTERS | 07-14-2016 |
20160205619 | Method for Scanning Services with a Multimode Communication Device | 07-14-2016 |
20160205621 | EXCHANGE OF ACCESS CONTROL LISTS TO MANAGE FEMTO CELL COVERAGE | 07-14-2016 |
20160255569 | USER TERMINAL, RADIO BASE STATION AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD | 09-01-2016 |
20160255571 | Method and apparatus for managing access network information | 09-01-2016 |
20160255576 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TERMINAL TO CAMP ON CELL, AND MOBILE TERMINAL | 09-01-2016 |
20160255668 | ENHANCED PROXIMITY SERVICES DISCOVERY WITH RADIO ACCESS STATUS INDICATOR | 09-01-2016 |
20160381489 | Service Control Method for Machine Type Communications Device and Related Apparatus and System - A service control method for a machine type communications (MTC) device and a related apparatus are provided. The method includes receiving, by an access-network network element, a paging request message from a core-network network element, wherein the paging request message carries device type indication information of a paged user equipment (UE); determining a device type of the UE according to the device type indication information of the UE; and if the UE is an MTC device, performing the following service operations: paging the UE by using a dedicated paging resource allocated to an MTC device, or determining whether the UE is an MTC device allowed to be accessed in a service control policy, and paging the UE if the UE is an MTC device allowed to be accessed in a service control policy, or determining not to page the UE, and sending a paging reject message to the core-network network element. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381545 | System and Method for Faked Base Station Detection - A system and method of detecting fake base stations. A first wireless device such as a user equipment (UE) or a base station (BS) may identify multiple parameters associated with a discovery signal transmitted by a second wireless device, the second wireless device advertising as a BS. The first wireless device may compare the multiple parameters with a set of parameters assigned to, or otherwise associated with, a cluster of neighboring BSs, and determine that the second wireless device is a fake BS when an inconsistency between the multiple parameters and the set of parameters associated with the cluster of neighboring BSs exceeds a threshold. The UE or the BS may also transmit the multiple parameters to a central controller, and the central controller may aggregate, correlate, and analyze the parameters, historical data, and other data from other sources associated with the second wireless device to determine whether the second wireless device is a fake BS. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381546 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING COMMUNICATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of a terminal for performing communication is provided. The method includes, transmitting, by a terminal located outside a cell coverage area, a request message requesting monitoring of a temporary mobile group identity (TMGI) to a relay terminal located within the cell coverage area, receiving a monitoring response message including a layer-2 group identification (ID) in a proximity-based service from the relay terminal, receiving a TMGI announcement message including the layer-2 group ID from the relay terminal, when the relay terminal detects the TMGI, and receiving data related to the TMGI by using the layer-2 group ID. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381626 | METHOD AND COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE FOR IMPROVING FREQUENCY BAND SUPPORT - A communications device for improving frequency band support includes a radio frequency signal processing device, a baseband signal processing device, a memory device and a processor. The RF signal processing device processes RF signals to generate baseband signals. The baseband signal processing device processes the baseband signals. The processor determines whether the communications device supports at least one frequency band of a first type of communication service supported by a network; and performs a scanning procedure according to a priority when the communications device does not support the at least one frequency band, wherein the scanning procedure includes scanning all frequency bands of the first type of communication service supported by the communications device. | 12-29-2016 |
20170238241 | CELLULAR NETWORK SCANNING CONTROL BASED ON AMBIENT IDENTIFIABLE WIRELESS SIGNAL SOURCES | 08-17-2017 |
20170238242 | Providing access to a GPRS network | 08-17-2017 |
20170238243 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR DETERMINING CELL IDENTIFIER | 08-17-2017 |
20170238244 | TARGET ACCESS POINT RECOMMENDATION | 08-17-2017 |
20180026892 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MONITORING TRAFFIC | 01-25-2018 |
20180027398 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DISCOVERY MESSAGE BY TERMINAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND TERMINAL USING SAME | 01-25-2018 |
20190150070 | SYSTEM FOR WIRELESS CONNECTIVITY CONTINUITY AND QUALITY | 05-16-2019 |
20190150073 | MANAGING CONTROL CHANNEL BLIND SEARCHES BETWEEN SEARCH SPACES IN NEW RADIO | 05-16-2019 |
20190150074 | FLEXIBLE GATEWAY FOR HETEROGENOUS-DEVICE MANAGEMENT | 05-16-2019 |
20190150076 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR OBTAINING CONTENT OF SERVICE INFORMATION | 05-16-2019 |
20190150077 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING LIST OF CELLS PROVIDING SCPTM SERVICE | 05-16-2019 |